S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series

Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

4 Interface Management Commands

4.1 Basic Interface Configuration Commands

4.2 Ethernet Interface Configuration Commands
4.3 Logical Interface Configuration Commands

4.1 Basic Interface Configuration Commands

4.1.1 Command Support

Commands provided in this section and all the parameters in the commands are
supported by all switch models by default, unless otherwise specified. For details,
see specific commands.

4.1.2 collect counters top

Function
The collect counters top command sets the parameters for top N interface traffic
statistics and enables the function to generate top N interface traffic statistics
reports.

Format
collect counters top [ number ] interface { interface-type | all | layer-2 |
layer-3 } [ sort-by statistics-type | interval interval-value ] *

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1452

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

number Specifies the number of busiest The value is an integer ranging

interfaces for which traffic from 1 to 50000.
statistics reports are to be
generated.
For example, if the value is 10,
a traffic statistics report about
top 10 busiest interfaces is
generated.
If you do not specify this
parameter, a traffic statistics
report about top 20 busiest
interfaces is generated.

interface Specifies the type of the The specified interfaces must

{ interface- interfaces for which a top N be Ethernet physical interfaces
type | all | traffic statistics report is to be or Eth-Trunk interfaces.
layer-2 | generated:
layer-3 }
● interface-type: indicates a
specific type of interface.
● all: indicates all interfaces.
● layer-2: indicates Layer 2
interfaces.
● layer-3: indicates Layer 3
interfaces.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1453

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Parameter Description Value

sort-by Specifies the statistics type by The value can be:

statistics-type which ports are determined to ● utilization: indicates to sort
be the busiest. statistics by bandwidth
If you do not specify sort-by utilization.
statistics-type, statistics are ● bytes: indicates to sort
sorted by the total number of statistics by the total
bytes in descending order. number of bytes.
● packets: indicates to sort
statistics by the total
number of packets.
● multicast: indicates to sort
statistics by the total
number of multicast
packets.
● broadcast: indicates to sort
statistics by the total
number of broadcast
packets.
● errors: indicates to sort
statistics by the total
number of error packets.
● discards: indicates to sort
statistics by the total
number of dropped packets.

interval Specifies the interval at which The value is an integer ranging

interval-value statistics are collected. from 1 to 999, in seconds. The
default value is 30.

Views
All views

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

The display command allows you to view statistics about the traffic sent and
received by each interface on a device, but cannot sort these statistics by traffic
volume in descending order. The display counters top interface command allows
you to view top N interface traffic statistics reports, facilitating interface
monitoring. Before you view a top N interface traffic statistics report, run the
collect counters top command to generate your desired top N interface traffic

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1454

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

statistics report. For example, configure the device to generate a top N statistics
report about packets dropped on Layer 2 interfaces within 50s.
The top N interface traffic statistics function sorts statistics about inbound and
outbound traffic processed by interfaces within a collection interval in descending
order and generates a top N interface traffic statistics report. The device stops
collecting interface traffic statistics after the collection interval ends. To generate
another top N interface traffic statistics report, run the collect counters top
command again.
Configuration Impact
● After the collect counters top command is run, the device collects interface
traffic statistics and generates a top N interface traffic statistics report based
on the set parameters.
● The collect counters top command configuration is not saved in the
configuration file.
Follow-up Procedure
To view a top N interface traffic statistics report, run the display counters top
interface command.
Precautions
● When the master switch in a stack containing multiple member switches is
faulty, the top N interface traffic statistics function takes effect only on a
master switch. If the master switch encounters a fault and switches to the
backup state, run the collect counters top command on the new master
switch again.
● The collect counters top command can be run multiple times in succession
with different parameters specified. For example, you can configure a device
to generate a top N statistics report about interface multicast packets when
the device is still generating a top N statistics report about interface
broadcast packets.
● The top N interface traffic statistics function allows a device to generate a
maximum of five top N interface traffic statistics reports. If you want the
device to generate new top N interface traffic statistics reports when five top
N interface traffic statistics reports already exist, run the reset counters top
interface command to clear existing ones.

Example
# Configure a device to generate a statistics report about top 10 Layer 2 interfaces
in terms of the number of packets dropped within 40s.
<HUAWEI> collect counters top 10 interface layer-2 sort-by discards interval 40

4.1.3 bandwidth (Interface view)

Function
The bandwidth command sets the interface bandwidth obtained by the NMS
from the MIB.
The undo bandwidth command restores the default configuration.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1455

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

By default, the interface bandwidth obtained by the NMS from the MIB depends
on the interface type. For example, the bandwidth of a GE interface is 1000
Mbit/s.

NOTE

Only the S5731-H, S5731-S, S5731S-H, S5731S-S, S5732-H, S6735-S, S6720-EI, S6720S-EI,
S6730-H, S6730S-H, S6730-S, and S6730S-S support this command.

Format
bandwidth bandwidth [ kbps ]
undo bandwidth

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

bandwidth Specifies the bandwidth of an interface. The value is an integer

ranging from 1 to
1000000, and the unit is
Mbit/s.

kbps Indicates the unit of an interface -

bandwidth is kbit/s.
If kbps is not specified, the unit of an
interface bandwidth is Mbit/s.

Views
Ethernet interface view, GE interface view, XGE interface view, 25GE interface view,
GE sub-interface view, XGE sub-interface view, 40GE interface view, 100GE
interface view, 40GE sub-interface view, 100GE sub-interface view, MultiGE
interface view, MultiGE sub-interface view, tunnel interface view, Eth-Trunk
interface view, Eth-Trunk sub-interface view, VLANIF interface view, VE interface
view, VE sub-interface view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Running the bandwidth command sets an interface bandwidth obtained by the
NMS from the MIB and does not change an interface actual bandwidth. The NMS
can check the interface bandwidth through the two objects ifSpeed and
ifHighSpeed in IF-MIB.
● If the configured bandwidth is smaller than 4000 Mbit/s, ifSpeed and
ifHighSpeed are respectively displayed as bandwidth x 1000 x 1000 and
bandwidth.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1456

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

● If the configured bandwidth is equal to or larger than 4000 Mbit/s, ifSpeed

and ifHighSpeed are respectively displayed as 4294967295 (0XFFFFFFFF) and
bandwidth.

Example
# Set the bandwidth of GE0/0/1 to 100 Mbit/s.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] bandwidth 100

4.1.4 description (interface view)

Function
The description command configures the description for an interface.
The undo description command restores the default description of an interface.
By default, the description of an interface is null.

Format
description description
undo description

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

description Specifies the interface The value is a string of 1

description. to 242 characters. The
character string is case
sensitive. It can contain
blanks but cannot
contain the question
mark (?).

Views
Interface view, port group view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
To facilitate switch management and maintenance, you can configure interface
descriptions. An interface description can contain:

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1457

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Precautions

The interface description is displayed from the first non-space character.

Example
# Configure the description of GE0/0/1 as To-[DeviceB]GE-0/0/1, indicating that
this device is connected to device B through GE0/0/1.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] description To-[DeviceB]GE-0/0/1

4.1.5 display counters

Function
The display counters command displays traffic statistics on an interface.

Format
display counters [ inbound | outbound ] [ interface interface-type [ interface-
number ] ] [ nonzero ]

Parameters

Parameter Description Value

inbound Displays incoming traffic statistics on an interface. -

outbound Displays outgoing traffic statistics on an interface. -

interface Displays traffic statistics on a specified interface. -

interface-type
[ interface- ● interface-type specifies the interface type.
number ] ● interface-number specifies the interface number.
If the interface number is not specified, traffic
statistics on all the interfaces of the specified type
are displayed.

nonzero Displays statistics about interface traffic. -

If the numbers of bytes, octets packets, unicast
packets, multicast packets, and broadcast packets on
an interface are all 0s, traffic statistics on this
interface are not displayed.

Views
All views

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1458

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

You can run the display counters command to view incoming or outgoing traffic
statistics based on the interface type for fault location.

Precautions

Only the S5731-H, S5731-S, S5731S-H, S5731S-S, S5732-H, S6735-S, S6720-EI,

S6720S-EI, S6730-H, S6730S-H, S6730-S, and S6730S-S support sub-interfaces.

When a device has a large number of interfaces, you are advised to specify the
interface type in the display counters command to view only desired information.
If you do not specify those parameters, the following faults will occur:
● The displayed information is repeatedly refreshed, causing desired information
unable to be obtained.
● The system does not respond because of long-time information traversing
and searching.

Example
# Display traffic statistics on GE0/0/1.
<HUAWEI> display counters interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
Inbound
Interface Octets(bytes) Unicast(pkts) Multicast(pkts) Broadcast(pkts)
GE0/0/1 754918035105 1408179641 15018056 9668635374
Outbound
Interface Octets(bytes) Unicast(pkts) Multicast(pkts) Broadcast(pkts)
GE0/0/1 764800451602 1148151623 15086605 9957268821

# Display traffic statistics on interfaces with at least one of the numbers of bytes,
unicast packets, multicast packets, and broadcast packets not 0.
<HUAWEI> display counters nonzero
Info: This operation may take a few seconds. Please wait for a moment...
Inbound
Interface Octets(bytes) Unicast(pkts) Multicast(pkts) Broadcast(pkts)
GE0/0/1 1467604 0 2902 0
Outbound
Interface Octets(bytes) Unicast(pkts) Multicast(pkts) Broadcast(pkts)
GE0/0/1 2703904 0 13750 1

Table 4-1 Description of the display counters command output

Item Description

Inbound Incoming traffic statistics on an interface.

Interface Interface name.

Octets(bytes) Total number of incoming or outgoing bytes.

Unicast(pkts) Number of incoming or outgoing unicast packets.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1459

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Item Description

Multicast(pkts) Number of incoming or outgoing multicast packets.

Broadcast(pkts) Number of incoming or outgoing broadcast packets.

Outbound Outgoing traffic statistics on an interface.

4.1.6 display counters discard

Function
The display counters discard command displays statistics about dropped packets.

Format
display counters discard [ inbound | outbound ] [ interface interface-type
[ interface-number ] ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

inbound Displays statistics about incoming packets -

dropped.

outbound Displays statistics about outgoing packets -

dropped.

interface interface- Specifies the interface type and number of an -

type [ interface- interface on which statistics about dropped
number ] packets are to be displayed. If interface-number is
not specified, traffic statistics on all interfaces
with the type specified by interface-type are
displayed.

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1460

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

To view detailed statistics about dropped packets on interfaces of different types,

run the display counters discard command. When a large number of packets are
dropped, this configuration facilitates device maintenance.

Precautions

For the S1730S, S300, S5735-L, S2730S-S, S5735-L-I, S5735-L1,S5735S-L, S5735S-

L1, S5735S-L-M, S5735-S, S500, or S5735S-S, if multiple switches set up a stack,
statistics about dropped packets on stack ports cannot be viewed.

Example
# Display statistics about dropped packets on Ethernet 1/0/1.
<HUAWEI> display counters discard interface ethernet 1/0/1
Interface InDiscards OutDiscards
Eth1/0/1 0 0

Table 4-2 Description of the display counters discard command output

Item Description

Interface Interface name

InDiscards Number of incoming packets dropped

on the interface

OutDiscards Number of outgoing packets dropped

on the interface

4.1.7 display counters error

Function
The display counters error command displays error packet statistics.

Format
display counters error [ inbound | outbound ] [ interface interface-type
[ interface-number ] ]

Parameters

Parameter Description Value

inbound Displays inbound error packet statistics. -

outbound Displays outbound error packet statistics. -

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1461

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Parameter Description Value

interface interface- Displays error packet statistics on the specified -

type [ interface- interface.
number ] ● interface-type specifies the interface type.
● interface-number specifies the interface
number.
If interface type and interface number are not
specified, the statistics of error packets on all
interfaces are displayed.

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
You can run the display counters error command to view detailed error packet
statistics on all types of interfaces, which facilitates maintenance when there is a
large number of error packets. (The actual output information may differ from the
following information.)

Example
# Check all error packet statistics on the device.
<HUAWEI> display counters error
Inbound
Interface Total CRC Giants Fragments
GE0/0/1 0 0 0 0
GE0/0/2 0 0 0 0
GE0/0/3 0 0 0 0
GE0/0/4 0 0 0 0
GE0/0/5 0 0 0 0
Interface Runts DropEvents Alignments Symbols
GE0/0/1 0 0 0 0
GE0/0/2 0 0 0 0
GE0/0/3 0 0 0 0
GE0/0/4 0 0 0 0
GE0/0/5 0 0 0 0
Outbound
Interface Total Collisions Excess-Col Late Collisions
GE0/0/1 0 0 0 0
GE0/0/2 0 0 0 0
GE0/0/3 0 0 0 0
GE0/0/4 0 0 0 0
GE0/0/5 0 0 0 0

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1462

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Table 4-3 Description of the display counters error command output

Item Description

Inbound Inbound error packet statistics.

Outbound Outbound error packet statistics.

Interface Interface name.

Total Total number of inbound and outbound error packets.

CRC Number of packets with length ranging from 64 bytes

to 1518 bytes and incorrect FCS values.
For the S5720I-SI, S5735-S, S500, S5735S-S, S5735-S-I,
S5735S-H, S5736-S, S5731-H, S5731-S, S5731S-H,
S5731S-S, S5732-H, S6730-H, S6730S-H, S6730-S, and
S6730S-S, the value of this field includes the number
of received packets longer than the maximum jumbo
frame length and with incorrect FCS values.
For switches, the value of this field contains the
number of received packets with length ranging from
1518 bytes to the jumbo frame size configured on the
interface and incorrect FCS values.

Giants Number of received packets with length exceeding the

maximum jumbo frame size.

Fragments Number of fragmented packets received by the

interface. A fragmented packet is a packet with length
less than 64 bytes and incorrect CRC values.
On the S5720I-SI, S5735-S, S500, S5735S-S, S5735-S-I,
S5735S-H, S5736-S, S6735-S, S6720-EI and S6720S-EI,
the command output does not contain the Fragments
field to display statistics about received fragmented
packets.

Runts Number of received undersized frames with correct

CRC values. An undersized frame is a frame that is
shorter than 64 bytes, in correct format, and contains a
valid CRC field.
For the S5720I-SI, S5735-S, S500, S5735S-S, S5735-S-I,
S5735S-H, S5736-S, S6735-S, S6720-EI and S6720S-EI,
the value of this field includes the number of received
fragmented packets shorter than 64 bytes and with
incorrect CRC values.

DropEvents Number of received packets that are discarded due to

GBP full or back pressure.

Alignments Number of received frames with alignment error.

Symbols Number of received frames with coding error.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1463

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Item Description

Collisions Number of packets with 1 to 15 collisions during

packet forwarding.
NOTE
If the command output contains only this field and the
Excess-Col field is not displayed, the field also includes the
number of frames that are canceled due to consecutive 16
collisions.

Excess-Col After sixteen successive collisions, the system will take

it as excessive collision statistics when another collision
occurs. Frames that are not sent due to excessive
collisions are counted in this field.

Late Collisions Number of delay collision frames. A delay collision

frame is a frame that is delayed because a collision is
detected when the first 512 bits of the frame are sent.

4.1.8 display counters interface

Function
The display counters interface command displays traffic statistics on an
interface, including typical packet statistics and number of packets discarded in
queues.

Format
display counters interface [ interface-type interface-number ] [ verbose |
nonzero ]
display counters interface verbose [ nonzero ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

interface-type interface- Specifies the interface -

number type and number.
● interface-type
specifies the interface
type.
● interface-number
specifies the interface
number.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1464

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Parameter Description Value

verbose Displays detailed traffic -

statistics on an interface,
including typical packet
statistics and number of
packets discarded in
queues.

nonzero Displays non-zero traffic -

statistics on an interface,
including typical packet
statistics and number of
packets discarded in
queues.

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
When diagnosing faults on an interface, run the display counters interface
[ interface-type interface-number ] [ verbose | nonzero ] command to view
detailed information about packets received and sent by the interface to
determine whether the interface works properly. You can also run this command
to view detailed traffic statistics on an interface, including typical packet statistics
and number of packets discarded in queues. You can also run this command to
view non-zero traffic statistics on an interface, including typical packet statistics
and number of packets discarded in queues.
Follow-up Procedure
If you want to collect new traffic statistics, run the reset counters interface
command to clear the current statistics.

Example
# Display traffic statistics on an interface, including typical packet statistics and
number of packets discarded in queues.
<HUAWEI> display counters interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1 verbose
GigabitEthernet0/0/1
InPackets : 0
InOctets : 0
InUcastPkts : 0
InMcastPkts : 0
InBcastPkts : 0
OutPackets : 0

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1465

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

OutOctets : 0
OutUcastPkts : 0
OutMcastPkts : 0
OutBcastPkts : 0
InJumbo : 0
InPause : 0
Frames : 0
OutJumbo : 0
OutPause : 0
InDiscards : 0
OutDiscards : 0
InErrors : 0
OutErrors : 0
CRC : 0
Giants : 0
Jabbers : 0
Fragments : 0
Runts : 0
DropEvents : 0
Alignments : 0
Symbols : 0
Ignoreds : 0
Collisions : 0
ExcessiveCollisions : 0
Late Collisions : 0
Deferreds : 0
Buffers purged : 0
InPkts64Octets : 0
InPkts65to127Octets : 0
InPkts128to255Octets : 0
InPkts256to511Octets : 0
InPkts512to1023Octets : 0
InPkts1024to1518Octets : 0
OutPkts64Octets : 0
OutPkts65to127Octets : 0
OutPkts128to255Octets : 0
OutPkts256to511Octets : 0
OutPkts512to1023Octets : 0
OutPkts1024to1518Octets : 0
Queue0lostPkts : 0
Queue1lostPkts : 0
Queue2lostPkts : 0
Queue3lostPkts : 0
Queue4lostPkts : 0
Queue5lostPkts : 0
Queue6lostPkts : 0
Queue7lostPkts : 0

Table 4-4 Description of the display counters interface command output

Item Description

GigabitEthernet0/0/1 The interface type and number.

InPackets Total number of packets received by the interface.

InOctets Total number of bytes in packets received by the

interface.

InUcastPkts Number of unicast packets received by the interface.

InMcastPkts Number of multicast packets received by the interface.

InBcastPkts Number of broadcast packets received by the interface.

OutPackets Total number of packets sent by the interface.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1466

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Item Description

OutOctets Total number of bytes in packets sent by the interface.

OutUcastPkts Number of unicast packets sent by the interface.

OutMcastPkts Number of multicast packets sent by the interface.

OutBcastPkts Number of broadcast packets sent by the interface.

InJumbo Number of Ethernet frames with length ranging from

1518 bytes to the maximum jumbo frame size and
correct FCS values received by the interface, or number
of VLAN frames with length ranging from 1522 bytes to
the maximum jumbo frame size and correct FCS values
received or sent by the interface.

InPause Number of pause frames received by the interface.

Frames Number of packets in which the 802.3 length field does

not match the actual length received by the interface.

OutJumbo Number of Ethernet frames with length ranging from

1518 bytes to the maximum jumbo frame size and
correct FCS values sent by the interface, or number of
VLAN frames with length ranging from 1522 bytes to
the maximum jumbo frame size and correct FCS values
received or sent by the interface.

OutPause Number of pause frames sent by the interface.

InDiscards Number of incoming packets discarded by the interface.

The number is detected during physical layer detection.

OutDiscards Number of outgoing packets discarded by the interface.

The number is detected during physical layer detection.

InErrors Number of incoming error packets on the interface. The

number is detected during physical layer detection.

OutErrors Number of outgoing error packets on the interface. The

number is detected during physical layer detection.

CRC Number of packets with length ranging from 64 bytes

to 1518 bytes and incorrect FCS values.
For the S5720-LI, S5731-H, S5731S-H, S5731S-S, S5732-
H, S5736-S, S6730-H, S6730S-H, S6730-S, and S6730S-S,
the value of this field includes the number of received
packets longer than the maximum jumbo frame length
and with incorrect FCS values.
The value of this field contains the number of received
packets with length ranging from 1518 bytes to the
jumbo frame size configured on the interface and
incorrect FCS values.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1467

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Item Description

Giants Number of received packets with length exceeding the

maximum jumbo frame size.
● On a 10000M interface, the number of bytes for
Giants packets is calculated according to the actual
packet length.
● On a 1000M interface, the number of bytes for
Giants packets is calculated according to the
maximum jumbo frame size.
To set the maximum jumbo frame size, run the
jumboframe_enable command.

Jabbers The S5720-LI, S5720I-SI, S1730S-H, S5731-S, S5731S-S,

S5731-H, S5731S-H, S5732-H, S2730S-S, S5735-L-I,
S5735-L1,S300, S5735-L, S5735S-L, S5735S-L1, S5735S-
L-M, S5735-S, S500, S5735S-S, S5735-S-I, S5735S-H,
S5736-S, S6735-S, S6720-EI, S6720S-EI, S6730S-S, and
S6730-H do not have the Jabbers field. On the other
product models, this field indicates the number of
received packets with length exceeding the maximum
jumbo frame length and incorrect FCS values.

Fragments Number of received fragmented packets. A fragmented

packet is a packet shorter than 64 bytes and with
incorrect CRC values.
For the S5731-H, S5731-S, S5731S-H, S5731S-S, S5732-
H, S6730-H, S6730S-H, S6730-S, and S6730S-S, the
value of this field contains the number of undersized
frames with the correct CRC values received is displayed.
On the S2720-EI, S5720-LI, S1730S-H, S2730S-S, S5735-
L-I, S5735-L1,S300, S5735-L, S5735S-L, S5735S-L1,
S5735S-L-M, S5735-S, S500, S5735S-S, S5735-S-I,
S5720I-SI, S5735S-H, S5736-S, S6720S-EI, S6735-S, and
S6720-EI, the command output does not contain the
Fragments field to display statistics about received
fragmented packets.

Runts Number of undersized frames with correct CRC values

received by the interface.
For the S5720-LI, S5735-S, S500, S5735S-S, S5735-S-I,
S5720I-SI, S5735-L, S300, S2730S-S, S5735-L1, S5735-L-
I, S5735S-H, S5736-S, S6720S-EI, S6735-S, and S6720-EI,
the value of this field includes the number of received
fragmented packets shorter than 64 bytes and with
incorrect CRC values.

DropEvents Number of received packets that are discarded due to

GBP full or back pressure.

Alignments Number of received frames with alignment errors.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1468

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Item Description

Symbols Number of received frames with coding errors.

Ignoreds Number of received MAC control frames whose OpCode

is not PAUSE.

Collisions Number of packets with 1 to 15 collisions during packet

forwarding.
NOTE
If the command output contains only this field and the
ExcessiveCollisions field is not displayed, the field also includes
the number of frames that are canceled due to consecutive 16
collisions.

ExcessiveCollisions Number of packets with 16 collisions and fail to be sent.

Late Collisions Number of packets with conflict and delayed.

Deferreds Number of delayed packets without conflict.

Buffers Purged Number of packets aged in the cache.

InOutPkts64Octets Number of packets shorter than 64 bytes received and

sent by the interface.

InOutPkts65to127Oct Number of packets with length ranging from 65 bytes

ets to 127 bytes received and sent by the interface.

InOutPkts128to255O Number of packets with length ranging from 128 bytes

ctets to 255 bytes received and sent by the interface.

InOutPkts256to511O Number of packets with length ranging from 256 bytes

ctets to 511 bytes received and sent by the interface.

InOutPkts512to1023 Number of packets with length ranging from 512 bytes

Octets to 1023 bytes received and sent by the interface.

InOutPkts1024toMax Number of packets with length exceeding 1024 bytes

Octets received and sent by the interface.

InPkts64Octets Number of packets shorter than 64 bytes received by

the interface.

InPkts65to127Octets Number of packets with length ranging from 65 bytes

to 127 bytes received by the interface.

InPkts128to255Octet Number of packets with length ranging from 128 bytes

s to 255 bytes received by the interface.

InPkts256to511Octet Number of packets with length ranging from 256 bytes

s to 511 bytes received by the interface.

InPkts512to1023Octe Number of packets with length ranging from 512 bytes

ts to 1023 bytes received by the interface.

InPkts1024to1518Oct Number of packets with length ranging from 1024 bytes

ets to 1518 bytes received by the interface.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1469

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Item Description

OutPkts64Octets Number of packets shorter than 64 bytes sent by the

interface.
The value NA indicates that the interface does not
support this field.

OutPkts65to127Octet Number of packets with length ranging from 65 bytes

s to 127 bytes sent by the interface.
The value NA indicates that the interface does not
support this field.

OutPkts128to255Oct Number of packets with length ranging from 128 bytes

ets to 255 bytes sent by the interface.
The value NA indicates that the interface does not
support this field.

OutPkts256to511Oct Number of packets with length ranging from 256 bytes

ets to 511 bytes sent by the interface.
The value NA indicates that the interface does not
support this field.

OutPkts512to1023Oc Number of packets with length ranging from 512 bytes

tets to 1023 bytes sent by the interface.
The value NA indicates that the interface does not
support this field.

OutPkts1024to1518O Number of packets with length ranging from 1024 bytes

ctets to 1518 bytes sent by the interface.
The value NA indicates that the interface does not
support this field.

Queue0lostPkts Number of packets discarded in queue 0.

Queue1lostPkts Number of packets discarded in queue 1.

Queue2lostPkts Number of packets discarded in queue 2.

Queue3lostPkts Number of packets discarded in queue 3.

Queue4lostPkts Number of packets discarded in queue 4.

Queue5lostPkts Number of packets discarded in queue 5.

Queue6lostPkts Number of packets discarded in queue 6.

Queue7lostPkts Number of packets discarded in queue 7.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1470

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

NOTE

The number (InPkts) of packets received by the interface and the number (OutPkts) of
packets sent by the interface can be displayed separately only on the S5731-H, S5731-S,
S5731S-H, S5731S-S, S5732-H, S6735-S, S6720-EI, S6720S-EI, S6730-H, S6730S-H, S6730-S,
and S6730S-S. The S1720GW, S1720GW-E, S1720GWR, S1720GWR-E, S1720GF, S1720GFR-P,
S2720-EI, S5720I-SI, S5720-LI, S1730S-H, S2730S-S, S5735-L-I, S5735-L1,S300, S5735-L,
S5735S-L, S5735S-L1, S5735S-L-M, S5720S-LI, S5735-S, S500, S5735S-S, S5735-S-I, S5735S-
H, S5736-S, display only the total number (InOutPkts) of packets received and sent by the
interface.

4.1.9 display counters rate

Function
The display counters rate command displays the incoming or outgoing traffic
rate of an interface.

Format
display counters rate [ inbound | outbound ] [ interface interface-type
[ interface-number ] ] [ nonzero ]

Parameters

Parameter Description Value

inbound Displays the incoming traffic rate of an interface. -

outbound Displays the outgoing traffic rate of an interface. -

interface Displays the traffic rate of a specified interface. -

interface-type
[ interface- ● interface-type specifies the interface type.
number ] ● interface-number specifies the interface number.
If the interface number is not specified, the traffic
rates of all the interfaces of the specified type are
displayed.

nonzero Displays the traffic rate of an interface. -

If the numbers of bytes, Octets packets, unicast
packets, multicast packets, and broadcast packets on
an interface are all 0s, the traffic rate of this interface
is not displayed.

Views
All views

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1471

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

You can run the display counters rate command to view the incoming or
outgoing traffic rate based on the interface type for fault location.

Precautions

After the system is started, in the case of the first query or when the interval with
the last query is longer than 600s, the system re-initiates rate statistics collection.
In this case, you need to wait until the rate statistics collection result is displayed.

The minimum statistics collection interval is 5 seconds. If the interval is less than 5
seconds, the data collected last time is displayed.

When a device has a large number of interfaces, you are advised to specify the
interface type in the display counters rate command to view only desired
information. If you do not specify those parameters, the following faults will occur:
● The displayed information is repeatedly refreshed, causing desired information
unable to be obtained.
● The system does not respond because of long-time information traversing
and searching.

Example
# Display the traffic rate of GE0/0/1.
<HUAWEI> display counters rate interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
Inbound
Interface Octets(bytes/s) Unicast(pkts/s) Multicast(pkts/s) Broadcast(pkts/s)
GE0/0/1 18 0 0 0
Outbound
Interface Octets(bytes/s) Unicast(pkts/s) Multicast(pkts/s) Broadcast(pkts/s)
GE0/0/1 61 0 0 0

# Display the traffic rate of interfaces with at least one of the numbers of bytes,
unicast packets, multicast packets, and broadcast packets not 0.
<HUAWEI> display counters rate nonzero
Info: This operation may take a few seconds. Please wait for a moment...
Inbound
Interface Octets(bytes/s) Unicast(pkts/s) Multicast(pkts/s) Broadcast(pkts/s)
GE0/0/1 82 1 0 0
Outbound
Interface Octets(bytes/s) Unicast(pkts/s) Multicast(pkts/s) Broadcast(pkts/s)
GE0/0/1 224 2 0 0

Table 4-5 Description of the display counters rate command output

Item Description

Inbound Incoming traffic rate.

Outbound Outgoing traffic rate.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1472

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Item Description

Interface Interface name.

Octets(bytes/s) Total incoming or outgoing traffic rate, in bytes/s.

Unicast(pkts/s) Incoming or outgoing rate of unicast packets, in pkts/s.

Multicast(pkts/s) Incoming or outgoing rate of multicast packets, in

pkts/s.

Broadcast(pkts/s) Incoming or outgoing rate of broadcast packets, in

pkts/s.

4.1.10 display counters top interface

Function
The display counters top interface command displays top N interface traffic
statistics reports.

Format
display counters top interface report [ report-number ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

report-number Specifies the number of a top N interface The value is an

traffic statistics report. If you do not specify integer ranging
this parameter, the command output from 1 to 5.
displays the summary information about all
top N interface traffic statistics reports.

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
The collect counters top command generates top N interface traffic statistics
reports, but does not display these reports. To view the generated reports, run the
display counters top interface report [ report-number ] command.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1473

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Precautions

Before you run the display counters top interface report [ report-number ]
command, ensure that a top N interface traffic statistics report has been
generated using the collect counters top command. Otherwise, the "There is no
TOPN interface counters report." message is displayed after you run the display
counters top interface report [ report-number ] command.

Example
# Display the summary information about all top N interface traffic statistics
reports.
<HUAWEI> display counters top interface report
Id Start Time Interval Number Sort-By Status Interface-Type
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 2012-09-05 09:03:13-08:00 30 20 bytes doing GigabitEthernet

Table 4-6 Description of the display counters top interface report command
output

Item Description

Id Indicates the number of a top N interface traffic statistics

report.

Start Time Indicates the start time of statistics collection.

Interval Indicates the statistics collection interval.

Number Indicates the number of busiest interfaces for which

interface statistics reports are to be generated.

Sort By Indicates the statistics type by which ports are

determined to be the busiest, which can be:
● utilization: indicates to sort statistics by bandwidth
utilization.
● bytes: indicates to sort statistics by the total number
of bytes.
● packets: indicates to sort statistics by the total number
of packets.
● multicast: indicates to sort statistics by the total
number of multicast packets.
● broadcast: indicates to sort statistics by the total
number of broadcast packets.
● errors: indicates to sort statistics by the total number
of error packets.
● discards: indicates to sort statistics by the total
number of dropped packets.

Status Indicates the generation status of a top N interface

traffic statistics report, which can be:
● doing: The report is being generated.
● done: The report has been generated.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1474

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Item Description

Interface-Type Indicates the type of interfaces for which the top N

interface traffic statistics report is generated, which can
be:
● all: indicates all interfaces.
● layer-2: indicates Layer 2 interfaces.
● layer-3: indicates Layer 3 interfaces.
● Specified interface type: indicates Ethernet physical
interfaces or Eth-Trunk interfaces.

# Display the detailed information about the top N interface traffic statistics
report numbered 1.
<HUAWEI> display counters top interface report 1
Owner : RT1(10.1.1.1)
Start Time : 2012-09-17 13:26:06
End Time : 2012-09-17 13:26:36
Interface Type : GigabitEthernet
Sort By : bytes
Interval : 30 seconds
Port Band Util Bytes Packets Broadcast Multicast Error
Discards
width (In + Out) (In + Out) (In + Out) (In + Out)
------- ----- ------ ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ----- --------
GE0/0/1 1000M 0% 974 4 0 4 0 0

Table 4-7 Description of the display counters top interface report 1 command
output
Item Description

Owner Indicates the device on which the top N interface traffic

statistics report is generated.

Start Time Indicates the start time of statistics collection.

End Time Indicates the end time of statistics collection.

Interface Type Indicates the type of interfaces for which the top N
interface traffic statistics report is generated, which can
be:
● all: indicates all interfaces.
● layer-2: indicates Layer 2 interfaces.
● layer-3: indicates Layer 3 interfaces.
● Specified interface type: indicates Ethernet physical
interfaces or Eth-Trunk interfaces.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1475

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Item Description

Sort By Indicates the statistics type by which ports are

determined to be the busiest, which can be:
● utilization: indicates to sort statistics by bandwidth
utilization.
● bytes: indicates to sort statistics by the total number
of bytes.
● packets: indicates to sort statistics by the total
number of packets.
● multicast: indicates to sort statistics by the total
number of multicast packets.
● broadcast: indicates to sort statistics by the total
number of broadcast packets.
● errors: indicates to sort statistics by the total number
of error packets.
● discards: indicates to sort statistics by the total
number of dropped packets.

Interval Indicates the statistics collection interval.

Port Indicates the interface name.

Band Indicates interface bandwidth.

width

Util Indicates bandwidth utilization.

Bytes Indicates the total number of sent and received bytes.

Packets Indicates the total number of sent and received packets.

Multicast Indicates the total number of sent and received multicast

packets.

Broadcast Indicates the total number of sent and received

broadcast packets.

Error Indicates the total number of error packets.

Discards Indicates the total number of dropped packets.

4.1.11 display interface

Function
The display interface command displays the interface running status and
statistics.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1476

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Format
display interface [ interface-type [ interface-number [.subinterface-number ] |
main ] | main ]
display interface slot slot-id [ main ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

interface-type Displays the running -

[ interface-number ] status and traffic
statistics of an interface.
● interface-type
specifies the interface
type.
● interface-number
specifies the interface
number.
If the interface type is
specified but no interface
number is specified, the
running status of all the
interfaces of this type is
displayed.

subinterface-number Displays the running The value is an integer

status and traffic that ranges from 1 to
statistics of a sub- 4096.
interface.

main Displays running status -

and traffic statistics
about an interface.
● If an interface has no
sub-interfaces, status
and traffic statistics
about the interface
are displayed whether
you specify the main
parameter or not.
● If an interface has
sub-interfaces, status
and traffic statistics
about the interface
and sub-interfaces are
displayed if you do
not specify the main
parameter.

slot slot-id Specifies the slot ID. -

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1477

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
The running status and statistics of an interface includes the physical status, basic
configuration, and statistics about forwarded packets on the interface. You can use
the display interface command to collect traffic statistics or locate faults on an
interface.
Precautions
● If no interface type is specified, the running status and statistics of all the
interfaces is displayed. If the interface type is specified but no interface
number is specified, the running status of all the interfaces of this type is
displayed.
● When the XGE service interface of the S5731-H include Ignoreds, Runts, and
Fragments packets, the bytes statistics are incorrect.
● Only the S5731-H, S5731-S, S5731S-H, S5731S-S, S5732-H, S6735-S, S6720-EI,
S6720S-EI, S6730-H, S6730S-H, S6730-S, and S6730S-S support sub-interfaces.

Example
# Display the running status, basic configuration, and statistics about forwarded
packets on GE0/0/1.
<HUAWEI> display interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
GigabitEthernet 0/0/1 current state : UP
Line protocol current state : UP
Description:
Switch Port, Link-type : access(negotiated),
PVID : 1, TPID : 8100(Hex), The Maximum Frame Length is 9216
IP Sending Frames' Format is PKTFMT_ETHNT_2, Hardware address is 00e0-fc12-3456
Last physical up time : 2018-07-04 18:59:25
Last physical down time : 2018-07-04 19:02:07
Current system time: 2018-07-10 16:03:43
Port Mode: COMMON COPPER
Speed : 1000, Loopback: NONE
Duplex: FULL, Negotiation: ENABLE
Mdi : AUTO, Flow-control: DISABLE
Last 300 seconds input rate 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec
Last 300 seconds output rate 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec
Input peak rate 50765440 bits/sec, Record time: 2018-07-04 19:01:29
Output peak rate 748160 bits/sec, Record time: 2018-07-04 19:01:29
Input: 850737 packets, 74865496 bytes
Unicast: 850735, Multicast: 2
Broadcast: 0, Jumbo: 0
Discard: 0, Pause: 0
Frames: 0

Total Error: 0
CRC: 0, Giants: 0
Jabbers: 0, Fragments: 0
Runts: 0, DropEvents: 0

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1478

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Alignments: 0, Symbols: 0
Ignoreds: 0

Output: 11905 packets, 1000668 bytes

Unicast: 0, Multicast: 3
Broadcast: 0, Jumbo: 0
Discard: 0, Pause: 11902

Total Error: 0
Collisions: 0, ExcessiveCollisions: 0
Late Collisions: 0, Deferreds: 0
Buffers Purged: 0

Input bandwidth utilization threshold : 80.00%

Output bandwidth utilization threshold: 80.00%
Input bandwidth utilization : 0%
Output bandwidth utilization : 0%

# Display the running status, basic configuration, and statistics about forwarded
packets on 100GE0/0/1.
<HUAWEI> display interface 100GE 0/0/1
100GE0/0/1 current state : DOWN Line
protocol current state : DOWN
Description: Switch Port,
Link-type : access(negotiated), PVID : 1,
TPID : 8100(Hex), The Maximum Frame Length is 9216 IP
Sending Frames' Format is PKTFMT_ETHNT_2, Hardware address is 00e0-
fc12-3456 Last physical up time :
- Last physical down time :
2019-02-26 09:45:16 Current system time:
2019-02-26 09:47:43 Port Mode: COMMON
FIBER Speed : 100000, Loopback:
NONE Duplex: FULL, Negotiation:
DISABLE Mdi : -, Flow-control:
DISABLE FEC :
NONE Last 300 seconds
input rate 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec Last 300 seconds
output rate 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec Input peak rate 0
bits/sec, Record time: - Output peak rate 0
bits/sec, Record time:
-
Input: 0 packets, 0
bytes Unicast: 0,
Multicast: 0 Broadcast: 0,
Jumbo: 0 Discard: 0,
Pause:
0
Total Error:
0 CRC: 0,
Giants: 0 Runts: 0,
Fragments: 0 Alignments: 0,
Symbols: 0 Ignoreds:
0
Output: 0 packets, 0
bytes Unicast: 0,
Multicast: 0 Broadcast: 0,
Jumbo: 0 Discard: 0,
Pause:
0

Input bandwidth utilization threshold :

80.00% Output bandwidth utilization threshold:
80.00% Input bandwidth utilization :
0% Output bandwidth utilization :
0%

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1479

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Table 4-8 Description of this command output

Item Description

current state Current status of the interface:

● UP: The interface is physically Up.
● DOWN: The interface is physically Down.
Protected port: An interface is added to an interface
protection group and set to be a protected interface.
To add an interface to an interface protection group
and set the interface to be a protected interface, run
the port protect-group and protect-group member
commands.
● Administratively down: The administrator has run the
shutdown command on the interface.
● TRIGGER DOWN (BFD): When BFD detects a fault,
the physical status of the interface becomes Down
according to the OAM association.
● TRIGGER DOWN (3AH): When 3AH detects a fault,
the physical status of the interface becomes Down
according to the OAM association.
● TRIGGER DOWN (1AG): When 1AG detects a fault,
the physical status of the interface becomes Down
according to the OAM association.
● ERROR DOWN(auto-defend): When the interface
receives packets from an attack source, the physical
status of the interface becomes Down.
● ERROR DOWN(efm-threshold-event): When the
number of error frames, error codes, or error frame
seconds of EFM OAM detected by the interface
reaches or exceeds the threshold within a set period,
the physical status of the interface becomes Down
according to the OAM association.
● ERROR DOWN(efm-remote-failure): When EFM
detects a remote failure, the physical status of the
interface becomes Down according to the OAM
association.
● ERROR DOWN(bpdu-protection): If an edge interface
receives RST BPDUs after BPDU protection is enabled,
the physical status of the edge interface becomes
Down.
● ERROR DOWN(error-statistics): If the system detects
that the number of error packets received by the
interface exceeds the threshold, the physical status of
the interface becomes Down.
● ERROR DOWN(runts-error-statistics): When the
number of Runts error packets received by the
interface reaches the alarm threshold, the physical
status of the interface becomes Down.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1480

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Item Description

● ERROR DOWN(transceiver-power-low): If the system

detects that the optical power of the interface falls
below the configured lower alarm threshold, the
physical status of the interface becomes Down.
● ERROR DOWN(port-security): When the number of
learned MAC address entries reaches the threshold,
the interface goes Down.
● ERROR DOWN(mac-address-flapping): When the
learned MAC address flaps, the interface goes Down.
● ERROR DOWN(dhcp-packet-overspeed): When the
DHCP packet rate of the interface exceeds the
threshold, the physical status of the associated
interface becomes Down.
● ERROR DOWN(link-flap): When the link flaps, the
physical status of the associated interface becomes
Down.
● ERROR DOWN(data-integrity-error): The chip
memory identifier has a data integrity error and the
physical status of the interface becomes Down.
● LOOPBACK-DETECT DOWN: The interface goes Down
due to loopback detection.
● UP(E-TRUNK-DOWN): The Eth-Trunk interface goes
Down because of E-Trunk negotiation.
NOTE
There is a delay before the interface state is reported, so an
interface undergoes a short-time intermediate state before it
transitions to the ERROR DOWN state. The intermediate state
is ERROR DOWN (ERROR DOWN reason), up. This state does
not affect functioning of the interface.
When the physical status of the interface is ERROR
DOWN(data-integrity-error), perform the following operations:
1. Check whether the error-down auto-recovery cause data-
integrity-error interval interval-value command has been
configured on the switch. If the command has been
configured, go to step 2. Otherwise, go to step 3.
2. Check whether the interface restores to Up state after the
time specified by interval-value expires. If the interface does
not restore to Up state, go to step 3.
3. Run the undo shutdown command in the interface view to
enable the interface and check whether the interface
restores to Up state. If the interface does not restore to Up
state, go to step 4.
4. Run the reset slot command to restart the switch. After the
switch restarts, check whether the interface restores to Up
state. If the interface does not restore to Up state, go to
step 5.
5. Replace the switch.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1481

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Item Description

Line protocol current Link layer protocol status of the interface:

state ● UP: The link layer protocol of the interface is working
properly.
● UP (BFD status down): BFD associated with the
interface is Down.
● UP (Main BFD status down): The BFD session
associated with the main interface becomes Down
and is associated with the sub-interface status. This
state is displayed only for sub-interfaces.
● UP (spoofing): The link layer protocol of the interface
is always Up with the spoofing feature enabled.
● DOWN: The link-layer protocol status of the interface
is Down or no IP address is assigned to the interface.
For example, if no IP address is assigned to an IP
service-capable interface, its protocol status is Down.
● DOWN (CFM down): CFM detects a fault or receives
a fault notification message from its associated
module. In this case, the link layer protocol of the
interface becomes CFM Down.
● DOWN (EFM down): EFM detects a fault or receives
a fault notification message from its associated
module. In this case, the link layer protocol of the
interface becomes EFM Down.
● DOWN (DLDP down): DLDP detects a fault or
receives a fault notification message from its
associated module. In this case, the link layer
protocol of the interface becomes DLDP Down.
● DOWN (MACsec down): MACsec is not enabled on
the peer interface. In this case, the link layer protocol
of the interface becomes MACsec Down.
NOTE
DOWN (MACsec down) is displayed only after the MACsec
plug-in is installed.
You can search for Plug-in Usage Guide at the Huawei
technical support website (Enterprise Network or Carrier),
and choose the desired plug-in usage guide based on the
switch model and software version. If you do not have
permission to access the website, contact technical support
personnel.
● DOWN (Observe-port forwarding down): The
interface status becomes Down because the packet
forwarding function is disabled on the observing port
or in the observing port group where the port resides.
● DOWN(BFD status down): indicates that BFD detects
a fault and changes the link status of the interface to
BFD DOWN. In this state, the interface discards Layer
2 and Layer 3 packets but permits BFD packets.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1482

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Item Description

● DOWN(Main BFD status down): indicates that BFD

detects a fault and changes the link status of the
main interface and its sub-interfaces to BFD DOWN.
This state is applicable only to sub-interfaces. In this
state, Layer 2 and Layer 3 packets are discarded, but
BFD packets are permitted.

Description Interface description.

To configure the description for an interface, run the
description command.

Switch Port A Layer 2 interface.

To switch an interface to the Layer 3 mode, run the
undo portswitch command.
If the interface is a Layer 3 interface, Route Port is
displayed here.

PVID Default VLAN ID of the interface.

Link-type Link type of an interface, which is displayed only when

the interface works in Layer 2 mode:
● access(configured): The interface is manually
configured as the access type.
● hybrid: The interface is manually configured as the
hybrid type.
● trunk(configured): The interface is manually
configured as the trunk type.
● dot1q-tunnel: The interface is manually configured as
the dot1q-tunnel type.
● access(negotiated): The interface is automatically
negotiated as the access type.
● trunk(negotiated): The interface is automatically
negotiated as the trunk type.
To set the link type for an interface, run the port link-
type command.

The Maximum Frame Maximum frame length allowed by the interface.

Length To set the maximum frame length, run the jumboframe
enable command.

TPID Type of frames that are supported on the interface.

By default, this field displays 0x8100, indicating an
802.1Q frame.
This field is displayed only for a Layer 2 interface.

IP Sending Frames' Format of frames sent by the IP protocol, including

Format PKTFMT_ETHNT_2, Ethernet_802.3, and Ethernet_SNAP.

Hardware address MAC address of the interface.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1483

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Item Description

Port Mode Working mode of the interface:

● COMMON COPPER: The interface works as an
electrical interface.
● COMMON FIBER: The interface works as an optical
interface.
If the interface is a combo interface:
● COMBO AUTO: The combo interface automatically
selects the working mode.
● FORCE FIBER: The combo interface is configured as
an optical interface.
● FORCE COPPER: The combo interface is configured as
an electrical interface.
To configure the working mode for an interface, run the
combo-port command.

Supported rates Rate supported by the interface.

NOTE
Only the MultiGE electrical interface, XG electrical interface on
the and XG electrical interface on the ES5D21X08T00 subcard
are supported.

Transceiver Type of the optical module.

● This field is not displayed for electrical interfaces.
● If an optical or copper module is inserted into the
optical interface, the field indicates the model of the
optical or copper module.
● If an optical or copper module is not inserted into the
optical interface, the field is not displayed.
● If the optical interface is connected to the high-speed
cable, the field indicates the type of the cable.
● For the S1720, S2720-EI, S5720-LI, S5720-SI, S5720S-
LI, and S5735-S-I, If GPON optical module or a faulty
optical module is installed on an optical interface,
the field is displayed as ONLINE within 1 minute; the
detailed type of the GPON optical module is
displayed after 1 minute, and no information about
other faulty optical modules is displayed.

Last physical up time Last time the interface went Up physically. If this field
displays "-", the physical status of the interface does not
change.
If the system is configured with a time zone and is in
the daylight saving time, the time is displayed in the
format of YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS UTC±HH:MM DST.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1484

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Item Description

Last physical down Last time the interface went Down physically. If this
time field displays "-", the physical status of the interface
does not change.
If the system is configured with a time zone and is in
the summer daylight saving time, the time is displayed
in the format of YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS UTC±HH:MM
DST.

Current system time Current system time.

If the time zone is configured and the daylight saving
time is used, the time is in YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS
±HH:MM format.

Speed Current rate of the interface.

● In auto-negotiation mode, the auto speed command
configures the rate of an interface.
● In non-auto-negotiation mode, the speed command
configures the rate of an interface.

Loopback Loopback configuration of the interface.

To configure loopback on an interface, run the
loopback command.

Duplex Duplex mode of the interface:

● FULL: The interface works in full-duplex mode.
● HALF: The interface works in half-duplex mode.
● In auto-negotiation mode, the auto duplex
command configures the duplex mode of an
interface.
● In non-auto-negotiation mode, the duplex command
configures the duplex mode of an interface.

Negotiation Auto-negotiation mode of the interface. To configure

the auto-negotiation mode for an interface, run the
negotiation auto command.
● ENABLE: The interface works in auto-negotiation
mode.
● DISABLE: The interface works in non-auto-
negotiation mode.
● DISABLE(Only non-auto-negotiation is supported):
The interface does not support the auto-negotiation
mode and cannot have the negotiation auto
command configured. Only the S6735-S supports this
parameter.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1485

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Item Description

Mdi Network cable type of the interface.

To configure the network cable type of an interface, run
the mdi command.
The Mdi field displays - for an optical interface.

Flow-control Whether flow control is enabled:

● ENABLE: Flow control is enabled on the interface.
● DISABLE: Flow control and received flow control is
disabled on the interface.
● RECEIVE ENABLE: Receive flow control is enabled on
the interface.
NOTE
If the flow-control command has been executed to enable
flow control on an Ethernet interface, or the flow-control
receive command has been executed to enable received flow
control on an Ethernet interface, this field displays DISABLE in
the following situations:
● The interface is in Down state.
● The interface works in half-duplex mode.

FEC Whether FEC is enabled on an interface:

● RS-FEC: RS-FEC is enabled on the interface.
● BASE-FEC: BASE-R FEC is enabled on the interface.
● NONE: The optical module is not properly installed
and FEC is not configured; FEC is disabled; or FEC is
not supported because a 40G optical module (except
CFP 40GE optical module) is installed on a 100GE
interface.
When FEC is not configured, whether FEC is enabled on
the interface depends on the medium. When a CFP
40GE/100GE optical module is installed on the interface,
FEC cannot be configured on the interface and this field
displays -.

Last 300 seconds Incoming packet rate (bits per second and packets per
input rate second) within the last 300 seconds.

Last 300 seconds Outgoing packet rate (bits per second and packets per
output rate second) within the last 300 seconds.

Input peak rate 0 Maximum rate of incoming packets and time when the
bits/sec,Record time maximum rate is reached.

Output peak rate 0 Maximum rate of outgoing packets and time when the
bits/sec,Record time maximum rate is reached.

Input Total number of received packets.

Output Total number of sent packets.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1486

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Item Description

Unicast Number of unicast packets that are received or sent by

the interface.

Multicast Number of multicast packets that are received or sent

by the interface.
For the S5732-H, S6730-H, S6730S-H, S6730-S, and
S6730S-S the value of this field contains the number of
pause frames.
For the S5736-S24T4XC, S5736-S24U4XC, S5736-
S48T4XC, and S5736-S48U4XC, the value of the
Multicast field contains the number of outgoing pause
frames on GE electrical interfaces.

Broadcast Number of broadcast packets that are received or sent

by the interface.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1487

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Item Description

Jumbo This field includes the following values in the outbound

direction of an interface:
● Number of sent Ethernet frames that exceed 1517
bytes with correct FCS values on the S200, S1730S-S,
S1730S-S1, S2730S-S, S5735-L-I, S5735-L1,S300,
S5735-L, S5735S-L1, S5735S-L, S5735S-L-M, S5735-S,
S500, S5735S-S, S5735-S-I or number of sent
Ethernet frames that exceed 1518 bytes with correct
FCS values on other switch models.
● Number of sent VLAN frames that exceed 1517 bytes
with correct FCS values on the S200, S1730S-S,
S1730S-S1, S2730S-S, S5735-L-I, S5735-L1,S300,
S5735-L, S5735S-L1, S5735S-L, S5735S-L-M, S5735-S,
S500, S5735S-S, S5735-S-I, number of sent VLAN
frames that exceed 1522 bytes with correct FCS
values on the S6735-S, S6720-EI and S6720S-EI, or
number of sent VLAN frames that exceed 1518 bytes
with correct FCS values on other switch models.
This field includes the following values in the inbound
direction of an interface:
● Number of received Ethernet frames with the length
ranging from 1518 bytes to the configured maximum
jumbo frame length and with correct FCS values on
the S200, S1730S-S, S1730S-S1, S2730S-S, S5735-L-I,
S5735-L1,S300, S5735-L, S5735S-L1, S5735S-L,
S5735S-L-M, S5735-S, S500, S5735S-S, S5735-S-I or
number of received Ethernet frames with the length
ranging from 1519 bytes to the configured maximum
jumbo frame length and with correct FCS values on
other switch models.
● Number of received VLAN frames with the length
ranging from 1518 bytes to the configured maximum
jumbo frame length and with correct FCS values on
the S200, S1730S-S, S1730S-S1, S2730S-S, S5735-L-I,
S5735-L1,S300, S5735-L, S5735S-L1, S5735S-L,
S5735S-L-M, S5735-S, S500, S5735S-S, S5735-S-I,
number of received VLAN frames with the length
ranging from 1523 bytes to the configured maximum
jumbo frame length and with correct FCS values on
the S6735-S, S6720-EI and S6720S-EI, or number of
received VLAN frames with the length ranging from
1519 bytes to the configured maximum jumbo frame
length and with correct FCS values on other switch
models.
For the S5731-H, S5731-S, S5731S-H, S5731S-S, S5732-
H, S6730-H, S6730S-H, S6730-S, and S6730S-S, and the
value of this field contains the number of received
packets with length ranging from 1518 bytes to the

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1488

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Item Description

jumbo frame length configured on the interface and

correct CRC values.
To set the maximum jumbo frame length, run the
jumboframe enable command.
NOTE
Only S5731-H, S5731-S, S5731S-H, S5731S-S, S5732-H, S1730S-
H, S2730S-S, S5735-L-I, S5735-L1,S300, S5735-L, S5735S-L,
S5735S-L1, S5735S-L-M, S5735-S, S500, S5735S-S, S5735-S-I,
S6735-S, S6720-EI, S6720S-EI, S6730-H, S6730S-H, S6730-S,
and S6730S-S support statistics on Jumbo frames.

Discard Number of packets discarded by the interface during

physical layer detection.
On the S1720GW, S1720GWR, S1720GW-E, S1720GWR-
E, S1720GF, S1720GFR-P, S2720-EI, S5720-LI, S1730S-H,
S2730S-S, S5735-L-I, S5735-L1,S300, S5735-L, S5735S-L,
S5735S-L1, S5735S-L-M, S5720S-LI, S5735-S, S500,
S5735S-S, S5735-S-I, S5720I-SI, S5735S-H, S5736-S,
after you run the reset qos queue statistics command,
the number of packets discarded by the interface is
cleared.

Total Error Number of error packets found during physical layer

detection.

CRC Number of packets with length ranging from 64 bytes

to 1518 bytes and incorrect FCS values.
For the S5720-LI, S5731-H, S5731S-H, S5731S-S, S5732-
H, S5736-S, S6730-H, S6730S-H, S6730-S, and S6730S-S,
the value of this field includes the number of received
packets longer than the maximum jumbo frame length
and with incorrect FCS values.
For the S1720GF, S1720GFR-P, S1720GW, S1720GW-E,
S1720GWR, S1720GWR-E, S2720-EI, S5720-LI, S5720S-
LI, S5720I-SI, S5735S-H, S5736-S, S1730S-H, S2730S-S,
S5735-L-I, S5735-L1,S300, S5735-L, S5735S-L, S5735S-
L1, S5735S-L-M, S5735-S, S500, S5735S-S, S5735-S-I, the
value of this field contains the number of received
packets with length ranging from 1518 bytes to the
jumbo frame size configured on the interface and
incorrect FCS values.

Giants Number of received frames with length exceeding the

maximum jumbo frame length.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1489

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Item Description

Jabbers The S5720-LI, S5720I-SI, S1730S-H, S5731-S, S5731S-S,

S5731-H, S5731S-H, S5732-H, S2730S-S, S5735-L-I,
S5735-L1,S300, S5735-L, S5735S-L, S5735S-L1, S5735S-
L-M, S5735-S, S500, S5735S-S, S5735-S-I, S5735S-H,
S5736-S, S6735-S, S6720-EI, S6720S-EI, S6730S-S, and
S6730-H do not have the Jabbers field. On the other
product models, this field indicates the number of
received packets with length exceeding the maximum
jumbo frame length and incorrect FCS values.

FragmentsS6720-HI Number of received fragmented packets. A fragmented

packet is a packet shorter than 64 bytes and with
incorrect CRC values.
For the S5731-H, S5731-S, S5731S-H, S5731S-S, S6730-
H, S6730S-H, S6730-S, and S6730S-S, the value of this
field contains the number of undersized frames with the
correct CRC values received is displayed.
On the S2720-EI, S5720-LI, S1730S-H, S2730S-S, S5735-
L-I, S5735-L1,S300, S5735-L, S5735S-L, S5735S-L1,
S5735S-L-M, S5735-S, S500, S5735S-S, S5735-S-I,
S5720I-SI, S5735S-H, S5736-S, S6720S-EI, S6735-S, and
S6720-EI, the command output does not contain the
Fragments field to display statistics about received
fragmented packets.

Runts Number of received undersized frames with correct CRC

values.
For the S5720-LI, S5735-S, S500, S5735S-S, S5735-S-I,
S5720I-SI, S5735-L, S300, S2730S-S, S5735-L1, S5735-L-
I, S5735S-H, S5736-S, S6720S-EI, S6735-S, and S6720-EI,
the value of this field includes the number of received
fragmented packets shorter than 64 bytes and with
incorrect CRC values.

DropEvents Number of received packets that are discarded due to

GBP full or back pressure.

Alignments Number of received frames with alignment errors.

Symbols Number of received frames with coding errors.

Ignoreds Number of received MAC control frames whose OpCode

is not PAUSE.

Frames Number of packets with incorrect 802.3 length.

NOTE
Only the S1730S-H, S2730S-S, S5735-L-I, S5735-L1,S300,
S5735-L, S5735-S, S500, S5735-S-I, S6735-S, and S6720-EI
support frame statistics collection.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1490

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Item Description

Pause Number of pause frames.

NOTE
The following interfaces do not support the function of
collecting Pause frame statistics when flow control is not
enabled:
● Four XGE optical interfaces and last eight GE electrical
interfaces on the S5720-56C-HI
● Four XGE optical interfaces on the S5720-32C-HI-24S

Collisions Number of packets with 1 to 15 collisions during packet

forwarding.
NOTE
If the command output contains only this field and the
ExcessiveCollisions field is not displayed, the field also includes
the number of frames that are canceled due to consecutive 16
collisions.

ExcessiveCollisions Number of packets with 16 collisions and fail to be sent.

Late Collisions Number of packets with conflict and delayed.

Deferreds Number of delayed packets without conflict.

Buffers Purged Number of packets aged in the cache.

The S500, S5735-S, S5735S-S, S5735-S-I, S6720S-EI,
S6735-S, and S6720-EI do not have the Buffers Purged
field. On other models, the value of this field is always
0.

Input bandwidth Threshold for inbound bandwidth usage.

utilization threshold

Output bandwidth Threshold for outbound bandwidth usage.

utilization threshold

Input bandwidth Inbound bandwidth usage.

utilization For the S1720GW, S1720GWR, S1720GW-E, S1720GWR-
E, S1720GF, S1720GFR-P, S2720-EI, S5735-S, S500,
S5735S-S, S5735-S-I, S5720I-SI, S5720-LI, S1730S-H,
S5735S-L-M, S5720S-LI, S5735S-H, S5736-S, the
bandwidth usage of Giants packets is calculated based
on the configured jumbo frame length.
To set the maximum jumbo frame length, run the
jumboframe enable command.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1491

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Item Description

Output bandwidth Outbound bandwidth usage.

utilization For the S1720GW, S1720GWR, S1720GW-E, S1720GWR-
E, S1720GF, S1720GFR-P, S2720-EI, S5735-S, S500,
S5735S-S, S5735-S-I, S5720I-SI, S5720-LI, S1730S-H,
S5735S-L-M, S5720S-LI, S5735S-H, S5736-S, the
bandwidth usage of Giants packets is calculated based
on the configured jumbo frame length.
To set the maximum jumbo frame length, run the
jumboframe enable command.

4.1.12 display interface brief

Function
The display interface brief command displays brief information about the status
and configuration of interfaces.

Format
display interface brief [ main ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

main Displays brief -

information about an
Ethernet main interface,
but does not display sub-
interface information.
If no sub-interface is
configured on the main
interface, the command
output is the same as
that without the main
parameter.

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1492

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
The display interface brief command displays brief information about interfaces,
including the physical status, link layer protocol status, inbound and outbound
bandwidth usage within a certain period, and numbers of sent and received error
packets. This information helps locate faults on interfaces.
Precautions
To clear statistics on an interface, run the reset counters interface command.

Example
# Display brief information about the status and configuration of interfaces.
<HUAWEI> display interface brief
PHY: Physical
*down: administratively down
#down: LBDT down
(l): loopback
(s): spoofing
(E): E-Trunk down
(b): BFD down
(e): ETHOAM down
(dl): DLDP down
(lb): LBDT block
(lp): Loop-detect block
(ms): MACsec down
(o): Observe-port forwarding down
InUti/OutUti: input utility/output utility
Interface PHY Protocol InUti OutUti inErrors outErrors
GigabitEthernet0/0/1 up up 0.06% 100% 0 21217388
GigabitEthernet0/0/2 up up 100% 100% 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/3 up up 0% 100% 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/4 up up 100% 100% 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/5 up up 99% 100% 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/6 down down 0% 0% 10 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/7 down down 0% 0% 12 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/8 down down 0% 0% 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/9 down down 0% 0% 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/10 down down 0% 0% 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/11 down down 0% 0% 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/12 down down 0% 0% 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/13 down down 0% 0% 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/14 down down 0% 0% 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/15 down down 0% 0% 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/16 down down 0% 0% 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/17 down down 0% 0% 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/18 down down 0% 0% 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/19 down down 0% 0% 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/20 down down 0% 0% 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/21 down down 0% 0% 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/22 down down 0% 0% 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/23 down down 0% 0% 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/24 down down 0% 0% 0 0
MEth0/0/1 down down 0% 0% 0 0
NULL0 up up(s) 0% 0% 0 0

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1493

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Table 4-9 Description of the display interface brief command output

Item Description

Interface Type and number of an interface.

PHY Physical status of an interface:

● up: indicates that the interface is working properly.
● down: indicates that the physical layer of the interface
fails.
● *down: Administratively Down, indicating that the
administrator has run the shutdown command on the
interface.
● ^down: indicates that the interface is a backup
interface.
● #down: LBDT down, indicating that loop detection is
enabled on the interface. The interface is shut down
when the device detects a loop on the downstream
network or between interfaces.
● (l): indicates that the loopback function is enabled on
the interface.
● (b): indicates that the physical layer of the interface is
in BFD down state.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1494

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Item Description

Protocol Link layer protocol status of the interface:

● up: indicates that the interface is working properly.
● down: indicates that the link layer protocol fails.
● up(lp)/down(lp): indicates that the interface status is
Block due to the loop detected by the L2VPN loop
detection function on the interface.
● (s): indicates that the spoofing function is enabled on
the interface.
● (E): indicating that the Eth-Trunk goes down because
of the E-Trunk negotiation failure.
● (b): indicates that the link layer of the interface is in
BFD down state.
● (e): indicates that the link layer of the interface is in
ETHOAM down state.
● (dl): indicates that the link layer of the interface is in
DLDP down state.
● (lb): indicates that the interface is blocked due to
loops on the downstream network or between
interfaces.
● (lp): indicates that the interface status becomes Down
due to loops in the VLAN where the interface resides.
● (ms): indicates that the link layer of the interface is in
MACsec down state because MACsec is not enabled on
the peer interface.
NOTE
(ms): MACsec down is displayed only after the MACsec plug-
in is installed.
You can search for Plug-in Usage Guide at the Huawei
technical support website (Enterprise Network or Carrier),
and choose the desired plug-in usage guide based on the
switch model and software version. If you do not have
permission to access the website, contact technical support
personnel.
● (o): indicates that the interface status becomes Down
because the packet forwarding function is disabled on
the observing port or in the observing port group
where the port resides.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1495

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Item Description

InUti Average inbound bandwidth usage of an interface within

the last 300 seconds.
Average inbound bandwidth usage within the last 300
seconds = Average inbound traffic rate within the last 300
seconds/Interface bandwidth
When the average bandwidth usage is smaller than
0.005% and greater than 0, the value 0 is displayed.
When the average bandwidth usage is smaller than
0.01% and greater than 0.005%, the value 0.01% is
displayed. When the interface bandwidth becomes lower,
for example, the speed command is executed to reduce
the bandwidth of an Ethernet interface, the bandwidth
usage be displayed as 100% because the traffic volume is
not adjusted in time. "--" indicates that an interface does
not support the display of bandwidth usage.

OutUti Average outbound bandwidth usage within the last 300

seconds.
Average outbound bandwidth usage within the last 300
seconds = Average outbound traffic rate within the last
300 seconds/Interface bandwidth
When the average bandwidth usage is smaller than
0.005% and greater than 0, the value 0 is displayed.
When the average bandwidth usage is smaller than
0.01% and greater than 0.005%, the value 0.01% is
displayed. When the interface bandwidth becomes lower,
for example, the speed command is executed to reduce
the bandwidth of an Ethernet interface, the bandwidth
usage may be displayed as 100% because the traffic
volume is not adjusted in time. "--" indicates that an
interface does not support the display of bandwidth
usage.

inErrors The number of error packets received by an interface. The

value ranges from 0 to 4294967295. The count restarts
after the value exceeds the upper limit.
The value becomes 0 when you run the reset counters
interface command in the user view or when the number
of received packets reaches the maximum value
0xFFFFFFFF.

outErrors The number of error packets sent by an interface. The

value ranges from 0 to 4294967295. The count restarts
after the value exceeds the upper limit.
The value becomes 0 when you run the reset counters
interface command in the user view or when the number
of sent packets reaches the maximum value 0xFFFFFFFF.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1496

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

4.1.13 display interface description

Function
The display interface description command displays the description of an
interface.

Format
display interface description [ interface-type [ interface-number ] ]

display interface description [ interface-type ] main

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

interface-type Displays the description -

[ interface-number ] of a specified interface.
If an interface type is
specified but no interface
number is specified, the
description of all
interfaces of the
specified type is
displayed.

main Displays the description -

of the main interface.
● If an interface has no
sub-interfaces,
description about the
interface are
displayed whether
you specify the main
parameter or not.
● If an interface has
sub-interfaces,
description about the
interface and sub-
interfaces are
displayed if you do
not specify the main
parameter.

Views
All views

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1497

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
The display interface command can also display the description of an interface.
To quickly view the description of an interface, you are advised to use the display
interface description command.
Precautions
If no interface type is specified, the description of all interfaces is displayed. If an
interface type is specified but no interface number is specified, the description of
all interfaces of the specified type is displayed.
If there is a great deal of statistics about traffic on Eth-Trunk interfaces, you are
recommended to specify trunk-id to filter output information. Otherwise, a
problem may occur due to excessive output information: The displayed
information is repeatedly refreshed, and therefore required information cannot be
located.
Only the S5731-H, S5731-S, S5731S-H, S5731S-S, S5732-H, S6735-S, S6720-EI,
S6720S-EI, S6730-H, S6730S-H, S6730-S, and S6730S-S support sub-interfaces.

Example
# Display the description of GE0/0/1.
<HUAWEI> display interface description gigabitethernet 0/0/1
PHY: Physical
*down: administratively down
#down: LBDT down
(l): loopback
(s): spoofing
(E): E-Trunk down
(b): BFD down
(e): ETHOAM down
(dl): DLDP down
(lb): LBDT block
(ms): MACsec down
Interface PHY Protocol Description
GE0/0/1 down down

Table 4-10 Description of the display interface description command output

Item Description

Interface Type and number of an interface. If the bandwidth of an

interface exceeds 1 GB, the bandwidth value is displayed
following the interface name.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1498

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Item Description

PHY Physical status of an interface:

● up: indicates that the interface is working properly.
● down: indicates that the physical layer of the interface
fails.
● *down: administratively down, indicating that the
administrator has run the shutdown command on the
interface.
● #down: LBDT down, indicating that loopback detection
is enabled on the interface. The interface is shut down
when the device detects a loop on the downstream
network or between interfaces.
● (l): loopback, indicating that the loopback function is
enabled on the interface.
● (b): BFD down, indicating that the physical layer of the
interface is in BFD Down state.

Protocol Link layer protocol status of the interface:

● up: indicates that the interface is working properly.
● down: indicates that the link layer protocol of the
interface fails.
● (s): spoofing, indicating that the spoofing function is
enabled on the interface.
● (E): E-Trunk down, indicating that the interface goes
down because of the E-Trunk negotiation failure.
● (b): indicates that the link layer of the interface is in
BFD down state.
● (e): ETHOAM down, indicating that the link layer
protocol of the interface is in ETHOAM down state.
● (dl): DLDP down, indicating that the link layer protocol
of the interface is in DLDP down state.
● (lb): indicates that the interface is blocked due to
loops on the downstream network or between
interfaces.
● (ms): MACsec down, indicating that the interface is
Down because MACsec is not enabled on the peer
interface.
NOTE
(ms): MACsec down is displayed only after the MACsec plug-in is
installed.
You can search for Plug-in Usage Guide at the Huawei technical
support website (Enterprise Network or Carrier), and choose
the desired plug-in usage guide based on the switch model and
software version. If you do not have permission to access the
website, contact technical support personnel.

Description Interface description.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1499

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

4.1.14 display ip interface

Function
The display ip interface command displays the IP configuration and statistics on
interfaces. The statistics include the number of packets and bytes received and
sent by interfaces, number of multicast packets sent and received by interfaces,
and number of broadcast packets received, sent, forwarded, and discarded by
interfaces.

The display ip interface brief command displays brief information about

interface IP addresses, including the IP address, subnet mask, physical status, link-
layer protocol status, and number of interfaces in different states.

Format
display ip interface [ interface-type interface-number ]

display ip interface brief [ interface-type [ interface-number ] | slot slot-id [ card

card-number ] ]

display ip interface brief [ interface-type ] &<1-8>

Parameters

Parameter Description Value

interface-type Specifies the type and number of an interface. If no -

interface-number interface is specified, IP configuration and statistics
about all interfaces are displayed.

brief Displays brief information, including the IP address, -

subnet mask, physical status, link-layer protocol
status, and number of interfaces in different states.

slot slot-id Displays the IP configuration and statistics of -

interfaces on the specified slot.
If the slot number is not specified, brief information
related to the IP addresses of the interfaces on all
interface boards and main control boards is
displayed.

card card-number Displays the IP configuration and statistics of -

interfaces on specified card.

Views
All views

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1500

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
You can run the display ip interface brief command to view the following
information:
● IP configurations of all interfaces
● IP configurations of interfaces of the specified type and a specified interface
● IP configurations of interfaces that have IP addresses
This command, however, cannot display the IP configurations of Layer 2 interfaces
or Eth-Trunk member interfaces.

NOTE

● You can run the display interface description command to view the interface
description.
● You can run the display interface command to view detailed information about the
running status and statistics on the interface.
● Only the S5731-H, S5731-S, S5731S-H, S5731S-S, S5732-H, S6735-S, S6720-EI, S6720S-
EI, S6730-H, S6730S-H, S6730-S, and S6730S-S support sub-interfaces.

Example
# Display IP information about VLANIF15.
<HUAWEI> display ip interface vlanif 15
Vlanif15 current state : UP
Line protocol current state : UP
The Maximum Transmit Unit : 1500 bytes
input packets : 766390, bytes : 41540847, multicasts : 681817
output packets : 242239, bytes : 14679482, multicasts : 172333
Directed-broadcast packets:
received packets: 0, sent packets: 0
forwarded packets: 0, dropped packets: 0
Internet Address is 10.1.1.119/24
Broadcast address : 10.1.1.255
TTL being 1 packet number: 164035
TTL invalid packet number: 0
ICMP packet input number: 0
Echo reply: 0
Unreachable: 0
Source quench: 0
Routing redirect: 0
Echo request: 0
Router advert: 0
Router solicit: 0
Time exceed: 0
IP header bad: 0
Timestamp request: 0
Timestamp reply: 0
Information request: 0
Information reply: 0
Netmask request: 0
Netmask reply: 0
Unknown type: 0

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1501

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Table 4-11 Description of the display ip interface command output

Item Description

Vlanif15 current state Physical status of the interface:

● UP: indicates that the interface is physically
Up.
● DOWN: indicates that the interface is
physically Down.
● Administratively down: indicates that the
administrator has run the shutdown
(interface view) command on the
interface.

Line protocol current state Link layer protocol status of the interface:
● UP: The link layer protocol of the interface
is running properly.
● DOWN: The link layer protocol of the
interface is Down or no IP address is
configured on the interface.

The Maximum Transmit Unit MTU of the interface. The default MTU of an
Ethernet interface or a serial interface is 1500
bytes. Packets longer than the MTU are
fragmented before being transmitted. If
fragmentation is not allowed, the packets are
discarded.

input packets : 766390, bytes : Total number of packets, bytes, and multicast
41540847, multicasts : 681817 packets received by the interface.

output packets : 242239, Total number of packets, bytes, and multicast

bytes : 14679482, multicasts : packets sent by the interface.
172333

Directed-broadcast packets Number of packets broadcast on the interface

directly.

received packets Total number of received packets.

sent packets Total number of sent packets.

forwarded packets Total number of forwarded packets.

dropped packets Total number of discarded packets.

Internet Address is IP address assigned to the interface and mask

length.

Broadcast address Broadcast address of the interface.

TTL being 1 packet number Number of packets with TTL 1.

TTL invalid packet number Number of packets with invalid TTL.

ICMP packet input number Number of received ICMP packets.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1502

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Item Description

Echo reply Number of Echo Reply packets.

Unreachable Number of Destination Unreachable packets.

Source quench Number of Source Quench packets.

Routing redirect Number of Redirect packets.

Echo request Number of Echo Request packets.

Router advert Number of Router Advertisement packets.

Router solicit Number of Router Solicitation packets.

Time exceed Number of Time Exceeded packets.

IP header bad Number of IP header error packets.

Timestamp request Number of Timestamp Request packets.

Timestamp reply Number of Timestamp Reply packets.

Information request Number of Information Request packets.

Information reply Number of Information Reply packets.

Netmask request Number of Address Mask Request packets.

Netmask reply Number of Address Mask Reply packets.

Unknown type Number of unknown packets.

# Display brief IP information about VLANIF15.

<HUAWEI> display ip interface brief vlanif 15
*down: administratively down
^down: standby
(l): loopback
(s): spoofing
(E): E-Trunk down
Interface IP Address/Mask Physical Protocol
Vlanif15 10.1.1.119/24 up up

Table 4-12 Description of the display ip interface brief command output

Item Description

*down: Reason why an interface is physically Down.

Administratively down indicates that the
administrator has run the shutdown command on
the interface.

^down ^down: indicates that the interface is a backup

interface.

(l): loopback The letter "l" refers to loopback.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1503

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Item Description

(s): spoofing The letter "s" refers to spoofing.

(E): E-Trunk down Indicates that the Eth-Trunk is Down because of the
protocol negotiation on the E-Trunk.

Interface Interface type and number.

IP Address/Mask IP address and mask of an interface.

Physical Physical status of an interface:

● Up: indicates that the interface is physically Up. (l)
indicates that the loopback function is configured
on the interface.
● Down: indicates that the interface becomes faulty.
● *down: indicates that the administrator has run
the shutdown (interface view) command on the
interface. (l) indicates that the loopback function
is configured on the interface.
● !down: indicates that the FIB module is suspended.
In this case, the link protocol status of the
interface is Down.

Protocol Link protocol status of the interface:

● Up: indicates that the link protocol of the interface
is running properly. (s) indicates that the link
protocol status of the interface is Up when this
interface is created and has no IP address
configured. This is an inherent attribute of an
interface. When this interface is configured with
an IP address, (s) is still displayed.
● Down: indicates that the link protocol of the
interface fails or no IP address is configured on the
interface.
(l) indicates that the loopback function is configured
on the interface.

4.1.15 display ip interface description

Function
The display ip interface description command displays IP-related information
(such as the IP address, subnet mask, physical layer status, link layer protocol
status, and number of interfaces in different states) and description of an
interface.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1504

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Format
display ip interface description [ interface-type [ interface-number ] | interface-
type &<1-8> | slot slot-number [ card card-number ] ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

interface-type Indicates the interface type. If no interface type is -

specified, IP-related configurations and statistics of all
interfaces are displayed.

interface-number Indicates the interface number, which is used together -

with interface-type to identify an interface. If no
interface number is specified, IP-related configurations
and statistics of interfaces in the same type are
displayed.

interface-type Indicates that the command can display IP-related -

information about interfaces of multiple types. The
command can display IP-related information about
interfaces in a maximum of eight types.

slot slot-number Specifies the interface board number. -

card card-number Indicates the card number. If no card number is -

specified, IP-related information about all interfaces
on all cards in a specified slot is displayed.

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

Instead of running the display ip interface brief and display interface

description commands, you can run the display ip interface description
command to view both IP-related information and description of an interface,
which facilitates the user operation.

The display ip interface description command cannot display information about

Layer 2 interfaces. When it runs on an Eth-Trunk interface, it displays the status
and description of Eth-Trunk member interfaces.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1505

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Example
# View IP-related information and description of a specified interface.
<HUAWEI> display ip interface description
Codes:
Ana(Analogmodem), Asy(Async), Cell(Cellular),
Dia(Dialer), Eth(Ethernet) GE(GigabitEthernet),
H(Hssi), Ima(Ima-group), Loop(LoopBack),
MTun(MTunnel), S(Serial), Tun(Tunnel),
VE(Virtual-Ethernet), VT(Virtual-Template)

d(dampened), D(down), *D(administratively down)

^D(standby), l(loopback), s(spoofing),
U(up) E(E-Trunk down)

------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Number of interfaces whose physical status is Up: 9
Number of interfaces whose physical status is Down: 1
Number of interfaces whose protocol status is Up: 9
Number of interfaces whose protocol status is Down: 1

Interface IP Address/Mask Phy Prot Description

Loop0 10.3.0.2/32 U U(s)
Loop1 unassigned U U(s)
MEth0/0/1 192.168.150.143/24 U U
NULL0 unassigned U U(s)
Tun1 unassigned U D
Vlanif10 unassigned D D
Vlanif20 10.1.2.2/24 D D
Vlanif30 10.1.1.1/24 D D
Vlanif100 unassigned *D D

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1506

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Table 4-13 Description of the display ip interface description command output

Item Description

Codes: The following information provides the full

spelling and explanation of the abbreviated
interface names, physical status, and link
layer protocols.
Full spelling of the abbreviated interface
names is as follows:
● Ana: Analogmodem interfaces
● Asy: Async interfaces
● Cell: Cellular interfaces
● Dia: Dialer interfaces
● Eth: Ethernet interfaces
● GE: GigabitEthernet interfaces
● H: Hssi interfaces
● Ima: IMA-Group interfaces
● Loop: Loopback interfaces
● MTun: MTunnel interfaces
● S: Serial interfaces
● Tun: Tunnel interfaces
● VE: Virtual-Ethernet interfaces
● VT: Virtual-Template interfaces
Explanation of the abbreviated physical
status of the interface is as follows:
● U: indicates that the physical status of the
interface is Up.U(l) indicates that the
interface is enabled with the loopback
function.
● D: indicates that the physical status of the
interface is Down.
● *D: indicates that the network
administrator has run the shutdown
command on the interface.
● !D: indicates that the FIB module is in the
overload suspension state. The link layer
protocol of the interface goes Down.
● ^D: indicates that the FIB module is in the
standby state.
● s: indicates that the interface is in spoofing
status.
● E: the Eth-Trunk goes Down because of E-
Trunk negotiation.
Explanation of the abbreviated link layer
protocol status is as follows:

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1507

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Item Description

● U: indicates that the status of the link

layer protocol on the interface is Up. U(s)
indicates that the link layer protocol of the
interface is Up even though the interface
is not configured with an IP address. (s) is
an inherent attribute of the interface and
will be displayed when the interface is
configured with an IP address. (d)
indicates that the protocol module of the
interface is dampened.
● D: indicates that the link layer protocol of
the interface is Down or no IP address is
assigned to the interface.

Number of interfaces whose Indicates the number of interfaces whose

physical status is Up: physical status is Up.

Number of interfaces whose Indicates the number of interfaces whose

physical status is Down: physical status is Down.

Number of interfaces whose Indicates the number of interfaces whose link

protocol status is Up: layer protocol is Up.

Number of interfaces whose Indicates the number of interfaces whose link

protocol status is Down: layer protocol is Down.

Interface Indicates the name and number of an

interface.

IP Address/Mask Indicates the IP address and subnet mask of

an interface.

Phy Indicates the physical status of an interface.

Prot Indicates the link layer protocol status of an

interface.

Description Indicates the description of an interface,

expressed in characters. A maximum of 20
characters can be displayed. When the length
of the description is greater than 20
characters, only the first 16 characters are
displayed and the last 3 characters are
replaced by ellipsis (...). If the description of
an interface is the default setting, no
information is displayed.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1508

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

4.1.16 display this interface

Function
The display this interface command displays interface information in the current
interface view.

Format
display this interface

Parameters
None

Views
Interface view

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
In the interface view, you can run the display this interface command to rapidly
view the status of the interface and packet statistics on the interface.

Example
# Display information about GE0/0/1.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] display this interface
GigabitEthernet0/0/1 current state : UP
Line protocol current state : UP
Description:
Switch Port,Link-type : access(negotiated),
PVID : 1, TPID : 8100(Hex), The Maximum Frame Length is 9216
IP Sending Frames' Format is PKTFMT_ETHNT_2, Hardware address is 00e0-fc12-3456
Last physical up time : -
Last physical down time : 2000-04-01 23:55:43
Current system time: 2012-08-24 00:41:35+08:00
Port Mode: COMMON FIBER, Transceiver: 1000_BASE_SX_SFP
Speed : 1000, Loopback: NONE
Duplex: FULL, Negotiation: ENABLE
Mdi : -, Flow-control: DISABLE
Last 300 seconds input rate 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec
Last 300 seconds output rate 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec
Input peak rate 0 bits/sec, Record time: 2007-12-26 07:23:14
Output peak rate 0 bits/sec, Record time: 2007-12-26 07:23:14

Input: 0 packets, 0 bytes

Unicast: 0, Multicast: 0
Broadcast: 0, Jumbo: 0
Discard: 0, Pause: 0
Frames: 0

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1509

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Total Error: 0
CRC: 0, Giants: 0
Jabbers: 0, Fragments: 0
Runts: 0, DropEvents: 0
Alignments: 0, Symbols: 0
Ignoreds: 0

Output: 0 packets, 0 bytes

Unicast: 0, Multicast: 0
Broadcast: 0, Jumbo: 0
Discard: 0, Pause: 0

Total Error: 0
Collisions: 0, ExcessiveCollisions: 0
Late Collisions: 0, Deferreds: 0
Buffers Purged: 0

Input bandwidth utilization threshold : 80.00%

Output bandwidth utilization threshold: 80.00%
Input bandwidth utilization : 0%
Output bandwidth utilization : 0%

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1510

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Table 4-14 Description of this command output

Item Description

current state Current status of the interface:

● UP: The interface is physically Up.
● DOWN: The interface is physically Down.
Protected port: An interface is added to an interface
protection group and set to be a protected interface.
To add an interface to an interface protection group
and set the interface to be a protected interface, run
the port protect-group and protect-group member
commands.
● Administratively down: The administrator has run the
shutdown command on the interface.
● TRIGGER DOWN (BFD): When BFD detects a fault,
the physical status of the interface becomes Down
according to the OAM association.
● TRIGGER DOWN (3AH): When 3AH detects a fault,
the physical status of the interface becomes Down
according to the OAM association.
● TRIGGER DOWN (1AG): When 1AG detects a fault,
the physical status of the interface becomes Down
according to the OAM association.
● ERROR DOWN(auto-defend): When the interface
receives packets from an attack source, the physical
status of the interface becomes Down.
● ERROR DOWN(efm-threshold-event): When the
number of error frames, error codes, or error frame
seconds of EFM OAM detected by the interface
reaches or exceeds the threshold within a set period,
the physical status of the interface becomes Down
according to the OAM association.
● ERROR DOWN(efm-remote-failure): When EFM
detects a remote failure, the physical status of the
interface becomes Down according to the OAM
association.
● ERROR DOWN(bpdu-protection): If an edge interface
receives RST BPDUs after BPDU protection is enabled,
the physical status of the edge interface becomes
Down.
● ERROR DOWN(error-statistics): If the system detects
that the number of error packets received by the
interface exceeds the threshold, the physical status of
the interface becomes Down.
● ERROR DOWN(runts-error-statistics): When the
number of Runts error packets received by the
interface reaches the alarm threshold, the physical
status of the interface becomes Down.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1511

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Item Description

● ERROR DOWN(transceiver-power-low): If the system

detects that the optical power of the interface falls
below the configured lower alarm threshold, the
physical status of the interface becomes Down.
● ERROR DOWN(port-security): When the number of
learned MAC address entries reaches the threshold,
the interface goes Down.
● ERROR DOWN(mac-address-flapping): When the
learned MAC address flaps, the interface goes Down.
● ERROR DOWN(dhcp-packet-overspeed): When the
DHCP packet rate of the interface exceeds the
threshold, the physical status of the associated
interface becomes Down.
● ERROR DOWN(link-flap): When the link flaps, the
physical status of the associated interface becomes
Down.
● ERROR DOWN(data-integrity-error): The chip
memory identifier has a data integrity error and the
physical status of the interface becomes Down.
● LOOPBACK-DETECT DOWN: The interface goes Down
due to loopback detection.
● UP(E-TRUNK-DOWN): The Eth-Trunk interface goes
Down because of E-Trunk negotiation.
NOTE
There is a delay before the interface state is reported, so an
interface undergoes a short-time intermediate state before it
transitions to the ERROR DOWN state. The intermediate state
is ERROR DOWN (ERROR DOWN reason), up. This state does
not affect functioning of the interface.
When the physical status of the interface is ERROR
DOWN(data-integrity-error), perform the following operations:
1. Check whether the error-down auto-recovery cause data-
integrity-error interval interval-value command has been
configured on the switch. If the command has been
configured, go to step 2. Otherwise, go to step 3.
2. Check whether the interface restores to Up state after the
time specified by interval-value expires. If the interface does
not restore to Up state, go to step 3.
3. Run the undo shutdown command in the interface view to
enable the interface and check whether the interface
restores to Up state. If the interface does not restore to Up
state, go to step 4.
4. Run the reset slot command to restart the switch. After the
switch restarts, check whether the interface restores to Up
state. If the interface does not restore to Up state, go to
step 5.
5. Replace the switch.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1512

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Item Description

Line protocol current Link layer protocol status of the interface:

state ● UP: The link layer protocol of the interface is working
properly.
● UP (BFD status down): BFD associated with the
interface is Down.
● UP (Main BFD status down): The BFD session
associated with the main interface becomes Down
and is associated with the sub-interface status. This
state is displayed only for sub-interfaces.
● UP (spoofing): The link layer protocol of the interface
is always Up with the spoofing feature enabled.
● DOWN: The link-layer protocol status of the interface
is Down or no IP address is assigned to the interface.
For example, if no IP address is assigned to an IP
service-capable interface, its protocol status is Down.
● DOWN (CFM down): CFM detects a fault or receives
a fault notification message from its associated
module. In this case, the link layer protocol of the
interface becomes CFM Down.
● DOWN (EFM down): EFM detects a fault or receives
a fault notification message from its associated
module. In this case, the link layer protocol of the
interface becomes EFM Down.
● DOWN (DLDP down): DLDP detects a fault or
receives a fault notification message from its
associated module. In this case, the link layer
protocol of the interface becomes DLDP Down.
● DOWN (MACsec down): MACsec is not enabled on
the peer interface. In this case, the link layer protocol
of the interface becomes MACsec Down.
NOTE
DOWN (MACsec down) is displayed only after the MACsec
plug-in is installed.
You can search for Plug-in Usage Guide at the Huawei
technical support website (Enterprise Network or Carrier),
and choose the desired plug-in usage guide based on the
switch model and software version. If you do not have
permission to access the website, contact technical support
personnel.
● DOWN (Observe-port forwarding down): The
interface status becomes Down because the packet
forwarding function is disabled on the observing port
or in the observing port group where the port resides.
● DOWN(BFD status down): indicates that BFD detects
a fault and changes the link status of the interface to
BFD DOWN. In this state, the interface discards Layer
2 and Layer 3 packets but permits BFD packets.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1513

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Item Description

● DOWN(Main BFD status down): indicates that BFD

detects a fault and changes the link status of the
main interface and its sub-interfaces to BFD DOWN.
This state is applicable only to sub-interfaces. In this
state, Layer 2 and Layer 3 packets are discarded, but
BFD packets are permitted.

Description Interface description.

To configure the description for an interface, run the
description command.

Switch Port A Layer 2 interface.

To switch an interface to the Layer 3 mode, run the
undo portswitch command.
If the interface is a Layer 3 interface, Route Port is
displayed here.

PVID Default VLAN ID of the interface.

Link-type Link type of an interface, which is displayed only when

the interface works in Layer 2 mode:
● access(configured): The interface is manually
configured as the access type.
● hybrid: The interface is manually configured as the
hybrid type.
● trunk(configured): The interface is manually
configured as the trunk type.
● dot1q-tunnel: The interface is manually configured as
the dot1q-tunnel type.
● access(negotiated): The interface is automatically
negotiated as the access type.
● trunk(negotiated): The interface is automatically
negotiated as the trunk type.
To set the link type for an interface, run the port link-
type command.

The Maximum Frame Maximum frame length allowed by the interface.

Length To set the maximum frame length, run the jumboframe
enable command.

TPID Type of frames that are supported on the interface.

By default, this field displays 0x8100, indicating an
802.1Q frame.
This field is displayed only for a Layer 2 interface.

IP Sending Frames' Format of frames sent by the IP protocol, including

Format PKTFMT_ETHNT_2, Ethernet_802.3, and Ethernet_SNAP.

Hardware address MAC address of the interface.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1514

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Item Description

Port Mode Working mode of the interface:

● COMMON COPPER: The interface works as an
electrical interface.
● COMMON FIBER: The interface works as an optical
interface.
If the interface is a combo interface:
● COMBO AUTO: The combo interface automatically
selects the working mode.
● FORCE FIBER: The combo interface is configured as
an optical interface.
● FORCE COPPER: The combo interface is configured as
an electrical interface.
To configure the working mode for an interface, run the
combo-port command.

Supported rates Rate supported by the interface.

NOTE
Only the MultiGE electrical interface, XG electrical interface on
the and XG electrical interface on the ES5D21X08T00 subcard
are supported.

Transceiver Type of the optical module.

● This field is not displayed for electrical interfaces.
● If an optical or copper module is inserted into the
optical interface, the field indicates the model of the
optical or copper module.
● If an optical or copper module is not inserted into the
optical interface, the field is not displayed.
● If the optical interface is connected to the high-speed
cable, the field indicates the type of the cable.
● For the S1720, S2720-EI, S5720-LI, S5720-SI, S5720S-
LI, and S5735-S-I, If GPON optical module or a faulty
optical module is installed on an optical interface,
the field is displayed as ONLINE within 1 minute; the
detailed type of the GPON optical module is
displayed after 1 minute, and no information about
other faulty optical modules is displayed.

Last physical up time Last time the interface went Up physically. If this field
displays "-", the physical status of the interface does not
change.
If the system is configured with a time zone and is in
the daylight saving time, the time is displayed in the
format of YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS UTC±HH:MM DST.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1515

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Item Description

Last physical down Last time the interface went Down physically. If this
time field displays "-", the physical status of the interface
does not change.
If the system is configured with a time zone and is in
the summer daylight saving time, the time is displayed
in the format of YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS UTC±HH:MM
DST.

Current system time Current system time.

If the time zone is configured and the daylight saving
time is used, the time is in YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS
±HH:MM format.

Speed Current rate of the interface.

● In auto-negotiation mode, the auto speed command
configures the rate of an interface.
● In non-auto-negotiation mode, the speed command
configures the rate of an interface.

Loopback Loopback configuration of the interface.

To configure loopback on an interface, run the
loopback command.

Duplex Duplex mode of the interface:

● FULL: The interface works in full-duplex mode.
● HALF: The interface works in half-duplex mode.
● In auto-negotiation mode, the auto duplex
command configures the duplex mode of an
interface.
● In non-auto-negotiation mode, the duplex command
configures the duplex mode of an interface.

Negotiation Auto-negotiation mode of the interface. To configure

the auto-negotiation mode for an interface, run the
negotiation auto command.
● ENABLE: The interface works in auto-negotiation
mode.
● DISABLE: The interface works in non-auto-
negotiation mode.
● DISABLE(Only non-auto-negotiation is supported):
The interface does not support the auto-negotiation
mode and cannot have the negotiation auto
command configured. Only the S6735-S supports this
parameter.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1516

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Item Description

Mdi Network cable type of the interface.

To configure the network cable type of an interface, run
the mdi command.
The Mdi field displays - for an optical interface.

Flow-control Whether flow control is enabled:

● ENABLE: Flow control is enabled on the interface.
● DISABLE: Flow control and received flow control is
disabled on the interface.
● RECEIVE ENABLE: Receive flow control is enabled on
the interface.
NOTE
If the flow-control command has been executed to enable
flow control on an Ethernet interface, or the flow-control
receive command has been executed to enable received flow
control on an Ethernet interface, this field displays DISABLE in
the following situations:
● The interface is in Down state.
● The interface works in half-duplex mode.

FEC Whether FEC is enabled on an interface:

● RS-FEC: RS-FEC is enabled on the interface.
● BASE-FEC: BASE-R FEC is enabled on the interface.
● NONE: The optical module is not properly installed
and FEC is not configured; FEC is disabled; or FEC is
not supported because a 40G optical module (except
CFP 40GE optical module) is installed on a 100GE
interface.
When FEC is not configured, whether FEC is enabled on
the interface depends on the medium. When a CFP
40GE/100GE optical module is installed on the interface,
FEC cannot be configured on the interface and this field
displays -.

Last 300 seconds Incoming packet rate (bits per second and packets per
input rate second) within the last 300 seconds.

Last 300 seconds Outgoing packet rate (bits per second and packets per
output rate second) within the last 300 seconds.

Input peak rate 0 Maximum rate of incoming packets and time when the
bits/sec,Record time maximum rate is reached.

Output peak rate 0 Maximum rate of outgoing packets and time when the
bits/sec,Record time maximum rate is reached.

Input Total number of received packets.

Output Total number of sent packets.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1517

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Item Description

Unicast Number of unicast packets that are received or sent by

the interface.

Multicast Number of multicast packets that are received or sent

by the interface.
For the S5732-H, S6730-H, S6730S-H, S6730-S, and
S6730S-S the value of this field contains the number of
pause frames.
For the S5736-S24T4XC, S5736-S24U4XC, S5736-
S48T4XC, and S5736-S48U4XC, the value of the
Multicast field contains the number of outgoing pause
frames on GE electrical interfaces.

Broadcast Number of broadcast packets that are received or sent

by the interface.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1518

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Item Description

Jumbo This field includes the following values in the outbound

direction of an interface:
● Number of sent Ethernet frames that exceed 1517
bytes with correct FCS values on the S200, S1730S-S,
S1730S-S1, S2730S-S, S5735-L-I, S5735-L1,S300,
S5735-L, S5735S-L1, S5735S-L, S5735S-L-M, S5735-S,
S500, S5735S-S, S5735-S-I or number of sent
Ethernet frames that exceed 1518 bytes with correct
FCS values on other switch models.
● Number of sent VLAN frames that exceed 1517 bytes
with correct FCS values on the S200, S1730S-S,
S1730S-S1, S2730S-S, S5735-L-I, S5735-L1,S300,
S5735-L, S5735S-L1, S5735S-L, S5735S-L-M, S5735-S,
S500, S5735S-S, S5735-S-I, number of sent VLAN
frames that exceed 1522 bytes with correct FCS
values on the S6735-S, S6720-EI and S6720S-EI, or
number of sent VLAN frames that exceed 1518 bytes
with correct FCS values on other switch models.
This field includes the following values in the inbound
direction of an interface:
● Number of received Ethernet frames with the length
ranging from 1518 bytes to the configured maximum
jumbo frame length and with correct FCS values on
the S200, S1730S-S, S1730S-S1, S2730S-S, S5735-L-I,
S5735-L1,S300, S5735-L, S5735S-L1, S5735S-L,
S5735S-L-M, S5735-S, S500, S5735S-S, S5735-S-I or
number of received Ethernet frames with the length
ranging from 1519 bytes to the configured maximum
jumbo frame length and with correct FCS values on
other switch models.
● Number of received VLAN frames with the length
ranging from 1518 bytes to the configured maximum
jumbo frame length and with correct FCS values on
the S200, S1730S-S, S1730S-S1, S2730S-S, S5735-L-I,
S5735-L1,S300, S5735-L, S5735S-L1, S5735S-L,
S5735S-L-M, S5735-S, S500, S5735S-S, S5735-S-I,
number of received VLAN frames with the length
ranging from 1523 bytes to the configured maximum
jumbo frame length and with correct FCS values on
the S6735-S, S6720-EI and S6720S-EI, or number of
received VLAN frames with the length ranging from
1519 bytes to the configured maximum jumbo frame
length and with correct FCS values on other switch
models.
For the S5731-H, S5731-S, S5731S-H, S5731S-S, S5732-
H, S6730-H, S6730S-H, S6730-S, and S6730S-S, and the
value of this field contains the number of received
packets with length ranging from 1518 bytes to the

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1519

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Item Description

jumbo frame length configured on the interface and

correct CRC values.
To set the maximum jumbo frame length, run the
jumboframe enable command.
NOTE
Only S5731-H, S5731-S, S5731S-H, S5731S-S, S5732-H, S1730S-
H, S2730S-S, S5735-L-I, S5735-L1,S300, S5735-L, S5735S-L,
S5735S-L1, S5735S-L-M, S5735-S, S500, S5735S-S, S5735-S-I,
S6735-S, S6720-EI, S6720S-EI, S6730-H, S6730S-H, S6730-S,
and S6730S-S support statistics on Jumbo frames.

Discard Number of packets discarded by the interface during

physical layer detection.
On the S1720GW, S1720GWR, S1720GW-E, S1720GWR-
E, S1720GF, S1720GFR-P, S2720-EI, S5720-LI, S1730S-H,
S2730S-S, S5735-L-I, S5735-L1,S300, S5735-L, S5735S-L,
S5735S-L1, S5735S-L-M, S5720S-LI, S5735-S, S500,
S5735S-S, S5735-S-I, S5720I-SI, S5735S-H, S5736-S,
after you run the reset qos queue statistics command,
the number of packets discarded by the interface is
cleared.

Total Error Number of error packets found during physical layer

detection.

CRC Number of packets with length ranging from 64 bytes

to 1518 bytes and incorrect FCS values.
For the S5720-LI, S5731-H, S5731S-H, S5731S-S, S5732-
H, S5736-S, S6730-H, S6730S-H, S6730-S, and S6730S-S,
the value of this field includes the number of received
packets longer than the maximum jumbo frame length
and with incorrect FCS values.
For the S1720GF, S1720GFR-P, S1720GW, S1720GW-E,
S1720GWR, S1720GWR-E, S2720-EI, S5720-LI, S5720S-
LI, S5720I-SI, S5735S-H, S5736-S, S1730S-H, S2730S-S,
S5735-L-I, S5735-L1,S300, S5735-L, S5735S-L, S5735S-
L1, S5735S-L-M, S5735-S, S500, S5735S-S, S5735-S-I, the
value of this field contains the number of received
packets with length ranging from 1518 bytes to the
jumbo frame size configured on the interface and
incorrect FCS values.

Giants Number of received frames with length exceeding the

maximum jumbo frame length.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1520

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Item Description

Jabbers The S5720-LI, S5720I-SI, S1730S-H, S5731-S, S5731S-S,

S5731-H, S5731S-H, S5732-H, S2730S-S, S5735-L-I,
S5735-L1,S300, S5735-L, S5735S-L, S5735S-L1, S5735S-
L-M, S5735-S, S500, S5735S-S, S5735-S-I, S5735S-H,
S5736-S, S6735-S, S6720-EI, S6720S-EI, S6730S-S, and
S6730-H do not have the Jabbers field. On the other
product models, this field indicates the number of
received packets with length exceeding the maximum
jumbo frame length and incorrect FCS values.

FragmentsS6720-HI Number of received fragmented packets. A fragmented

packet is a packet shorter than 64 bytes and with
incorrect CRC values.
For the S5731-H, S5731-S, S5731S-H, S5731S-S, S6730-
H, S6730S-H, S6730-S, and S6730S-S, the value of this
field contains the number of undersized frames with the
correct CRC values received is displayed.
On the S2720-EI, S5720-LI, S1730S-H, S2730S-S, S5735-
L-I, S5735-L1,S300, S5735-L, S5735S-L, S5735S-L1,
S5735S-L-M, S5735-S, S500, S5735S-S, S5735-S-I,
S5720I-SI, S5735S-H, S5736-S, S6720S-EI, S6735-S, and
S6720-EI, the command output does not contain the
Fragments field to display statistics about received
fragmented packets.

Runts Number of received undersized frames with correct CRC

values.
For the S5720-LI, S5735-S, S500, S5735S-S, S5735-S-I,
S5720I-SI, S5735-L, S300, S2730S-S, S5735-L1, S5735-L-
I, S5735S-H, S5736-S, S6720S-EI, S6735-S, and S6720-EI,
the value of this field includes the number of received
fragmented packets shorter than 64 bytes and with
incorrect CRC values.

DropEvents Number of received packets that are discarded due to

GBP full or back pressure.

Alignments Number of received frames with alignment errors.

Symbols Number of received frames with coding errors.

Ignoreds Number of received MAC control frames whose OpCode

is not PAUSE.

Frames Number of packets with incorrect 802.3 length.

NOTE
Only the S1730S-H, S2730S-S, S5735-L-I, S5735-L1,S300,
S5735-L, S5735-S, S500, S5735-S-I, S6735-S, and S6720-EI
support frame statistics collection.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1521

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Item Description

Pause Number of pause frames.

NOTE
The following interfaces do not support the function of
collecting Pause frame statistics when flow control is not
enabled:
● Four XGE optical interfaces and last eight GE electrical
interfaces on the S5720-56C-HI
● Four XGE optical interfaces on the S5720-32C-HI-24S

Collisions Number of packets with 1 to 15 collisions during packet

forwarding.
NOTE
If the command output contains only this field and the
ExcessiveCollisions field is not displayed, the field also includes
the number of frames that are canceled due to consecutive 16
collisions.

ExcessiveCollisions Number of packets with 16 collisions and fail to be sent.

Late Collisions Number of packets with conflict and delayed.

Deferreds Number of delayed packets without conflict.

Buffers Purged Number of packets aged in the cache.

The S500, S5735-S, S5735S-S, S5735-S-I, S6720S-EI,
S6735-S, and S6720-EI do not have the Buffers Purged
field. On other models, the value of this field is always
0.

Input bandwidth Threshold for inbound bandwidth usage.

utilization threshold

Output bandwidth Threshold for outbound bandwidth usage.

utilization threshold

Input bandwidth Inbound bandwidth usage.

utilization For the S1720GW, S1720GWR, S1720GW-E, S1720GWR-
E, S1720GF, S1720GFR-P, S2720-EI, S5735-S, S500,
S5735S-S, S5735-S-I, S5720I-SI, S5720-LI, S1730S-H,
S5735S-L-M, S5720S-LI, S5735S-H, S5736-S, the
bandwidth usage of Giants packets is calculated based
on the configured jumbo frame length.
To set the maximum jumbo frame length, run the
jumboframe enable command.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1522

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Item Description

Output bandwidth Outbound bandwidth usage.

utilization For the S1720GW, S1720GWR, S1720GW-E, S1720GWR-
E, S1720GF, S1720GFR-P, S2720-EI, S5735-S, S500,
S5735S-S, S5735-S-I, S5720I-SI, S5720-LI, S1730S-H,
S5735S-L-M, S5720S-LI, S5735S-H, S5736-S, the
bandwidth usage of Giants packets is calculated based
on the configured jumbo frame length.
To set the maximum jumbo frame length, run the
jumboframe enable command.

4.1.17 interface

Function
The interface command displays the interface view or sub-interface view.

The undo interface command deletes a sub-interface.

Format
interface interface-type interface-number

undo interface interface-type interface-number

Parameters

Parameter Description Value

interface-type Specifies the type and number of an interface. The -
interface- interface type and number can be closely next to each
number other or separated by a space character.
To create a sub-interface, enter the sub-interface view,
or delete a sub-interface, specify interface-number in the
format of main interface number.sub-interface number.
For example, the number of sub-interface 1 on GE0/0/1
is GE0/0/1.1.

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1523

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
After the specified interface view is displayed, you can set attributes for the
interface.
Precautions
● VLAN termination sub-interfaces cannot be created on a VCMP client.
● You need to set the interface type before creating a sub-interface. Only hybrid
and trunk interfaces on the preceding series of cards support Ethernet sub-
interface configuration.
● Physical interfaces cannot be created or deleted. You can only run the
interface interface-type interface-number command to enter the view of an
existing physical interface.
● Sub-interfaces can be created. Run the interface interface-type interface-
number command to create a sub-interface and enter the sub-interface view.
● Sub-interfaces can be deleted. Run the undo interface interface-type
interface-number command to delete a sub-interface.
● Only the S5731-H, S5731-S, S5731S-H, S5731S-S, S5732-H, S6735-S, S6720-EI,
S6720S-EI, S6730-H, S6730S-H, S6730-S, and S6730S-S support sub-interfaces.

Example
# Display the view of GE0/0/1.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1]

# Create sub-interface GE0/0/1.1.

<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] port link-type hybrid
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] quit
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1.1

# Delete sub-interface GE0/0/1.1.

<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] undo interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1.1

4.1.18 mtu (Interface view)

Function
Using the mtu command, you can set the maximum transmission unit (MTU) of
an interface.
Using the undo mtu command, you can restore the default MTU of an interface.
By default, the MTU of an interface is 1500 bytes.

Format
mtu mtu

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1524

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

undo mtu

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

mtu Specifies the ● For a physical interface, a VLANIF interface,

MTU of an an Eth-Trunk interface, a physical sub-
interface. interface, and an Eth-Trunk sub-interface,
the value is an integer that ranges from 128
to 9216, in bytes.
● For a VE sub-interface, the value is an
integer that ranges from 46 to 1500, in
bytes.
● For a VBDIF interface, the value is an
integer that ranges from 128 to 1560, in
bytes.
● For a tunnel interface, the value is an
integer. For the S5731-H, S5731-S, S5731S-
H, S5731S-S, S5732-H, S6735-S, S6720-EI,
S6720S-EI, S6730-H, S6730S-H, S6730-S,
and S6730S-S, the value ranges from 128 to
9216. For other switch models, the value
ranges from 128 to 1530.

Views
Interface view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
The maximum transmission unit (MTU) determines the maximum number of
bytes in IP packets each time a sender can send. The MTU of an IP packet refers to
the number of bytes from the IP header of the packet to the data.
The size of data frames is limited at the network layer. Any time the IP layer
receives an IP packet to be sent, it checks to which local interface the packet
needs to be sent and obtains the MTU configured on the interface. Then the IP
layer compares the MTU with the packet length. If the packet length is longer
than the MTU, the IP layer fragments the packet into smaller packets, which are
shorter than or equal to the MTU. If unfragmentation is configured, some packets
may be discarded during data transmission at the IP layer. To ensure jumbo
packets are not dropped during transmission, you need to configure forcible
fragmentation. In this case, you can run the mtu command to set the size of a
fragment.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1525

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Therefore, a proper MTU is a prerequisite for normal communication on a

network.
● If the configured MTU is excessively small and the packet size is larger,
packets are discarded when being forwarded through the forwarding chip;
packets are broken into a great number of fragments when being forwarded
through the CPU, affecting proper data transmission.
● If the size of packets exceeds the MTU supported by a transit node or a
receiver, the transit node or receiver fragments the packets or even discards
them, aggravating the network transmission load.
The default MTU is recommended. When the size of packets to be transmitted or
the device that receives packets changes, you can change the MTU based on the
actual network to keep the MTU value consistent with the MTU values of the
upper-level and lower-level interfaces.

NOTE

The configured MTU takes effect for data packets on the control plane.
For S5731-H, S6730-H, and S6730S-H, the configured MTU takes effect for data packets on
the forwarding plane after you run the ipv4 fragment enable command to enable packet
fragmentation. The configured MTU takes effect for GRE packets on the forwarding plane
without the need to execute the ipv4 fragment enable command.
For other devices, the configured MTU does not take effect for data packets on the
forwarding plane.

Prerequisites
Run undo portswitch command to change the working mode of Ethernet
interfaces from Layer 2 mode to Layer 3 mode.
Precautions
● After changing the maximum transmission unit (MTU) using the mtu
command on an interface, you need to restart the interface to make the new
MTU take effect. To restart the interface, run the shutdown command and
then the undo shutdown command, or run the restart command in the
interface view.
● If IPv6 is run on a tunnel interface and the MTU set using the mtu command
on the interface is smaller than 1280, IPv6 works abnormally on this interface.
To prevent this problem, set the MTU of a tunnel interface to a value greater
than or equal to 1280 if IPv6 runs on the tunnel interface.
● Configuring the MTU of an interface affects the maximum number of bytes
for IP packets to be sent by the interface at a time. This configuration also
affects the maximum frame length of sent Ethernet packets. The Ethernet
packet size cannot exceed the maximum frame length allowed by the peer
interface, which can be set using the jumboframe enable command.

Example
# Set the MTU of GE0/0/1 to 1200 bytes.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] undo portswitch
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] mtu 1200
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] restart

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1526

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

# Set the MTU of the VLANIF interface to 1492 bytes.

<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface Vlanif 100
[HUAWEI-Vlanif100] mtu 1492
[HUAWEI-Vlanif100] restart

# Set the MTU of Tunnel 1 to 1492.

<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface tunnel 1
[HUAWEI-Tunnel1] mtu 1492
[HUAWEI-Tunnel1] shutdown
[HUAWEI-Tunnel1] undo shutdown

4.1.19 port description

Function
The port description command configures description about the device type
connected to an interface.

The undo port description command restores the default setting.

By default, no description about the device type connected to an interface is

configured.

Format
port description { router | switch | phone | desktop }

undo port description

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

router Indicates that the -

interface is connected to
a router.

switch Indicates that the -

interface is connected to
a switch.

phone Indicates that the -

interface is connected to
an IP phone.

desktop Indicates that the -

interface is connected to
a desktop terminal, such
as a PC.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1527

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Views
Ethernet interface view, GE interface view, XGE interface view, MultiGE interface
view, 25GE interface view, 40GE interface view, 100GE interface view, Eth-Trunk
interface view, port group view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
You can run this command to configure description about the device type
connected to an interface to facilitate device management and maintenance. For
example, you can run port description router command to indicate that the
interface is connected to a router.
Precautions
After you configure this command on an interface, the interface can still switch
between Layer 2 and Layer 3 modes.

Example
# Specify description of the Ethernet interface GE0/0/1 to router to indicate that
the interface is connected to a router.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] port description router

4.1.20 reset counters if-mib interface

Function
The reset counters if-mib interface command clears interface traffic statistics in
the Network Management System (NMS).

Format
reset counters if-mib interface [ interface-type [ interface-number ] ]

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1528

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Parameters

Parameter Description Value

interface-type Clears traffic statistics on a specified interface in the -
[ interface- NMS.
number ]
● interface-type specifies the interface type.
● interface-number specifies the interface number.
If an interface type is specified but no interface
number is specified, traffic statistics on all interfaces
of the specified type are cleared.

Views
User view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

Before collecting traffic statistics on a specific interface within a period in the

NMS, clear existing traffic statistics on this interface in the NMS.

NOTE

For details on how to view interface traffic statistics in the NMS, see the NMS
documentation.

Precautions

● If no interface type and number are specified, traffic statistics of all interfaces
in the NMS are cleared.
● After you run the reset counters if-mib interface command, traffic statistics
on all interfaces in the NMS are cleared. Therefore, confirm the action before
you run this command.
● Running the reset counters if-mib interface command does not affect the
interface traffic statistics displayed by the display interface command. To
clear the interface traffic statistics displayed by the display interface
command, run the reset counters interface command.

Example
# Clear traffic statistics on GE0/0/1 in the NMS.
<HUAWEI> reset counters if-mib interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1529

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

4.1.21 reset counters interface

Function
The reset counters interface command clears traffic statistics about a specified
interface.

Format
reset counters interface [ interface-type [ interface-number ] ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

interface-type Clears traffic statistics on -

[ interface-number ] a specified interface.
● interface-type
specifies the interface
type.
● interface-number
specifies the interface
number.
If an interface type is
specified but no interface
number is specified,
traffic statistics on all
interfaces of the
specified type are
cleared.

Views
User view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

Before collecting traffic statistics on an interface within a certain period, run the
reset counters interface command to clear existing traffic statistics.

Precautions

● Statistics cannot be restored after being cleared. Therefore, exercise caution

before clearing the statistics.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1530

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

● Traffic accounting is based on the packet statistics on an interface. The

clearing of the packet statistics on an interface by using the reset counters
interface command affects the traffic accounting result. Therefore, do not
randomly clear the packet statistics on an interface in a normal application
environment.
● If no interface type is specified, traffic statistics on all types of interfaces are
cleared. If an interface type is specified but no interface number is specified,
traffic statistics on all interfaces of the specified type are cleared.
● Running the reset counters interface command clears the last part of the
display interface command output. That is, statistics about received and
transmitted packets on the interface are cleared.

Example
# Clear traffic statistics on all interfaces.
<HUAWEI> reset counters interface

# Clear traffic statistics on VLANIF10.

<HUAWEI> reset counters interface vlanif 10

4.1.22 reset counters top interface

Function
The reset counters top interface command clears top N interface traffic statistics
reports.

Format
reset counters top interface report [ report-number ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
report-number Specifies the number of the top N interface The value is an
traffic statistics report to be deleted. If you integer ranging
do not specify this parameter, the command from 1 to 5.
clears all top N interface traffic statistics
reports.

Views
User view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1531

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

The top N interface traffic statistics function allows a device to generate a

maximum of five top N interface traffic statistics reports. If you want to generate
new top N interface traffic statistics reports when five top N interface traffic
statistics reports already exist, run the reset counters top interface report
[ report-number ] command to clear existing ones.
Precautions
● After you run the reset counters top interface report report-number
command to clear a specified top N interface traffic statistics report, the
numbers of other top N interface traffic statistics reports remain unchanged.
● You can run the reset counters top interface report [ report-number ]
command even if less than five top N interface traffic statistics reports exist.

Example
# Clear all top N interface traffic statistics reports.
<HUAWEI> reset counters top interface report

# Clear the top N interface traffic statistics report numbered 1.

<HUAWEI> reset counters top interface report 1

4.1.23 restart (interface view)

Function
The restart command restarts an interface.

Format
restart

Parameters
None

Views
Ethernet interface view, GE interface view, XGE interface view, MultiGE interface
view, 40GE interface view, 100GE interface view, Eth-Trunk interface view, VLANIF
interface view, Sub-interface view, Tunnel interface view, VE interface view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
After modifying parameters of an interface, run the restart command to make the
modification take effect.
Precautions

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1532

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

● Restarting an interface during data transmission will cause data frame loss or
service interruption. Exercise caution when you use the restart command.
● Running the restart command is equivalent to running the shutdown
command and the undo shutdown command in sequence.
● Only the S5731-H, S5731-S, S5731S-H, S5731S-S, S5732-H, S6735-S, S6720-EI,
S6720S-EI, S6730-H, S6730S-H, S6730-S, and S6730S-S support sub-interfaces.

Example
# Restart GE0/0/1.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] restart

4.1.24 set flow-stat interval

Function
The set flow-stat interval command sets the interval for collecting the traffic
statistics on interfaces.

The undo set flow-stat interval command restores the default interval for
collecting traffic statistics on interfaces.

By default, the interval for collecting traffic statistics on interfaces is 300 seconds.

Format
set flow-stat interval interval-time

undo set flow-stat interval

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

interval-time Specifies the interval for The value is an integer

collecting traffic statistics that ranges from 10 to
on interfaces. 600, in seconds. In
addition, the value must
be a multiple of 10. The
default value is 300s.

Views
System view, Interface view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1533

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
By using the set flow-stat interval command to set the interval for collecting
traffic statistics on interfaces, you can collect and analyze traffic statistics
according to your needs. You can also take traffic control measures based on the
traffic statistics to prevent network congestion and service interruption.
● When congestion occurs, set the interval for collecting traffic statistics on an
interface to less than 300 seconds, or 30 seconds if congestion worsens. Then
observe the traffic distribution on the interface within a short period of time.
If data packets cause congestion, take proper measures to control the rate of
the packets.
● When the network bandwidth is sufficient and services are running properly,
set the interval for collecting traffic statistics on an interface to more than
300 seconds. If the value of any traffic parameter is not within the specified
range, change the interval for collecting traffic statistics to observe the traffic
volume in real time.
Precautions
● The interval configured in the system view takes effect on all the interfaces
that use the default interval.
● The interval configured in the interface view takes effect only on the current
interface.
● The interval configured in the interface view takes precedence over the
interval configured in the system view.

Example
# Set the interval for collecting traffic statistics on GE0/0/1 to 400s.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] set flow-stat interval 400

4.1.25 shutdown (interface view)

Function
The shutdown command disables an interface.
The undo shutdown command enables an interface.
By default, interfaces are enabled.

Format
shutdown
undo shutdown

Parameters
None

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1534

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Views
Interface view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

After modifying parameters of an interface, run the shutdown and undo

shutdown commands to make the modification take effect.

When an interface is not connected to a cable or fiber, you can use the shutdown
command to disable the interface to prevent exceptions caused by interference.

Precautions

● When the device supports the autocomplete function, you must enter at least
the characters shut before the device can automatically complete the
shutdown command.
● Disabling an interface during data transmission will cause data frame loss or
service interruption. Exercise caution when you use the shutdown command.
● Some logical interfaces, such as loopback, and null interfaces, do not support
the shutdown and undo shutdown commands.
● If you run the shutdown command in the Eth-Trunk interface view, all Eth-
Trunk member interfaces are disabled.
● Running the shutdown and undo shutdown commands is equivalent to
running the restart command.
● When an interface is configured with a sub-interface, the default interval for
running the shutdown and undo shutdown commands on the main interface
is 15 seconds.
● When a physical interface functions as an Eth-Trunk member interface, the
default interval for running the shutdown and undo shutdown commands
on this interface is 15 seconds.

Example
# Shut down GE0/0/1.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] shutdown

4.2 Ethernet Interface Configuration Commands

4.2.1 Command Support

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1535

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Commands provided in this section and all the parameters in the commands are
supported by all switch models by default, unless otherwise specified. For details,
see specific commands.

4.2.2 am isolate
Function
The am isolate command isolates the current interface from a specified interface
unidirectionally.
The undo am isolate command cancels unidirectional isolation between the
current interface and a specified interface. If no interface is specified,
unidirectional isolation between the current interface and all the other interfaces
is canceled.
By default, no unidirectional isolation is configured between the current interface
and a specified interface.

Format
am isolate { interface-type interface-number }&<1-8>
undo am isolate [ interface-type interface-number ]&<1-8>
am isolate interface-type interface-number1 [ to interface-number2 ]
undo am isolate [ interface-type interface-number1 [ to interface-number2 ] ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

interface-type interface- Specifies the type and -

number number of the interface
from which the current
interface is isolated
unidirectionally.
● interface-type
specifies the type of
the interface.
● interface-number
specifies the number
of the interface.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1536

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Parameter Description Value

interface-type interface- Specifies the type and interface-number2 must

number1 [ to interface- number of the interface be greater than
number2 ] from which the current interface-number1.
interface is isolated
unidirectionally.
to specifies an interface
range, indicating all the
interfaces numbered
between interface-
number1 and interface-
number2.

Views
Ethernet interface view, GE interface view, XGE interface view, MultiGE interface
view, 25GE interface view, 40GE interface view, 100GE interface view, Eth-Trunk
interface view, port group view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
The am isolate command isolates interfaces unidirectionally. For example, if
interface A is isolated from interface B unidirectionally, packets sent from interface
A cannot reach interface B, but packets sent from interface B can reach interface
A. Unidirectional isolation needs to be configured in the following scenarios:
● When multiple hosts connect to different interfaces of a device and a host
sends many broadcast packets to the other hosts, isolate the interface
connected to the host from other interfaces unidirectionally. Then the other
hosts do not receive packets from the host.
● Interfaces in a port isolation group are isolated from each other, but
interfaces in different port isolation groups can communicate. To isolate
interfaces in different port isolation groups, configure unidirectional isolation
between these interfaces.
By default, only Layer 2 packets of the current interface are isolated from a
specified interface, but Layer 3 packets are not isolated. To isolate both Layer 2
and Layer 3 packets on interfaces unidirectionally, run the port-isolate mode all
command.
Precautions
An interface can be unidirectionally isolated from another type of interface.
However, an interface cannot be unidirectionally isolated from itself or from the
management interface. In addition, an Eth-Trunk cannot be unidirectionally
isolated from its member interfaces.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1537

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

NOTE

An interface can be isolated from a maximum of 128 interfaces unidirectionally.

Example
# Isolate GE0/0/1 from GE0/0/2 unidirectionally.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] am isolate gigabitethernet 0/0/2

4.2.3 assign port-type 100GE

Function
The assign port-type 100GE command sets the maximum rate of QSFP28
interfaces to 100 Gbit/s.

The undo assign port-type 100GE command restores the maximum rate of
QSFP28 interfaces to 40 Gbit/s.

For the S6730-H24X6C (part number: 02352FSG) and S6730-H48X6C (part

number: 02352FSF) running V200R013C02, the default rate of QSFP28 interfaces
is 100 Gbit/s. After a version upgrade from V200R013C02 to V200R019C00 or later,
the default rate of QSFP28 interfaces is still 100 Gbit/s.

For the S5732-H24S6Q, S5732-H48S6Q, S6730-H24X6C (part number: 02352FSG)

and S6730-H48X6C (part number: 02352FSF) running V200R019C00 or later, the
default rate of QSFP28 interfaces is 40 Gbit/s.

The S6730-H24X6C (part number: 02353GFC), S6730S-H24X6C-A, and S6730-

H48X6C (part number: 02353FWL) running V200R013C02 or later have loaded the
license by default, and the rate of QSFP28 interfaces is 100 Gbit/s.

NOTE

This command is supported only on the following switch models:

S5732-H24S6Q, S5732-H48S6Q, S6730S-H24X6C-A, S6730-H24X6C, S6730-H48X6C

Format
assign port-type 100GE [ slot slot-id | all ]

undo assign port-type 100GE [ slot slot-id | all ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

slot slot-id Specifies a slot ID. The value must be set according to the device
configuration.

all Indicates all slots. -

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1538

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
To change the rate of QSFP28 interfaces on the S5732-H24S6Q, S5732-H48S6Q,
S6730-H24X6C (part number: 02352FSG) and S6730-H48X6C (part number:
02352FSF), apply for and purchase a license from the equipment supplier, activate
the license, and then run the assign port-type 100GE or undo assign port-type
100GE command.
For the S6730-H24X6C (part number: 02353GFC), S6730S-H, and S6730-H48X6C
(part number: 02353FWL), the license has been loaded to the device by default.
You can run the assign port-type 100GE or undo assign port-type 100GE
command to change the rate of QSFP28 interfaces.
Precautions
● The corresponding license is required before this command is run.
● To check the current rate of an interface and the rate that takes effect after a
device restart, run the display device port-type configuration command.
● After the command is executed, restart the device immediately for the
configuration to take effect.
● After the device restarts, the original interface configuration may be lost.
Therefore, back up the configuration before the restart. After the restart,
check the configuration and modify it if necessary.
● After this command is executed, the maximum rate of QSFP28 interfaces is
the configured rate if you restore the factory settings with one click.
● After the license expires, the maximum rate of QSFP28 interfaces is the
default rate if you restore the factory settings with one click.

Example
# Set the maximum rate of all QSFP28 interfaces on the switch to 100 Gbit/s.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] assign port-type 100ge all
Warning: The configuration of 40G interfaces may be lost after the device restart. Therefore, back up their
configuration before the
restart, and check the configuration after the restart is complete. Continue? [Y/N]:y
Info: The current configuration has been modified and takes effect after the device is restarted.

4.2.4 assign port-type XGE

Function
The assign port-type XGE command sets the maximum rate of 1000BASE-X
interfaces to 10 Gbit/s.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1539

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

The undo assign port-type XGE command restores the maximum rate of
1000BASE-X interfaces to 1 Gbit/s.
By default, no license is loaded to a device, and 1000BASE-X interfaces support the
maximum rate of 1 Gbit/s.

NOTE

This command is available only on the following switch models:

S5736-S48S4X-A, S5736-S48S4X-D

Format
assign port-type XGE [ slot slot-id | all ]
undo assign port-type XGE [ slot slot-id | all ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

slot slot-id Specifies a slot ID. The value must be the ID of an existing slot on
the device.

all Indicates all slots. -

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
By default, 1000BASE-X interfaces on a switch work at a maximum rate of 1
Gbit/s. To enable these interfaces to work at a maximum rate of 10 Gbit/s, apply
for and purchase a license from the equipment supplier, activate the license, and
then run the assign port-type XGE command to set the maximum rate of
1000BASE-X interfaces to 10 Gbit/s. To restore the maximum rate of 1000BASE-X
interfaces to 1 Gbit/s, run the undo assign port-type XGE command. This
command configuration takes effect only after the device is restarted.
Precautions
● The corresponding license is required before this command is run.
● To check the current rate of an interface and the rate that takes effect after a
device restart, run the display device port-type configuration command.
● After the command is executed, restart the device immediately for the
configuration to take effect.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1540

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

● After the device restarts, the original interface configuration may be lost.
Therefore, back up the configuration before the restart. After the restart,
check the configuration and modify it if necessary.
● After this command is executed, the maximum rate of SFP interfaces is the
configured rate if you restore the factory settings with one click.
● After the license expires, the maximum rate of SFP interfaces is the default
rate if you restore the factory settings with one click after a device restart.

Example
# Set the maximum rate of 1000BASE-X interfaces to 10 Gbit/s.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] assign port-type XGE all
Warning: The configuration of GE interfaces may be lost after the device restart. Therefore, back up their
configuration before the
restart, and check the configuration after the restart is complete. Continue? [Y/
N]:y
Warning: Running this command will change ports' capability of supporting dedicated stack cables.
Continue? [Y/N]:y
Info: The current configuration has been modified and takes effect after the device is restarted.

4.2.5 assign port-type 25GE

Function
The assign port-type 25GE command sets the maximum rate of 10GE SFP+
Ethernet optical ports to 25 Gbit/s.

The undo assign port-type 25GE command restores the maximum rate of 10GE
SFP+ Ethernet optical ports to 10 Gbit/s.

By default, no license is loaded to a device, and 10GE SFP+ Ethernet optical ports
work at a maximum rate of 10 Gbit/s.

NOTE

This command is supported only on the S6730-H24X4Y4C.

Format
assign port-type 25GE [ slot slot-id | all ]

undo assign port-type 25GE [ slot slot-id | all ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

slot slot-id Specifies a slot ID. The value must be set according to the device
configuration.

all Indicates all slots. -

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1541

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
By default, 10GE SFP+ Ethernet optical ports on a device work at a maximum rate
of 10 Gbit/s. To enable these ports to work at a maximum rate of 25 Gbit/s, apply
for and purchase a license from the equipment supplier, activate the license, and
then run the assign port-type 25GE command to set the maximum rate of the
ports to 25 Gbit/s. To restore the maximum rate of the ports to 10 Gbit/s, run the
undo assign port-type 25GE command. This command configuration takes effect
only after the device is restarted.
Precautions
● The corresponding license is required before this command is run.
● To check the current rate of an interface and the rate that takes effect after a
device restart, run the display device port-type configuration command.
● After the command is executed, restart the device immediately for the
configuration to take effect.
● After the device restarts, the original interface configuration may be lost.
Therefore, back up the configuration before the restart. After the restart,
check the configuration and modify it if necessary.
● After this command is executed, the maximum rate of 10GE SFP+ Ethernet
optical ports is the configured rate if you restore the factory settings with one
click.
● After the license expires, the maximum rate of 10GE SFP+ Ethernet optical
ports is the default rate if you restore the factory settings with one click after
a device restart.

Example
# Increase the maximum rate of all 10GE SFP+ Ethernet optical ports to 25 Gbit/s.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] assign port-type 25GE all
Warning: The configuration of XGE interfaces may be lost after the device restart. Therefore, back up their
configuration before the
restart, and check the configuration after the restart is complete. Continue? [Y/N]:y
Info: The current configuration has been modified and takes effect after the device is restarted.

4.2.6 assign group-speed

Function
The assign group-speed command sets the maximum rate of interfaces in a
MultiGE interface group.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1542

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

The undo assign group-speed command restores the default maximum rate of
interfaces in a MultiGE interface group.
By default, you can run the display device group-speed configuration command
to check the maximum rate of a MultiGE interface based on the BaseSpeed field
in the command output.

NOTE

This command is supported only on the following switch models:

S5732-H24UM2CC, S5732-H48UM2CC, S5736-S24UM4XC

Format
assign group-speed [ slot slot-id ] group group-number speed
undo assign group-speed [ slot slot-id ] group group-number

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

slot slot-id Specifies a slot ID. The value must be set according to the
device configuration.
In a stack, if no slot ID
is specified, the
maximum rate of
interfaces in the
MultiGE interface group
on the master switch is
configured.

group group- Specifies the number of The value is an integer and must be set
number a MultiGE interface according to the device configuration.
group.
Every 12 MultiGE interfaces form a
MultiGE interface group. The number
of MultiGE interface groups determines
the value range. For example, if a
device has 24 MultiGE interfaces, the
value is 0 or 1.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1543

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Parameter Description Value

speed Specifies the maximum The value is of the enumerated type:

rate of a MultiGE
interface. ● 1000
● 2500
● 5000
● 10000
The unit is Mbit/s.
NOTE
● The value range of this parameter
depends on the loaded license control
item.
● The specified MultiGE interface rate
cannot be lower than the default
MultiGE interface rate.

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
On the S5732-H24UM2CC, S5732-H48UM2CC, S5736-S24UM4XC, every 12
MultiGE interfaces form a MultiGE interface group. To set the maximum rate of
interfaces in a specified MultiGE interface group, run the assign group-speed
command. The maximum rates of interfaces in the same MultiGE interface group
are the same, and the maximum rates of interfaces in different MultiGE interface
groups can be different.
Precautions
● This command takes effect only on the device to which license control items
are loaded. For details about how to use license control items, see Other: How
Can I Increase the Rate of Ports Through the RTU License? in the S1720,
S5700, and S6700 Series Switches License Usage Guide.
● After you run the assign group-speed command to set the maximum rate of
interfaces in a MultiGE interface group, restart the switch to make the
configuration take effect. If you have run the assign group-speed command
multiple times to set the maximum rate of interfaces in multiple MultiGE
interface groups, restart the switch to make these configurations take effect
simultaneously.
● After the assign group-speed command is run, the maximum rate of
interfaces in a MultiGE interface group is restored to the default value if
factory settings are restored with one click.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1544

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

● After the license for a MultiGE interface group expires, if the device is
restarted or factory settings are restored with one click, the maximum rate of
interfaces in the MultiGE interface group is restored to the default value.

Example
# Set the maximum rate of interfaces in MultiGE interface group 0 to 10000
Mbit/s.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] assign group-speed group 0 10000

4.2.7 auto duplex

Function
The auto duplex command configures the duplex mode on an Ethernet electrical
interface in auto-negotiation mode.

The undo auto duplex command restores the default duplex mode on an
Ethernet electrical interface in auto-negotiation mode.

By default, the duplex mode on an Ethernet electrical interface is negotiated with

the peer interface.

NOTE

Physical interfaces of the S5732-H24S6Q, S5732-H48S6Q, S6735-S, S6720-EI, S6720S-EI,

S6730-H, S6730S-H, S6730-S, and S6730S-S, and MultiGE interface of the S5732-
H24UM2CC, S5732-H48UM2CC, S5732-H48XUM2CC do not support the half duplex mode
and this command is not supported.

Format
auto duplex { half | full }*

undo auto duplex

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

half Sets the duplex mode on -

an Ethernet electrical
interface in auto-
negotiation mode to
half-duplex.

full Sets the duplex mode on -

an Ethernet electrical
interface in auto-
negotiation mode to full-
duplex.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1545

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Views
Ethernet interface view, MultiGE interface view, GE interface view, port group view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

In auto-negotiation mode, interfaces on both ends of a link negotiate their duplex

mode. If the negotiated duplex mode is not the required one, you can run the
auto duplex command to set the required duplex mode in auto-negotiation
mode.

● If service traffic volume of enterprise users is high, interfaces at both ends of

a link must work in full-duplex mode. Otherwise, packet loss occurs. You can
run the auto duplex full command to set the duplex mode to full-duplex.
After the auto-negotiation succeeds, the interfaces work in full-duplex mode.
● If service traffic volume of enterprise users is low, interfaces at both ends of a
link can meet data transmission requirements when they work in half-duplex
mode. You can run the auto duplex half command to set the duplex mode to
half-duplex. After the auto-negotiation succeeds, the interfaces work in half-
duplex mode.

Prerequisites

Run the negotiation auto command to configure Ethernet interface to work in

auto-negotiation mode.

Precautions

● In auto-negotiation mode, an FE electrical interface negotiates the duplex

mode with the peer device on the link.
● In auto-negotiation mode, a GE electrical interface that works at a rate of
1000 Mbit/s only supports the full-duplex mode. If the duplex mode is
changed to half-duplex, the GE electrical interface works at a maximum rate
of 100 Mbit/s.
● The GE optical interfaces support the duplex mode configuration when they
are equipped with GE copper modules.
● The interfaces on both ends of a link must have the same duplex mode.

Example
# Configure Ethernet electrical interface GE0/0/1 in auto-negotiation mode to
work in half-duplex mode.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] negotiation auto
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] auto duplex half

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1546

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

4.2.8 auto speed

Function
The auto speed command configures the auto-negotiation rate of an Ethernet
electrical interface.
The undo auto speed command restores the default auto-negotiation rate of an
Ethernet electrical interface.
By default, Ethernet electrical interfaces on both ends can negotiate to any rate
they support.

Format
auto speed { 10 | 100 | 1000 | 2500 | 5000 | 10000 } *

undo auto speed

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

10 Sets the auto- -

negotiation rate of an
Ethernet electrical
interface to 10 Mbit/s.

100 Sets the auto- -

negotiation rate of an
Ethernet electrical
interface to 100 Mbit/s.

1000 Sets the auto- -

negotiation rate of an
Ethernet electrical
interface to 1000 Mbit/s.
NOTE
FE electrical interfaces do
not support this
parameter.

2500 Sets the auto- -

negotiation rate of an
Ethernet electrical
interface to 2500 Mbit/s.
NOTE
Only MultiGE interfaces
support this parameter.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1547

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Parameter Description Value

5000 Sets the auto- -

negotiation rate of an
Ethernet electrical
interface to 5000 Mbit/s.
NOTE
Only MultiGE interfaces
support this parameter.

10000 Sets the auto- -

negotiation rate of an
Ethernet electrical
interface to 10000
Mbit/s.
NOTE
Only MultiGE interfaces
support this parameter.

Views
Ethernet interface view, GE interface view, MultiGE interface view, port group view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

In auto-negotiation mode, interfaces on both ends of a link negotiate their rate. If

the negotiated rate is not the required one, run the auto speed command to set
the auto-negotiation rate range to limit the negotiated rate.

For example, the network adapter speeds on Server1, Server2, and Server3 that
form a server cluster are all 1000 Mbit/s, and the speed of the outbound interface
GE0/0/4 connecting the device to external networks is also 1000 Mbit/s. The
servers connect to GE0/0/1, GE0/0/2, and GE0/0/3 respectively. If the auto-
negotiation speed is not specified on the device, the speeds negotiated by
GE0/0/1, GE0/0/2, and GE0/0/3 with their connected servers are all 1000 Mbit/s.
When the servers send data at the speed of 1000 Mbit/s concurrently, the
outbound interface GE0/0/4 will be blocked. In this case, you can run the auto
speed 100 100 command to configure the auto-negotiation speed to 100 Mbit/s
for GE0/0/1, GE0/0/2, and GE0/0/3, preventing the outbound interface from being
blocked.

Prerequisites

Run the negotiation auto command to configure the Ethernet interface to work
in auto-negotiation mode.

Precautions

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1548

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

The rate of MultiGE interfaces on the S5732-H24UM2CC, S5732-H48UM2CC, and

S5736-S24UM4XC can be increased using the RTU license. After the license is
activated, you can run the assign group-speed command and restart the device
to make the configured maximum rate supported by the interfaces in the MultiGE
interface group take effect.
To check the default rate of MultiGE interfaces, run the display device group-
speed configuration command. The BaseSpeed field indicates the default rate.

Example
# Configure Ethernet electrical interface GE0/0/1 to work at a rate of 100 Mbit/s
in auto-negotiation mode.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] negotiation auto
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] auto speed 100

4.2.9 cable-snr-test
Function
The cable-snr-test command checks the network cable quality and displays the
check result.

NOTE

This command is supported only on the S1730S-H XGE electrical interfaces on the
ES5D21X08T00 card of the S5731-H, and S5731S-H, GE electrical interfaces on the S5731-
H, S2730S-S, S5735-L-I, S5735-L1,S300, S5735-L, S5735S-L1, S5735S-L, S5735S-L-M, S5735-
S (except the S5735-S48S4X), S500, S5735S-S, S5735-S-I, S5720I-SI, and and MultiGE
electrical interfaces on the S5720-28X-PWH-LI-AC, S5720-28X-PWH-LI-ACF, S5732-
H24UM2CC, S5732-H48UM2CC, S5732-H48XUM2CC, S5736-S24UM4XC.

Format
cable-snr-test

Parameters
None

Views
MultiGE interface view, XGE interface view, GE interface view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
You can check the quality of the network cable on an electrical interface to
determine whether the network cable quality meets communication requirements.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1549

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Precautions
● This command checks real-time quality of the network cable on an interface,
and the network cable quality changes with the external environment.
● A MultiGE electrical interface supports accurate network cable quality check
only when it works at the rate of 2.5 Gbit/s or higher.
● An XGE electrical interface supports accurate network cable quality check only
when it works at the rate of 10 Gbit/s.
● A GE electrical interface supports accurate network cable quality check only
when it works at the rate of 1 Gbit/s.
● An interface does not support the network cable quality check when it is
Down or in loopback detection mode.
● After the interface goes Up, wait for several minutes before running this
command. Otherwise, the command fails to be delivered.

Example
# Check the network cable quality on GigabitEthernet0/0/1.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] cable-snr-test
Info: The current network cable is of good quality.

4.2.10 carrier
Function
The carrier command configures the delay in reporting an interface status change
event.
The undo carrier command restores the default delay in reporting an interface
status change event.
By default, the delay in reporting an interface Up event is 2000 milliseconds, and
the delay in reporting an interface Down event is 0 milliseconds.

Format
carrier { up-hold-time | down-hold-time } interval
undo carrier { up-hold-time | down-hold-time }

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1550

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Parameters
Paramet Descripti Value
er on

up-hold- Specifies The value is 0 or an integer that ranges from 50 to

time the delay 120000, in milliseconds.
interval in
reporting
an
interface
Up event.

down- Specifies The value is 0 or an integer that ranges from 1000 to

hold- the delay 120000, in milliseconds.
time in
interval reporting
an
interface
Down
event.

Views
Ethernet interface view, GE interface view, XGE interface view, MultiGE interface
view, 25GE interface view, 40GE interface view, 100GE interface view, port group
view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

The physical status of an Ethernet interface can be Up or Down. When the

physical status changes, the system notifies upper-layer protocol modules (such as
the routing and forwarding modules) of the change to direct packet receiving and
forwarding. The system also automatically generates traps and logs to remind
users to perform corresponding operations on physical links. For example, when
the physical status of the active interface in an interface protection group changes
from Up to Down, the system immediately instructs the upper-layer service
forwarding protocol to send service packets from the standby interface.

If frequent physical status changes are reported to the system, extra system costs
are generated. You can configure the delay in reporting physical status changes to
solve the problem. The system is unaware of the physical status changes on
interfaces within the configured delay. If the interface physical status is not
recovered after the delay expires, the physical status changes are reported to the
system.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1551

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

You can configure the delay in reporting physical status changes based on the
network connection status.
● Setting a long delay
For example, an interface frequently alternates between Up and Down states
at an interval shorter than the IP route convergence time. In this case, the
upper-layer protocol does not need to sense the physical status changes. You
can set a long delay in reporting physical status changes to avoid unnecessary
routing entry refreshing caused by frequent physical status changes.
● Setting a short delay
For example, when the physical status of the active interface in an interface
protection group changes from Up to Down, the system needs to immediately
instruct the upper-layer service forwarding protocol to send service packets
from the standby interface. In this case, you can set a short delay in reporting
physical status changes to ensure real-time service switchover.
Precautions
If you run the carrier command multiple times in the same interface view, only
the latest configuration takes effect.

Example
# Set the delay in reporting an interface Up event to 1000 milliseconds on
GE0/0/1.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] carrier up-hold-time 1000

4.2.11 clear configuration port-isolate

Function
The clear configuration port-isolate command clears all the interface isolation
configurations on the device.
By default, interface isolation configurations on the device are not cleared.

Format
clear configuration port-isolate

Parameters
None

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1552

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Usage Guidelines
To clear all the interface isolation configurations on the device, you need to delete
the configurations one by one. If a large number of configurations exist on the
device, deleting the configurations takes much time and increases the
maintenance workload. To reduce the maintenance workload and operation
complexity, run the clear configuration port-isolate command in the system view
to clear all the interface isolation configurations on the device. The configurations
involve the port isolation group, unidirectional port isolation, and isolation mode.

Example
# Clear all the interface isolation configurations on the device.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] clear configuration port-isolate
Warning: The port isolate will be cancelled. Continue?[Y/N]:y
Info: This operation may take a few seconds. Please wait for a moment...done.

4.2.12 combo-port
Function
The combo-port command configures the working mode of a combo interface.
The undo combo-port command restores the default setting.
By default, a combo interface works in auto mode. That is, the combo interface
automatically switches between the electrical mode and optical mode.

NOTE

Only combo interfaces support this command. For details about the combo interface
supported by the switch, see the Hardware Description or click Info-Finder.

Format
combo-port { auto | copper | fiber }
undo combo-port

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1553

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

auto Allows a combo interface -

to automatically select
the working mode. The
combo interface checks
whether an optical
module has been
installed:
● When a cable is not
connected and an
optical module is
installed, the combo
interface works in
optical mode.
● When a cable is
connected, the
interface is in Up
state, and an optical
module is installed,
the combo interface
works in electrical
mode. After the
device restarts, the
combo interface
works in optical
mode.
● When a cable is
connected, the
interface is in Down
state, and an optical
module is installed,
the combo interface
works in optical
mode.
In summary, when an
optical module is
installed on the combo
optical interface, the
combo interface works in
optical mode after the
device restarts.

copper Configures a combo -

interface to work in
electrical mode so that
data is transmitted
through network cables.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1554

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Parameter Description Value

fiber Configures a combo -

interface to work in
optical mode so that
data is transmitted
through optical fibers.

Views
GE interface view, port group view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

A combo interface consists of a GE electrical interface and a GE optical interface

on the panel. The multiplexed electrical and optical interfaces share one internal
forwarding interface and cannot work at the same time. When one interface
works, the other interface is disabled. You can use the electrical or optical
interface based on the remote interface type. The electrical and optical interfaces
share one interface view. When you enable the electrical or optical interface,
configure the interface attributes (such as the rate and duplex mode) in the same
interface view.

Precautions

This command takes effect only on combo interfaces.

If a combo interface is configured to work in a different mode from the remote

interface, the two interfaces cannot communicate.

The electrical interface is used with the optical interface as a combo interface.
Combo optical interface does not support GE copper module.

Example
# Configure GE0/0/1 to work in electrical mode.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] combo-port copper

4.2.13 display counters protocol

Function
The display counters protocol command displays IPv4 and IPv6 packet statistics
on an interface.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1555

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

NOTE

Only the S5731-H, S5731-S, S5731S-H, S5731S-S, S5732-H, S6735-S, S6720-EI, S6720S-EI,
S6730-H, S6730S-H, S6730-S, and S6730S-S support this command.

Format
display counters [ interface interface-type interface-number ] protocol [ rate ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

interface interface-type Specifies the interface -

interface-number type and number.

protocol Displays IPv4 and IPv6 -

packet statistics.

rate Displays packet rate -

information.

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
After enabling IPv4 or IPv6 packet statistics collection on an interface, you can run
this command to view packet statistics, facilitating fault location and
troubleshooting.

Example
# Display IPv4 and IPv6 packet statistics on interfaces.
<HUAWEI> display counters protocol
-: Statistic not enable
Inbound
Interface IPv4(bytes) IPv4(pkts) IPv6(bytes) IPv6(pkts)
GE0/0/20 0 0 0 0
GE0/0/21 - - 0 0
Outbound
Interface IPv4(bytes) IPv4(pkts) IPv6(bytes) IPv6(pkts)
GE0/0/20 0 0 0 0
GE0/0/21 - - 0 0

# Display IPv4 and IPv6 packet rate information on interfaces.

<HUAWEI> display counters protocol rate
-: Statistic not enable
Inbound

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1556

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Interface IPv4(bytes/s) IPv4(pkts/s) IPv6(bytes/s) IPv6(pkts/s)

GE0/0/20 0 0 0 0
GE0/0/21 - - 0 0
Outbound
Interface IPv4(bytes/s) IPv4(pkts/s) IPv6(bytes/s) IPv6(pkts/s)
GE0/0/20 0 0 0 0
GE0/0/21 - - 0 0

Table 4-15 Description of the display counters protocol command output

Item Description

-: Statistic not enable If a field of an interface displays -,

traffic statistics collection about the
corresponding type of packets is
disabled.

Inbound Packet statistics in the inbound

direction of an interface.

Outbound Packet statistics in the outbound

direction of an interface.

Interface Interface name.

IPv4(bytes) Number of bytes in IPv4 packets.

IPv4(pkts) Number of IPv4 packets.

IPv6(bytes) Number of bytes in IPv6 packets.

IPv6(pkts) Number of IPv6 packets.

IPv4(bytes/s) Rate of bytes in IPv4 packets.

IPv4(pkts/s) Rate of IPv4 packets.

IPv6(bytes/s) Rate of bytes in IPv6 packets.

IPv6(pkts/s) Rate of IPv6 packets.

4.2.14 display card port-config-mode configuration

Function
The display card port-config-mode configuration command displays
information about the card interface working mode.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1557

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

NOTE

The following switch models support this command and the command takes effect only on
the S7X08000 card:
● S5731-H24T4XC, S5731-H24P4XC, S5731-H48T4XC, S5731-H48P4XC, S5731-H24HB4XZ,
S5731-H48HB4XZ
● S5731S-H24T4XC-A, S5731S-H48T4XC-A, S5731S-H24HB4XZ-A, S5731S-H48HB4XZ-A
● S5736-S
● S5732-H24UM2CC, S5732-H48UM2CC, S5732-H48XUM2CC

Format
display card port-config-mode configuration

Parameters
None

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
To check the card interface working mode or check whether the card interface
working mode configured using the set card port-config-mode 25g-port enable
command takes effect, run the display card port-config-mode configuration
command.

Example
# Display information about the card interface working mode.
<HUAWEI> display card port-config-mode configuration
-----------------------------------
SlotId Current Next
-----------------------------------
1 8*10G 8*10G
-----------------------------------

Table 4-16 Description of the display card port-config-mode configuration

command output

Item Description

SlotId Slot ID.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1558

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Item Description

Current Current interface working mode.

NOTE
(*) indicates that the S7X08000 card is not properly installed or does not
support the change of the port working mode.

Next Interface working mode used at the next startup.

NOTE
(*) indicates that the S7X08000 card is not properly installed or does not
support the change of the port working mode.

4.2.15 display device group-speed configuration

Function
The display device group-speed configuration command displays information
about the rate of interfaces in MultiGE interface groups.

NOTE

This command is supported only on the following switch models:

S5732-H24UM2CC, S5732-H48UM2CC, S5732-H48XUM2CC, S5736-S24UM4XC

Format
display device group-speed configuration

Parameters
None

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
You can run this command to check the following information:
● Default maximum rates of interfaces in MultiGE interface groups
● Maximum rates of interfaces in MultiGE interface groups, which are
configured using the assign group-speed command
● Maximum rates of interfaces in MultiGE interface groups during the current
device startup
● Maximum rates of interfaces in MultiGE interface groups for the next device
startup

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1559

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Example
# Display the rates of interfaces in MultiGE interface groups.
<HUAWEI> display device group-speed configuration
Group speed configuration information:
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Slot Group Interfaces BaseSpeed ConfigSpeed CurrentSpeed
NextSpeed
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 0 MultiGE2/0/1 ~ 2/0/12 1G 10G 10G 10G
1 MultiGE2/0/13 ~ 2/0/24 1G - 1G 1G
License used information:
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Slot LicenseItem ResourceCount ResourceUsed
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 1G->2.5G 0 0
1G->5G 0 0
1G->10G 1 1
2.5G->5G 0 0
2.5G->10G 0 0
5G->10G 0 0

Table 4-17 Description of the display device group-speed configuration

command output
Item Description

Group Rate configuration of a MultiGE interface group.

speed
configura
tion
informati
on

Slot Slot ID.

Group Number of a MultiGE interface group.

Interface Interface number.

s

BaseSpee Default maximum rates of interfaces in MultiGE interface groups

d The unit is bit/s.

ConfigSp Maximum rates of interfaces in MultiGE interface groups, which are

eed configured using the assign group-speed command The unit is
bit/s.
NOTE
If this field displays -, ConfigSpeed is the same as BaseSpeed.

CurrentS Maximum rates of interfaces in MultiGE interface groups during the

peed current device startup The unit is bit/s.

NextSpee Maximum rates of interfaces in MultiGE interface groups for the

d next device startup The unit is bit/s.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1560

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Item Description

License Usage information of a license control item.

used
informati
on

LicenseIt Name of a license control item.

em

Resource Number of resources.

Count

Resource Number of used resources.

Used

4.2.16 display device port-config-mode status

Function
The display device port-config-mode status command displays information
about the card interface working mode.

Format
display device port-config-mode status [ slot slot-id ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

slot slot-id Specifies the slot ID. The value depends on

the device configuration.

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
For the S5732-H24UM2CC (part number: 02353HUC/
02353HUC-003/02353HUC-004/02353SJY/
02353SJY-001/02353SJY-004/02353SJY-010/02353SJY-011/02353SJY-014/02353SJY-
015/02353SJY-016/02353SJY-019/02353SJY-002/02353SJY-003/02353SJY-012/0235
3SJY-013/02353SJY-017/02353SJY-018), S5732-H48UM2CC (part number:

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1561

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

02353HUB/02353HUB-002/02353HUB-003/02353SJT/
02353SJT-001/02353SJT-003/02353SJT-004/02353SJT-010/02353SJT-011/02353SJT-
013/02353SJT-014/02353SJT-015/02353SJT-016/02353SJT-018/02353SJT-002) and
S5732-H48XUM2CC, you can run the display device port-config-mode status
command to check the interface working mode and interface split information.

Example
# Display the interface working mode and interface split information on the
S5732-H24UM2CC.
<HUAWEI&gt; display device port-config-mode status
Slot ID Port-config-mode Split-port Status
----------------------------------------------------------------------
0 4*25GE+4*10GE+40GE XGigabitEthernet0/0/1
enable
XGigabitEthernet0/0/2
XGigabitEthernet0/0/3
XGigabitEthernet0/0/4
----------------------------------------------------------------------

Table 4-18 Description of the display device port-config-mode status command

output

Item Description

Slot ID Slot ID.

Port- The interface working mode is 4x25GE+4x10GE+40GE mode.

config-
mode

Split-port If an interface is not split, this field displays -. If an interface is split,

this field displays the converted interfaces.

Status Current status of interface split:

● enable: Interface split is enabled.
● disable: Interface split is disabled.

4.2.17 display device port-type configuration

Function
The display device port-type configuration command displays the maximum
rate of interfaces on the device.

NOTE

This command is supported only on the following switch models:

S5732-H24S6Q, S5732-H48S6Q, S6730S-H24X6C-A, S6730-H24X6C, S6730-H48X6C, S6730-
H24X4Y4C, S5736-S48S4X-A, S5736-S48S4X-D

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1562

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Format
display device port-type configuration

Parameters
None

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

After the maximum rate of QSFP28 interfaces on the S5732-H24S6Q, S5732-

H48S6Q, S6730S-H24X6C-A, S6730-H24X6C, S6730-H48X6C is changed using the
assign port-type 100GE command, you can run the display device port-type
configuration command to check the maximum rate of these interfaces.

On the S6730-H24X4Y4C, after the maximum rate of a 10GE SFP+ Ethernet optical
interface is set to 25 Gbit/s using the assign port-type 25GE command, you can
run the display device port-type configuration command to check the maximum
rate configuration.

On the S5736-S48S4X-A, S5736-S48S4X-D, after the maximum rate of a

1000BASE-X interface is set to 10 Gbit/s using the assign port-type XGE
command, you can run the display device port-type configuration command to
check the maximum rate configuration.

Precautions

To change the rate of QSFP28 interfaces on the S5732-H24S6Q, S5732-H48S6Q,

S6730-H24X6C (part number: 02352FSG) and S6730-H48X6C (part number:
02352FSF), S6730-H24X4Y4C, S5736-S48S4X-A, and S5736-S48S4X-D this
command can be executed only after the license file is activated.

For the S6730-H24X6C (part number: 02353GFC), S6730S-H, and S6730-H48X6C

(part number: 02353FWL), the license has been loaded to the device by default.

Example
# Display the maximum rate of 40GE interfaces on a switch.
<HUAWEI> display device port-type configuration
-----------------------------------
SlotId Current Next
-----------------------------------
0 40GE 100GE
1 40GE 100GE
-----------------------------------

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1563

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Table 4-19 Description of the display device port-type configuration command

output

Item Description

Slot Slot ID.

Current Current maximum rate of 40GE

interfaces.

Next Configured maximum rate supported

by the device.
NOTE
If a switch does not restart after the
maximum rate of 40GE interfaces is
changed, the Next field value will be
inconsistent with the Current field value.

4.2.18 display error-down recovery

Function
The display error-down recovery command displays information about the port
in Error-Down state, including the interface name, cause of the Error-Down event,
delay for the interface to change from Down to Up, and remaining time for the
Up event.

NOTE

An interface enters the error-down state after being shut down due to an error. Currently,
errors include the auto-defend protection, threshold crossing event, remote failure event,
MAC address flapping, link flapping, low optical power, error packets exceeding the alarm
threshold, and BPDU protection.

Format
display error-down recovery [ interface interface-type interface-number ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

interface-type interface- Displays the specified -

number port in Error-Down state.
● interface-type
specifies the interface
type.
● interface-number
specifies the interface
number.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1564

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
The auto recovery function is configured and the delay for the an interface to
change from Down to Up is set using the error-down auto-recovery command. If
the interface is in the Error-Down state, you can run the display error-down
recovery command to view the remaining time for the Up event.
Prerequisites
The auto recovery function has been configured on an interface using the error-
down auto-recovery command.
Precautions
If interface is not specified in this command, the system displays information
about all interfaces in error-down state.

Example
# Display the delay for the interface to change from Down to Up and the
remaining time for the Up event.
<HUAWEI> display error-down recovery
interface error-down cause recovery remainder
time(sec) time(sec)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
GigabitEthernet0/0/1 bpdu-protection 30 10

Table 4-20 Description of the display error-down recovery command output

Item Description

interface Interface name.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1565

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Item Description

error-down Cause of the Error-Down event, including:

cause ● as-not-ready: An AS is not in service.
● auto-defend
● efm-threshold-event
● efm-remote-failure
● bpdu-protection
● data-integrity-error
● error-statistics
● storm-control
● port-security
● mac-address-flapping
● transceiver-power-low
● link-flap

recovery Delay for the interface to change from Down to Up, in

time(sec) seconds. If no automatic recovery time is configured, you
need to run the shutdown and undo shutdown commands
in the interface view. Alternatively, run the restart command
in the interface view to make the interface go Up and the
recovery time is displayed as --.

remainder Remaining time for the Up event, in seconds. If no automatic

time(sec) recovery time is configured, you need to run the shutdown
and undo shutdown commands in the interface view.
Alternatively, run the restart command in the interface view
to make the interface go Up and the remaining time is
displayed as --.

4.2.19 display interface ethernet brief

Function
The display interface ethernet brief command displays brief information about
Ethernet interfaces.

Format
display interface ethernet brief [ main ]

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1566

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

main Displays brief -

information about
Ethernet main interfaces.

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
You can use the display interface ethernet brief command to view brief
information about Ethernet interfaces, including the physical status, auto-
negotiation mode, duplex mode, rate, and average inbound and outbound
bandwidth usages within the last period of time. This information helps you locate
and rectify faults.
Precautions
To clear statistics on an interface, run the reset counters interface command.

Example
# Display brief information about Ethernet interfaces.
<HUAWEI> display interface ethernet brief
PHY: Physical
*down: administratively down
#down: LBDT down
(l): loopback
(b): BFD down
InUti/OutUti: input utility/output utility
Interface PHY Auto-Neg Duplex Bandwidth InUti OutUti Trunk
GigabitEthernet0/0/1 up enable half 100M 0.06% 100% --
GigabitEthernet0/0/2 up enable full 1000M 100% 100% --
GigabitEthernet0/0/3 up enable full 1000M 0% 100% --
GigabitEthernet0/0/4 up enable full 1000M 100% 100% 1
GigabitEthernet0/0/5 up enable full 1000M 99% 100% --
GigabitEthernet0/0/6 down enable half 1000M 0% 0% --
GigabitEthernet0/0/7 down enable half 1000M 0% 0% --
GigabitEthernet0/0/8 down enable full 1000M 0% 0% --
GigabitEthernet0/0/9 down enable full 1000M 0% 0% --
GigabitEthernet0/0/10 down enable full 1000M 0% 0% --
GigabitEthernet0/0/11 down enable full 1000M 0% 0% --
GigabitEthernet0/0/12 down enable full 1000M 0% 0% --
GigabitEthernet0/0/13 down enable full 1000M 0% 0% --
GigabitEthernet0/0/14 down enable full 1000M 0% 0% --
GigabitEthernet0/0/15 down enable full 1000M 0% 0% --
GigabitEthernet0/0/16 down enable full 1000M 0% 0% --
GigabitEthernet0/0/17 down enable full 1000M 0% 0% --

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1567

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

GigabitEthernet0/0/18 down enable full 1000M 0% 0% --

GigabitEthernet0/0/19 down enable full 1000M 0% 0% --
GigabitEthernet0/0/20 down enable full 1000M 0% 0% --
GigabitEthernet0/0/21 down enable full 1000M 0% 0% --
GigabitEthernet0/0/22 down enable full 1000M 0% 0% --
GigabitEthernet0/0/23 down enable full 1000M 0% 0% --
GigabitEthernet0/0/24 down enable full 1000M 0% 0% --
MEth0/0/1 down enable half 100M 0% 0% --

Table 4-21 Description of the display interface ethernet brief command output
Item Description

Interface Type and number of an interface. All interfaces are displayed in

alphabetical order. Information about the following interfaces can
be displayed:
● MEth0/0/1 interface
● FE interface
● GE interface
● XGE interface
● 25GE interface
● MultiGE interface
● 40GE interface
● 100GE interface

PHY Physical status of an interface:

● up: indicates that the interface works properly.
● down: indicates that the physical layer of the interface fails.
● *down: refers to administratively down, indicating that the
administrator has run the shutdown (interface view) command
on the interface.
● #down: LBDT down, indicating that loop detection is enabled on
the interface. The interface is shut down when the device detects
a loop on the downstream network or between interfaces.
● (l): refers to loopback, indicating that the loopback function is
enabled on the interface.
● (b): indicates that the physical layer of the interface is in BFD
down state.

Auto- Whether auto-negotiation is enabled on an interface:

Neg ● enable: indicates that auto-negotiation is enabled on the
interface.
● disable: indicates that auto-negotiation is disabled on the
interface.
To configure the auto-negotiation mode for an interface, run the
negotiation auto command.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1568

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Item Description

Duplex Duplex mode of an interface:

● full: indicates the full-duplex mode.
● half: indicates the half-duplex mode.
● In auto-negotiation mode, use the auto duplex command to
configure the duplex mode of an interface.
● In non-auto negotiation mode, use the duplex command to
configure the duplex mode of an interface.

Bandwidt Bandwidth on the interface.

h

InUti Average inbound bandwidth usage within the last 5 minutes.

Average inbound bandwidth usage = Average inbound rate within
the last 5 minutes/Interface bandwidth
When the average bandwidth usage is smaller than 0.01% and
greater than 0.005%, the value 0.01% is displayed. When the
average bandwidth usage is smaller than 0.005% and greater than
0, the value 0 is displayed. When the interface bandwidth becomes
smaller, for example, the bandwidth is changed using the speed
command, or when an Eth-Trunk member interface becomes Down
or is removed from the Eth-Trunk, the bandwidth usage be displayed
as 100% because the communication traffic is not adjusted in time.

OutUti Average outbound bandwidth usage within the last 5 minutes.

Average outbound bandwidth usage = Average outbound rate
within the last 5 minutes/Interface bandwidth
When the average bandwidth usage is smaller than 0.01% and
greater than 0.005%, the value 0.01% is displayed. When the
average bandwidth usage is smaller than 0.005% and greater than
0, the value 0 is displayed. When the interface bandwidth becomes
smaller, for example, the bandwidth is changed using the speed
command, or when an Eth-Trunk member interface becomes Down
or is removed from the Eth-Trunk, the bandwidth usage be displayed
as 100% because the communication traffic is not adjusted in time.

Trunk Number of the Eth-Trunk to which an interface is added.

4.2.20 display port-group

Function
The display port-group command displays information about permanent port
groups and interfaces in these groups.

Format
display port-group [ all | port-group-name ]

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1569

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

all Displays information -

about all permanent port
groups and interfaces in
these groups.

port-group-name Displays information The value is the name of

about a specified an existing port group.
permanent port group
and interfaces in the
group.

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
When using the display port-group command, note that:
● If no parameter is configured, names of all permanent port groups are
displayed.
● If all is configured, information about all permanent port groups and
interfaces in these groups is displayed.
● If port-group-name is configured, information about a specified permanent
port group and interfaces in the group is displayed.

Example
# Display information about all port groups and interfaces in these groups.
<HUAWEI> display port-group all
Portgroup: 1
GigabitEthernet0/0/1
GigabitEthernet0/0/2
GigabitEthernet0/0/3

Table 4-22 Description of the display port-group command output

Item Description

Portgroup Name of a permanent port group.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1570

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

4.2.21 display port-group member-configuration

Function
The display port-group member-configuration command displays the
configuration of each member interface in a specified interface group.

Format
display port-group port-group-name member-configuration

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

port-group- Specifies the name of an The value is the name of

name interface group to be queried. an existing port group.

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
To view the configuration of each member interface in a specified interface group,
run the display port-group member-configuration command.

Example
# Display the configuration of each member interface in an interface group
named group1.
<HUAWEI> display port-group group1 member-configuration
Portgroup: group1
#
interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1
description group1
shutdown
stp disable
#
interface GigabitEthernet0/0/2
description group1
shutdown
stp disable
#

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1571

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Table 4-23 Description of the display port-group member-configuration

command output

Item Description

Portgroup Name of a permanent port group.

4.2.22 display port-isolate group

Function
The display port-isolate group command displays the configuration of a port
isolation group.

Format
display port-isolate group { group-id | all }

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

group-id Displays the The value is an integer

configuration of a that ranges from 1 to 64.
specified port isolation
group.

all Displays the -

configurations of all port
isolation groups.

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
The port isolation feature isolates interfaces in a VLAN. Run port-isolate enable
[ group group-id ] command to add interfaces to a port isolation group, you can
implement Layer 2 isolation between these interfaces. To view the configuration
of the port isolation group, run the display port-isolate group command.

Example
# Display the configurations of all port isolation groups.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1572

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

<HUAWEI> display port-isolate group all

The ports in isolate group 3:
GigabitEthernet0/0/1
GigabitEthernet0/0/2
The ports in isolate group 4:
GigabitEthernet0/0/3
GigabitEthernet0/0/4

4.2.23 display port protect-group

Function
The display port protect-group command displays information about member
interfaces in an interface protection group.

Format
display port protect-group { all | protect-group-index }

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

all Displays information -

about all interface
protection groups and
their member interfaces.

protect-group-index Displays information The value is an integer

about member interfaces that ranges from 0 to 63.
in the specified interface
protection group.

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
Hosts are usually connected to an external network through a default gateway. If
the outbound interface of the default gateway fails, the hosts cannot
communicate with the external network, interrupting normal service transmission
and degrading device reliability. The port protection function solves this problem.
Without changing the networking, you can add two interfaces on the device to a
port protection group to implement interface backup in active/standby mode.
When the active interface fails, services are immediately switched to the standby
interface, ensuring non-stop service transmission.
The display port protect-group command displays information about member
interfaces in an interface protection group.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1573

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Example
# Display information about interface protection group 1 and its member
interfaces.
<HUAWEI> display port protect-group 1
Group ID : 1
-----------------------------------------------
Protect-group member Role State
-----------------------------------------------
GigabitEthernet0/0/1 Master Work
GigabitEthernet0/0/2 Standby Protect

Table 4-24 Description of the display port protect-group command output

Item Description

Group ID ID of the interface protection group.

Protect-group Member name of the interface protection group.

member

Role Interface role:

● Master: working interface
● Standby: protected interface

State Interface status:

● Work: working state
● Protect: protection state
● Down: the interface is physically down

4.2.24 display port split

Function
The display port split command displays the current status of a split or merged
interface.

NOTE

Only the S5735S-H, S5736-S, S5731-H24T4XC, S5731-H24P4XC, S5731-H48T4XC, S5731-

H48P4XC, S5731-H24HB4XZ, S5731-H48HB4XZ, S5731S-H, S6720S-EI, and S6720-EI support
interface split and merge.

Format
display port split [ slot slot-id ]

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1574

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

slot slot-id Specifies the slot ID. The value is an integer

and must be set
according to the device
configuration.

Views
User view, system view

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
After interfaces are split, you can run this command to view the current status of
the split and merged interface.

Example
# Display the current status of a split or merged interface.
<HUAWEI> display port split
*enable : Will be enabled after board reset
*disable : Will be disabled after board reset

Port Status Split Port

----------------------------------------------------
40GE0/0/1 enable XGigabitEthernet0/0/49
XGigabitEthernet0/0/50
XGigabitEthernet0/0/51
XGigabitEthernet0/0/52
40GE0/0/2 enable XGigabitEthernet0/0/53
XGigabitEthernet0/0/54
XGigabitEthernet0/0/55
XGigabitEthernet0/0/56
40GE0/1/1 disable -
40GE0/1/2 enable XGigabitEthernet0/1/5
XGigabitEthernet0/1/6
XGigabitEthernet0/1/7
XGigabitEthernet0/1/8
40GE0/1/3 disable -
40GE0/1/4 disable -

Table 4-25 Description of the display port split command output

Item Description

Port Port that can be split or merged.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1575

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Item Description

Status Current status of a split or merged

interface:
● enable: Interface split is enabled.
● disable: Interface split is disabled.
● *enable: Interface split is enabled
after the device is reset.
● *disable: Interface merge is enabled
after the device is reset.

Split Port Interfaces that have been split. If an

interface is not split, this field displays
as -. If an interface is split, converted
interfaces are displayed.

4.2.25 display virtual-cable-test

Function
The display virtual-cable-test command displays the last cable test result on an
Ethernet electrical interface.

NOTE

The service interfaces do not support this command on the following devices:
● MultiGE interface on the S5720-28X-PWH-LI-AC, S5732-H24UM2CC (part number:
02353HUC/02353HUC-003/02353HUC-004/02353SJY/
02353SJY-001/02353SJY-004/02353SJY-010/02353SJY-011/02353SJY-014/02353SJY-015
/
02353SJY-016/02353SJY-019/02353SJY-002/02353SJY-003/02353SJY-012/02353SJY-013
/02353SJY-017/02353SJY-018), S5732-H48UM2CC (part number: 02353HUB/
02353HUB-002/02353HUB-003/02353SJT/
02353SJT-001/02353SJT-003/02353SJT-004/02353SJT-010/02353SJT-011/02353SJT-013/
02353SJT-014/02353SJT-015/02353SJT-016/02353SJT-018/02353SJT-002), S5732-
H48XUM2CC, S5736-S24UM4XC
● XGE electrical interfaces on the ES5D21X08T00 card

Format
display virtual-cable-test interface-type interface-number

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1576

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

interface-type interface- Displays cable test -

number results on a specified
interface.
This parameter can be
configured after a GE
optical interface has a
GE copper module
installed.
This parameter can be
configured after an XGE
optical interface has a
GE copper module
installed.
After a 25GE optical
interface is configured to
work at the rate of 1
Gbit/s using the port
mode ge command and
has a GE copper module
installed, the virtual-
cable-test command can
be configured on the
interface.

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
A cable test detects faults on the cable connected to an interface. If the cable is
working properly, the test result displays the total length of the cable. If the cable
cannot work properly, the test result displays the distance between the interface
and the failure point.

NOTE

The test result is only for reference and may be inaccurate for cables of some vendors.

Example
# Display the cable test result on Ethernet electrical interface GE0/0/1.
<HUAWEI> display virtual-cable-test gigabitethernet 0/0/1
VCT test last ran on: 2013-7-12 21:25:13

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1577

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Pair A length: 189meter(s)

Pair B length: 189meter(s)
Pair C length: 189meter(s)
Pair D length: 189meter(s)
Pair A state: Ok
Pair B state: Ok
Pair C state: Ok
Pair D state: Ok
Info: The test result is only for reference.

Table 4-26 Description of the display virtual-cable-test command output

Item Description

VCT test last ran on Time when the last VCT test was
performed on an interface.
NOTE
● When the daylight saving time (DST) is
not used, the system displays the
following information: VCT test last ran
on: 2013-7-12 21:25:13.
● When the DST is used, the system
displays the following information: VCT
test last ran on: 2013-7-12 21:25:13 DST.

Pair A length Length of a network cable.

● The length is the distance between
the interface and the faulty point if a
fault occurs.
● The length is the actual length of the
cable when the cable works properly.
● The length is the default length 0 m
if the interface is not connected to
any network cable. The test result of
different chips may vary, and the
displayed result is for reference only.
NOTE
If the cable length is displayed as Unknown,
the cable status is OK, but the cable length
test result cannot be used.

Pair A state Status of a circuit pair of the cable:

● Ok: indicates that the circuit pair is
terminated normally.
● Open: indicates that the circuit pair is
not terminated.
● Short: indicates that the circuit pair is
short-circuited.
● Crosstalk: indicates that the circuit
pairs interfere with each other.
● Unknown: indicates that the circuit
pair has an unknown fault.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1578

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

NOTE

Pairs A, B, C, and D are the four pairs in a cable.

4.2.26 duplex
Function
The duplex command sets the duplex mode for an Ethernet electrical interface in
non-auto-negotiation mode.
The undo duplex command restores the default duplex mode for an Ethernet
electrical interface in non-auto-negotiation mode.
By default, the duplex mode of an Ethernet electrical interface is full duplex when
the interface works in non-auto-negotiation mode.

NOTE

Physical interfaces of the S5732-H24S6Q, S5732-H48S6Q, S6735-S, S6720-EI, S6720S-EI,

S6730-H, S6730S-H, S6730-S, and S6730S-S, and MultiGE interface of the S5732-
H24UM2CC, S5732-H48UM2CC, S5732-H48XUM2CC do not support the half duplex mode
and this command is not supported.

Format
duplex { full | half }
undo duplex

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

full Sets the duplex mode to -

full duplex for an
Ethernet electrical
interface in non-auto-
negotiation mode.

half Sets the duplex mode to -

half duplex for an
Ethernet electrical
interface in non-auto-
negotiation mode.

Views
Ethernet interface view, MultiGE interface view, GE interface view, port group view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1579

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

Interfaces can work in the following two duplex modes:

● Half-duplex mode: An interface in this mode only receives or sends data at a
time within a specified transmission distance.
● Full-duplex mode: An interface in this mode receives and sends data at the
same time. The maximum throughput in full-duplex mode is double that in
half-duplex mode, and the transmission distance is not limited.

If the peer device does not support auto-negotiation, you can run this command
to manually set the duplex mode for the local interface in non-auto-negotiation
mode to ensure that the interface works in the same duplex mode as the peer
interface.

Prerequisites

The Ethernet interface has been set to work in non-auto-negotiation mode by

running the undo negotiation auto command.

Precautions
● When the working rate of a GE electrical interface is 1000 Mbit/s, the
interface supports only the full duplex mode and does not need to negotiate
the duplex mode with the peer interface.
● When an interface works in half-duplex mode, flow control does not take
effect on the interface.
● Interfaces on both ends of a link must have the same duplex mode.

Example
# Set the duplex mode to half duplex for Ethernet electrical interface GE0/0/1 in
non-auto-negotiation mode.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] undo negotiation auto
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] speed 100
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] duplex half

4.2.27 error-down auto-recovery

Function
The error-down auto-recovery command enables an interface in Error-Down
state to go Up and sets the auto recovery delay.

The undo error-down auto-recovery command disables an interface in Error-

Down state from going Up automatically.

By default, an interface in Error-Down state is not enabled to go Up.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1580

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

NOTE

An interface enters the Error-Down state after being shut down due to an error. Currently,
errors include the auto-defend protection, threshold crossing event, remote failure event,
MAC address flapping, link flapping, low optical power, error packets exceeding the alarm
threshold, and BPDU protection.

Format
error-down auto-recovery cause { as-not-ready | auto-defend | bpdu-
protection | efm-remote-failure | efm-threshold-event | error-statistics | runts-
error-statistics | link-flap | mac-address-flapping | port-security | transceiver-
power-low | storm-control | data-integrity-error } interval interval-value

undo error-down auto-recovery cause { auto-defend | bpdu-protection | efm-

remote-failure | efm-threshold-event | error-statistics | runts-error-statistics |
link-flap | mac-address-flapping | port-security | transceiver-power-low |
storm-control | data-integrity-error }

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

cause Indicates the cause for -

an interface in Error-
Down state.

as-not-ready Indicates that the AS -

where the interface
resides is not in service.

auto-defend Indicates that the auto- -

defend function is
enabled.

bpdu-protection Indicates that STP BPDU -

protection is enabled.

efm-remote-failure Indicates that an EFM -

remote failure event
occurs.

efm-threshold-event Indicates that a -

threshold crossing event
occurs.

error-statistics Indicates that the -

number of error packets
exceeds the alarm
threshold.

link-flap Indicates that link -

flapping occurs.

storm-control Indicates that storm -

control is enabled.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1581

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Parameter Description Value

port-security Indicates that the -

number of learned
secure MAC addresses
exceeds the upper limit
or static MAC address
flapping is detected.

mac-address-flapping Indicates that MAC -

address flapping occurs.

transceiver-power-low Indicates that the optical -

power is too low.

data-integrity-error Indicates that the chip -

memory identifier has a
data integrity error.
NOTE
Only the S5732-H, S6730-
H, S6730S-H, S6730-S, and
S6730S-S support this
parameter.

interval interval-value Specifies the auto The value is an integer

recovery delay. that ranges from 30 to
86400, in seconds.
● A smaller value
indicates a higher
frequency at which an
interface alternates
between Up and
Down states.
● A larger value
indicates longer
traffic interruption.

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

An interface enters the Error-Down state in the following scenarios.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1582

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Cause for an Interface Scenario Remarks

in Error-Down State

as-not-ready When the device -

negotiates to the AS
mode, its port status
becomes Down and then
becomes Up after
services in the service
profiles have been
delivered.

auto-defend After the auto-defend -

action command is used
to configure actions
against attack sources,
the interface that
receives attack packets is
shut down to prevent the
device from attacks.

bpdu-protection On an STP-enabled For details, see stp

network where BPDU bpdu-protection.
protection is configured
on an edge port, if
malicious attackers send
bogus BPDUs to attack
the switching device, the
switching device sets the
edge port to Down
immediately after the
edge port receives
BPDUs. As a result, all
services on the edge port
are interrupted.

efm-remote-failure The efm trigger error- -

down command
associates an error event
with an interface. When
EFM detects critical-
event, dying-gasp, link-
fault, or timeout faults,
the protocol status of
the interface becomes
Down and all services on
the interface are
interrupted.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1583

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Cause for an Interface Scenario Remarks

in Error-Down State

efm-threshold-event When link monitoring is -

configured for an
interface on a link, the
link is considered
unavailable, if the
number of errored
frames, errored codes, or
errored frame seconds
detected by the interface
reaches or exceeds the
threshold within a
period. You can associate
an EFM crossing event
with an interface. Then
the system sets the
administrative status of
the interface to Down. In
this manner, all services
on the interface are
interrupted.

error-statistics When an Ethernet For details, see trap-

interface configured with threshold error-
a backup link receives statistics and error-
error packets, faults such statistics threshold-
as packet loss occur. To event trigger error-
ensure nonstop service down.
transmission, when the
number of received error
packets reaches the
alarm threshold, the
interface is shut down
and services are switched
to the backup link.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1584

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Cause for an Interface Scenario Remarks

in Error-Down State

runts-error-statistics An interface receives -

Runts error packets if the
optical fiber, network
cable, or optical module
is removed and
reinstalled, the
shutdown or undo
shutdown command is
executed, or Runts
packets are forwarded
on the network. To avoid
worse impact on the
device or services, the
device counts the
number of Runts error
packets received by an
interface within one
minute, and shuts down
the interface if the
number reaches the
alarm threshold 5.

link-flap Network cable faults or For details, see port

active/standby link-flap protection
switchovers may cause enable.
an interface to alternate
between Up and Down.
You can configure link
flapping protection.
When the device receives
an interface Up/Down
message, it checks the
interface flapping count
and link flapping
detection interval. If the
interface flapping count
reaches the limit within
the specified period, the
device shuts down
interface.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1585

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Cause for an Interface Scenario Remarks

in Error-Down State

storm-control After the storm control For details, see storm-

action is configured as control action.
error-down on an
interface, the interface is
shut down when the
average rate of receiving
broadcast, multicast, and
unknown unicast packets
is larger than the
specified limit within the
interval for detecting
storms.

port-security After port security is For details, see port-

enabled on an interface, security protect-action
MAC addresses learned and port-security
by the interface change enable.
to secure dynamic MAC
addresses. If the port-
security protect-action
command sets the
security protection action
to shutdown, the
interface is shut down
when the number of
learned MAC addresses
on the interface exceeds
the upper limit or static
MAC address flapping is
detected.

mac-address-flapping If the user network For details, see mac-

where the device is address flapping
deployed does not detection and mac-
support loop prevention address flapping action.
protocols, configure a
loop prevention action
for the device to perform
when the device detects
MAC address flapping.
The device shuts down
an interface when
detecting MAC address
flapping on the interface.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1586

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Cause for an Interface Scenario Remarks

in Error-Down State

transceiver-power-low When the optical power For details, see

of an Ethernet optical transceiver power low
interface configured with trigger error-down.
a backup link is reduced,
faults such as packet loss
occur. When the optical
power is lower than the
lower alarm threshold,
the interface is triggered
to be in Error-Down
state and services are
switched immediately.

data-integrity-error After the switch runs for -

a long time, the chip
memory identifier has a
data integrity error.

By default, an interface can only be resumed by a network administrator after

being shut down. To configure the interface to restore to the Up state
automatically, run the error-down auto-recovery command to set an auto
recovery delay. After the delay, the interface goes Up automatically.

The restored interface is shut down again if the interface receives BPDUs again or
the link is considered unavailable in a specified time.

Precautions

The error-down auto-recovery command is invalid for the interface that has been
in Error-Down state. It takes effect for only the interface that enters the Error-
Down state after the error-down auto-recovery command is executed.

BPDU protection has been enabled using the stp bpdu-protection command in
the system view.

A threshold crossing event has been associated with an interface using the efm
threshold-event trigger error-down command in the interface view.

An error event has been associated with an interface using the efm trigger error-
down command in the interface view.

Example
# Set the delay for an interface changes from Down to Up to 50s after the edge
port is enabled with BPDU protection on an STP-enabled network.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] error-down auto-recovery cause bpdu-protection interval 50

# Set the auto recovery delay to 50s after an EFM threshold crossing event is
associated with an interface.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1587

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] error-down auto-recovery cause efm-threshold-event interval 50

# Set the auto recovery delay to 50s after an EFM remote failure event is
associated with an interface.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] error-down auto-recovery cause efm-remote-failure interval 50

4.2.28 error-down-threshold error-percentage

Function
The error-down-threshold error-percentage command configures the alarm
threshold for received CRC packets causing an interface status to change to Error-
Down against all the received packets on the interface and alarm interval.

The undo error-down-threshold error-percentage command deletes the

configured alarm threshold and interval.

By default, the alarm threshold and interval are not configured.

Format
error-down-threshold error-percentage threshold-value interval interval-value

undo error-down-threshold error-percentage [ threshold-value interval interval-

value ]

Parameters

Parameter Description Value

threshold- Specifies the alarm threshold for The value is an integer that
value the percentage of received CRC ranges from 1 to 50.
packets causing an interface
NOTE
status change to Error-Down
against all the received packets You are advised to set the
threshold to be greater than or
on the interface. equal to the alarm threshold
configured in the trap-threshold
error-percentage command.

interval Specifies the interval for The value is an integer that

interval-value calculating the percentage of ranges from 10 to 65535, in
received CRC packets causing an seconds.
interface status to change to
Error-Down against all the
received packets on the interface.

Views
Ethernet interface view, GE interface view, XGE interface view

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1588

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

When the error-statistics threshold-event trigger error-down command is run

and the number of error packets that the interface receives within a specified
period exceeds the threshold, the interface status is triggered to change to Error-
Down. By default, if an interface receives three CRC packets within 10 seconds, the
interface status is triggered to change to Error-Down. When you want to use the
percentage of received CRC packets against all the received packets as the
threshold for triggering an interface status to change to Error-Down, run the
error-down-threshold error-percentage command.

Precautions

● This command is mutually exclusive to the error-down-threshold error-

statistics command. After this command is configured, the error-down-
threshold error-statistics command configuration does not take effect.
● This command cannot be configured on stack interfaces.

Example
# Set the alarm threshold for the percentage of received CRC packets causing the
interface status to change to Error-Down against all the received packets to 10%
and the interval for calculating the percentage of received CRC packets against all
the received packets to 30 seconds on GE0/0/1.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface GigabitEthernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] error-down-threshold error-percentage 10 interval 30

4.2.29 error-down-threshold error-statistics

Function
The error-down-threshold error-statistics command configures the alarm
threshold for CRC error packets causing an interface status to change to Error-
Down and interval for receiving CRC error packets.

The undo error-down-threshold error-statistics command restores the default

value of the alarm threshold and the alarm interval for CRC error packets that
cause the interface status to change to Error-Down.

By default, the alarm threshold for CRC error packets is 3 and the alarm interval is
10 seconds.

Format
error-down-threshold error-statistics threshold-value interval interval-value

undo error-down-threshold error-statistics

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1589

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

threshold-value Specifies the alarm The value is an integer

threshold for error that ranges from 1 to
packets that cause the 65535.
interface status to NOTE
change to Error-Down. The threshold is greater
than or equal to the alarm
threshold for error packets
configured by the trap-
threshold error-statistics
command.

interval interval-value Specifies the alarm The value is an integer

interval for error packets that ranges from 10 to
that cause the interface 65535, in seconds.
status to change to
Error-Down.

Views
Ethernet interface view, GE interface view, XGE interface view, MultiGE interface
view, 25GE interface view, 40GE interface view, 100GE interface view, port group
view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
After an interface is configured to transit to the Error-Down state when the
number of received CRC error packets exceeds the threshold using the error-
statistics threshold-event trigger error-down command, the interface transits to
the Error-Down state when the number of received error packets exceeds the
threshold within the specified interval. By default, an interface transits to the
Error-Down state when the number of received error packets exceeds 3 within 10
seconds. Run the error-down-threshold error-statistics command to configure
the interval and the threshold for received error packets.
Precautions
This command is not supported on the stack interface.
On a switch running a version earlier than V200R009C00, if the alarm threshold
has been set to n and alarm interval to m seconds using the trap-threshold error-
statistics threshold-value interval interval-value command, the error-down-
threshold error-statistics n interval m configuration is automatically generated
after the system software version is upgraded to V200R009C00 or a later version.
On a switch running a version earlier than V200R009C00, if the error-down-
threshold error-statistics configuration exists on the switch, the configuration

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1590

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

remains unchanged after the system software version is upgraded to

V200R009C00 or a later version.

Example
By default, the alarm threshold of CRC error packets that cause the interface
status to change to Error-Down is 10 and the alarm interval is 30 seconds.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] error-down-threshold error-statistics 10 interval 30

4.2.30 error-statistics threshold-event trigger error-down

Function
The error-statistics threshold-event trigger error-down command configures an
interface to transit to the error-down state when the number of error packets
received on the interface reaches the threshold.
The undo error-statistics threshold-event trigger error-down command restores
the default setting.
By default, an interface does not transit to the error-down state when the number
of error packets received on the interface reaches the threshold.

Format
error-statistics threshold-event trigger error-down
undo error-statistics threshold-event trigger error-down

Parameters
None

Views
Ethernet interface view, GE interface view, XGE interface view, 25GE interface view,
MultiGE interface view, 40GE interface view, 100GE interface view, port group view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
When an Ethernet interface receives excessive error packets, faults such as packet
loss will occur. Because the interface is still in Up state, traffic is still transmitted
on the interface even if a backup link is configured. To avoid impact on services,
you can configure the interface to change to the Error-down state when it receives
excessive error packets. When the number of received error packets on the
interface exceeds the threshold, the system disables the interface and records the

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1591

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

interface status as ERROR DOWN(error-statistics) state (indicating that the

interface is Down because of excessive error packets). Services are then switched
to the backup link immediately.
Follow-up Procedure
An interface in Error-down state can be recovered using either of the following
methods:
● Manual recovery: If a few interfaces need to be recovered forcibly, run the
shutdown and undo shutdown commands in the interface view.
Alternatively, run the restart command in the interface view to restart the
interfaces.
● Automatic recovery: If a large number of interfaces need to be recovered,
manual recovery is time consuming and some interfaces may be omitted. You
can run the error-down auto-recovery cause error-statistics interval
interval-value command in the system view to enable automatic interface
recovery and set the recovery delay time. An interface in Error-down state
automatically recovers when the specified delay time expires.

Example
# Configure GE0/0/1 to transit to the error-down state when the number of error
packets received on the interface reaches the threshold.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] error-statistics threshold-event trigger error-down

4.2.31 fast-link-down disable

Function
The fast-link-down disable command enables an interface to go Down after a
delay.
The undo fast-link-down disable command disables an interface from going
Down after a delay.
By default, an interface is disabled from going Down after a delay.

NOTE

Only the GE electrical interfaces of the following models support this command:
S1720GF, S1720GFR-P, S1720GW-E, S1720GWR-E, S2720-EI, S5720-LI, S5720S-LI, S5720I-SI,
S5735S-H, S5736-S, S2730S-S, S5735-L-I, S5735-L1,S300, S5735-L, S5735S-L, S5735S-L1,
S5735S-L-M, S5735-S, S500, S5735-S-I, S5735S-S

Format
fast-link-down disable
undo fast-link-down disable

Parameters
None

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1592

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Views
GE interface view, port group view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

After an interface is enabled to go Down after a delay, the device detects the
interface Down event after a delay of hundreds of milliseconds. When the
interface alternates between Up and Down states, the interface does not go Down
immediately, enhancing the anti-interference capability of the device.

Precautions
● If the energy-efficient-ethernet enable command has been executed to
enable the EEE function on an electrical interface, the interface cannot be
enabled to go Down after a delay. If the fast-link-down disable command
has been executed to enable the interface to go Down after a delay, you can
still run the energy-efficient-ethernet enable command to enable the EEE
function on the interface.
● If the loopback detection mode has been configured on an interface using the
loopback command, the interface cannot be enabled to go Down after a
delay. If the fast-link-down disable command has been executed to enable
the interface to go Down after a delay, you can still run the loopback
command to configure the loopback detection mode for the interface.

Example
# Enable an interface to go Down after a delay.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] fast-link-down disable

4.2.32 fec mode base-r

Function
The fec mode base-r command enables the Base-R FEC function on an interface.

The fec mode none command disables the Base-R FEC function on an interface.

The undo fec mode command restores the default Base-R FEC configuration on
an interface.

By default, the medium on a 25GE interface determines whether the Base-R FEC
function is enabled on the interface. For details, see Table 4-27.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1593

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

NOTE

The S5732-H24UM2CC, S5732-H48UM2CC, S5732-H48XUM2CC, S6730-H28Y4C, S6730-

H24X4Y4C, and S7Y08000 cards support this command.
This command is supported when the interface working mode of the S7X08000 card is set
to 25GE using the set card port-config-mode 25g-port enable command.

Format
fec mode { base-r | none }
undo fec mode [ base-r | none ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

base-r Enables the Base-R FEC function. -

none Disables the Base-R FEC function. -

Views
25GE interface view, port group view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
Base-R FEC is a bit error correction technology that adds correction information to
data packets at the transmit end, and corrects bit errors generated during data
packet transmission at the receive end based on the correction information. You
can enable the Base-R FEC function to improve the signal quality.
You can run the display interface command in any view or run the display this
interface command in the interface view to check whether the FEC function is
enabled on an interface based on the Fec field in the command output.
Prerequisites
You can run this command on an interface only when the following conditions are
met:
● Auto-negotiation is disabled on the interface.
● The interface is not a stack member interface.
Precautions
● For the device running a version earlier than V200R019C10, the Base-R FEC
function is enabled by default on interfaces and cannot be disabled. If you

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1594

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

need to disable the function, upgrade the device to V200R019C10 or a later

version.
● In V200R019C10 and later versions, ensure that the FEC status on both ends
of a link is the same. If the Base-R FEC function is enabled on one end, this
function also needs to be enabled on the other end to ensure that the Base-R
FEC status on both ends of the link is the same.
● The FEC function is mutually exclusive with auto-negotiation and the port
mode ge command. If FEC has been configured, the FEC configuration will be
automatically deleted when auto-negotiation is enabled or the port mode ge
command is run.
● When a XGE optical module or XGE high-speed cable is installed on a 25GE
interface, the interface does not support Base-R FEC function.
● When a 40GE optical module or 40GE high-speed cable is installed on a
100GE interface, the interface does not support the Base-R FEC function.
● When 25GE interfaces are interconnected, you are advised to enable FEC on
both ends of the link to reduce the transmission bit error rate of the physical
link. Otherwise, error packets may be generated.

Example
# Enable the Base-R FEC function on an interface.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface 25ge 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-25GE0/0/1] fec mode base-r

4.2.33 fec mode rs

Function
The fec mode rs command enables the Reed-Solomon Forward Error Correction
(RS-FEC) function on an interface.

The fec mode none command disables the RS-FEC function on an interface.

The undo fec mode command restores the default RS-FEC configuration on an
interface.

By default, the medium on an optical interface determines whether the RS-FEC

function is enabled on the interface. For details, see Table 4-27 and Table 4-28.

Table 4-27 FEC function of 25GE interfaces

Interface Type FEC Requirement Default Setting

SFP-25G-AOC (5e-5) RS-FEC Enabled

SFP-25G-SR RS-FEC Enabled

SFP-25G-ACC (5e-5) RS-FEC Enabled

25G BASE-CR CA-L RS-FEC Auto-negotiation is

enabled:
25G BASE-CR CA-S Base-R FEC

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1595

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Interface Type FEC Requirement Default Setting

25G BASE-CR CA-N None 1. Whether to enable

FEC through
negotiation
2. Whether to enable
RS-FEC or Base-R FEC
through negotiation

SFP-25G-AOC (10e-12) RS-FEC/Base-R FEC/None Enabled

SFP-25G-ACC (10e-12) RS-FEC/Base-R FEC/None Enabled

Table 4-28 FEC function of 100GE interfaces

Interface Type FEC Requirement Default Setting

QSFP-100G-AOC (5e-5) RS-FEC RS-FEC

QSFP-100G-SR4 RS-FEC RS-FEC

QSFP-100G-LR4 None None

100G Base-ER4 None None

100G Base-SR10 None None

QSFP-100G-CWDM4 RS-FEC RS-FEC

with FEC

QSFP-100G-PSM4 RS-FEC RS-FEC

QSFP-100G-ACC (5e-5) RS-FEC RS-FEC

100G Base-CR4 RS-FEC RS-FEC

QSFP-100G-CLR4 RS-FEC/None RS-FEC

QSFP-100G-AOC RS-FEC/None RS-FEC

(10e-12)

QSFP-100G-ACC RS-FEC/None RS-FEC

(10e-12)

Format
fec mode { rs | none }
undo fec mode [ rs | none ]

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1596

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

rs Enables the RS-FEC function. -

none Disables the RS-FEC function. -

Views
25GE interface view, 100GE interface view, port group view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

RS-FEC is a bit error correction technology that adds correction information to

data packets at the transmit end, and corrects bit errors generated during data
packet transmission at the receive end based on the correction information. RS-
FEC improves the signal quality, but increases the signal transmission delay. You
can disable this function based on requirements to reduce the signal transmission
delay.

You can run the display interface command in any view or run the display this
interface command in the interface view to check whether the FEC function is
enabled on an interface based on the FEC field in the command output.

Precautions

● For the device running a version earlier than V200R019C00, the RS-FEC
function is enabled by default on interfaces and cannot be disabled. If you
need to disable the function, upgrade the device to V200R019C00 or a later
version.
● In V200R019C00 and later versions, if the RS-FEC function is enabled on one
end, this function also needs to be enabled on the other end to ensure that
the RS-FEC status on both ends of the link is the same.
● When a XGE optical module or XGE high-speed cable is installed on a 25GE
interface, the interface does not support the RS-FEC function.
● When a 40GE optical module or 40GE high-speed cable is installed on a
100GE interface, the interface does not support the RS-FEC function.
● The FEC function is mutually exclusive with auto-negotiation and the port
mode ge command. If FEC has been configured, the FEC configuration will be
automatically deleted when auto-negotiation is enabled or the port mode ge
command is run.
● When 25GE interfaces are interconnected, you are advised to enable FEC on
both ends of the link to reduce the transmission bit error rate of the physical
link. Otherwise, error packets may be generated.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1597

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Example
# Disable the FEC function on 100GE0/0/1.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface 100ge 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-100GE0/0/1] fec mode none

4.2.34 flow-control (interface view)

Function
The flow-control command enables flow control on an Ethernet interface.

The undo flow-control command disables flow control on an Ethernet interface.

By default, flow control is disabled on an Ethernet interface.

NOTE

The following interfaces do not support this command:

● S5732-H24UM2CC (part number: 02353HUC/02353HUC-003/02353HUC-004/02353SJY/
02353SJY-001/02353SJY-004/02353SJY-010/02353SJY-011/02353SJY-014/02353SJY-015/0
2353SJY-016/02353SJY-019/02353SJY-002/02353SJY-003/02353SJY-012/02353SJY-013/02
353SJY-017/02353SJY-018), S5732-H48UM2CC (part number: 02353HUB/
02353HUB-002/02353HUB-003/02353SJT/
02353SJT-001/02353SJT-003/02353SJT-004/02353SJT-010/02353SJT-011/02353SJT-013/0
2353SJT-014/02353SJT-015/02353SJT-016/02353SJT-018/02353SJT-002), and S5732-
H48XUM2CC
● 25G, 40G, and 100G interfaces of the device.
● Four SFP28 Ethernet optical interfaces (25GE by default) and two QSFP28 Ethernet
optical interfaces (40GE by default) have been configured using the set device
port-config-mode enable command.
● 8*10GE ports and 2*25GE ports when the S7X08000 card is installed.
● 8*25GE ports when the S7Y08000 card is installed.
● GE interfaces of the S5735S-H24S4XC-A
● GE interfaces of the S5736-S24S4XC and S5736-S48S4XC
● When the RTU license is not loaded on the S6730-H24X4Y4C, the first eight XGE
interfaces numbered 0/0/1 to 0/0/8 do not support flow control. In V200R021C00 and
later versions, the RTU license can be loaded. After the license is loaded, the interface
rate is increased from 10 Gbit/s to 25 Gbit/s, and the first eight 25GE interfaces
numbered 0/1/1 to 0/1/8 do not support flow control.
● First eight 25GE interfaces of the S6730-H28Y4C
● XGE interfaces that have copper modules installed on the S6735-S

Format
flow-control

undo flow-control

Parameters
None

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1598

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Views
Ethernet interface view, GE interface view, XGE interface view, 25GE interface
view, 40GE interface view, 100GE interface view, port group view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
Flow control prevents packet loss caused by network congestion. If network
congestion occurs on the local device after flow control is configured, the local
device sends a message to the remote device, requesting the remote device to
temporarily stop sending packets. After receiving the message, the remote device
temporarily stops sending packets to the local device regardless of the interface
working rate. In this case, the device can receive and send pause frames.
Precautions
● If flow control is enabled on an interface, it must also be enabled on the peer
interface.
● Flow control and flow control auto-negotiation can be configured on Ethernet
interfaces, but they cannot be configured concurrently.
● When an interface works in half-duplex mode, flow control does not take
effect on the interface.
● In a scenario where Layer 3 services are deployed, enabling flow control may
affect the IP traffic forwarding on the interface. As a result, the interface
becomes unavailable. You can run the undo flow-control command in the
interface view to disable flow control to recover the interface.
● If the flow control configuration is implemented on the S5735S-H and S5736-
S using the flow-control command, the rate limit for outbound traffic of the
GE electrical interface is 200 Mbit/s, and a congestion occurs, the inbound
traffic rate cannot be reduced to be the same as the outbound traffic rate on
the GE electrical interface. (The inbound traffic rate is about 200 Mbit/s.)
● For the S2730S-S, S5735-L1, S5735-L-I, S300, S5735-L, S5735S-L, S5735S-L1,
S5735S-L-M, S5735-S, S500, S5735-S-I, and S5735S-S, the multicast functions
(both Layer 2 and Layer 3 multicast functions) conflict with the flow control
function.

Example
# Enable flow control on GE0/0/1.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] flow-control

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1599

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

4.2.35 flow-control negotiation

Function
The flow-control negotiation command enables flow control auto-negotiation
on an Ethernet interface.

The undo flow-control negotiation command disables flow control auto-

negotiation on an Ethernet interface.

By default, flow control auto-negotiation is disabled on an Ethernet interface.

NOTE

The following interfaces do not support this command:

● S5732-H24UM2CC (part number: 02353HUC/02353HUC-003/02353HUC-004/02353SJY/
02353SJY-001/02353SJY-004/02353SJY-010/02353SJY-011/02353SJY-014/02353SJY-015/0
2353SJY-016/02353SJY-019/02353SJY-002/02353SJY-003/02353SJY-012/02353SJY-013/02
353SJY-017/02353SJY-018), S5732-H48UM2CC (part number: 02353HUB/
02353HUB-002/02353HUB-003/02353SJT/
02353SJT-001/02353SJT-003/02353SJT-004/02353SJT-010/02353SJT-011/02353SJT-013/0
2353SJT-014/02353SJT-015/02353SJT-016/02353SJT-018/02353SJT-002), and S5732-
H48XUM2CC
● 25G, 40G, and 100G interfaces of the device.
● Four SFP28 Ethernet optical interfaces (25GE by default) and two QSFP28 Ethernet
optical interfaces (40GE by default) have been configured using the set device
port-config-mode enable command.
● 8*10GE ports and 2*25GE ports when the S7X08000 card is installed.
● 8*25GE ports when the S7Y08000 card is installed.
● GE interfaces of the S5735S-H24S4XC-A
● GE interfaces of the S5736-S24S4XC and S5736-S48S4XC
● When the RTU license is not loaded on the S6730-H24X4Y4C, the first eight XGE
interfaces numbered 0/0/1 to 0/0/8 do not support flow control. In V200R021C00 and
later versions, the RTU license can be loaded. After the license is loaded, the interface
rate is increased from 10 Gbit/s to 25 Gbit/s, and the first eight 25GE interfaces
numbered 0/1/1 to 0/1/8 do not support flow control.
● First eight 25GE interfaces of the S6730-H28Y4C
● XGE interfaces that have copper modules installed on the S6735-S

Format
flow-control negotiation

undo flow-control negotiation

Parameters
None

Views
Ethernet interface view, GE interface view, XGE interface view, MultiGE interface
view, 25GE interface view, port group view

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1600

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

Network congestion causes packet loss. Flow control can prevent packet loss. If
congestion occurs on a device, the device sends a message to request the peer
device to stop sending packets, which prevents packet loss. Flow control auto-
negotiation enables a device to determine whether to enable flow control by
negotiating with the peer device.

Prerequisites

Run the negotiation auto command to configure the Ethernet interface to work
in auto negotiation mode.

Precautions

● Electrical interfaces support flow control auto-negotiation.

● If flow control auto-negotiation is enabled on an interface, it must also be
enabled on the peer interface.
● If flow control has been enabled on an Ethernet interface using the flow-
control command, run the undo flow-control command to disable flow
control before running the flow-control negotiation command. Otherwise,
the flow-control negotiation command fails to be executed.
● This command can be used on an XGE optical interface that has a GE copper
module installed.
● This command can be used on a GE optical interface that has a GE optical
module or GE copper module installed.
● This command can be used on an 25GE optical interface that has a GE copper
module installed. Before installing a GE copper module on a 25GE optical
interface, you need to run the port mode ge command to configure the
interface to work at the rate of 1 Gbit/s.
NOTE

On the S2720-52TP-EI, S5720-52P-LI-AC, if interfaces 0 to 23 work as inbound interfaces

(or outbound interfaces) and interfaces 24 to 47 work as outbound interfaces (or inbound
interfaces), flow control auto-negotiation does not take effect on these interfaces.
For the S2730S-S, S5735-L-I, S5735-L1,S300, S5735-L, S5735S-L, S5735S-L1, S5735S-L-M,
S5735-S, S500, S5735-S-I, and S5735S-S, the multicast functions (both Layer 2 and Layer 3
multicast functions) conflict with the flow control function.

Example
# Enable flow control auto-negotiation on GE0/0/1.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] negotiation auto
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] flow-control negotiation

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1601

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

4.2.36 flow-control negotiation receive

Function
The flow-control negotiation receive command enables received flow control
auto-negotiation on an Ethernet interface.

The undo flow-control negotiation receive command disables received flow

control auto-negotiation on an Ethernet interface.

By default, received flow control auto-negotiation is disabled on an Ethernet

interface.

NOTE

The following interfaces do not support this command:

● S5732-H24UM2CC (part number: 02353HUC/02353HUC-003/02353HUC-004/02353SJY/
02353SJY-001/02353SJY-004/02353SJY-010/02353SJY-011/02353SJY-014/02353SJY-015/0
2353SJY-016/02353SJY-019/02353SJY-002/02353SJY-003/02353SJY-012/02353SJY-013/02
353SJY-017/02353SJY-018), S5732-H48UM2CC (part number: 02353HUB/
02353HUB-002/02353HUB-003/02353SJT/
02353SJT-001/02353SJT-003/02353SJT-004/02353SJT-010/02353SJT-011/02353SJT-013/0
2353SJT-014/02353SJT-015/02353SJT-016/02353SJT-018/02353SJT-002), and S5732-
H48XUM2CC
● 25G, 40G, and 100G interfaces of the device.
● Four SFP28 Ethernet optical interfaces (25GE by default) and two QSFP28 Ethernet
optical interfaces (40GE by default) have been configured using the set device
port-config-mode enable command.
● 8*10GE ports and 2*25GE ports when the S7X08000 card is installed.
● 8*25GE ports when the S7Y08000 card is installed.
● GE interfaces of the S5735S-H24S4XC-A
● GE interfaces of the S5736-S24S4XC and S5736-S48S4XC
● When the RTU license is not loaded on the S6730-H24X4Y4C, the first eight XGE
interfaces numbered 0/0/1 to 0/0/8 do not support flow control. In V200R021C00 and
later versions, the RTU license can be loaded. After the license is loaded, the interface
rate is increased from 10 Gbit/s to 25 Gbit/s, and the first eight 25GE interfaces
numbered 0/1/1 to 0/1/8 do not support flow control.
● First eight 25GE interfaces of the S6730-H28Y4C
● XGE interfaces that have copper modules installed on the S6735-S
● Ethernet optical interfaces on the S2720-EI, S5720I-SI, S5720-LI (last four optical
interfaces on the S5720-52X-LI-48S-AC), and S5720S-LI
● Ethernet optical interfaces on the S1720

Format
flow-control negotiation receive

undo flow-control negotiation receive

Parameters
None

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1602

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Views
Ethernet interface view, GE interface view, XGE interface view, MultiGE interface
view, 25GE interface view, port group view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

Flow control prevents packet loss caused by network congestion. Received flow
control auto-negotiation enables a device to determine whether to enable
received flow control by negotiating with the peer device. On a unidirectional
communication network, you can run the flow-control negotiation receive
command on the Ethernet interface functioning as the outbound interface at the
transmit side to enable received flow control auto-negotiation, and run the flow-
control negotiation command on the inbound interface at the receive side to
enable flow control auto-negotiation. After received flow control auto-negotiation
is enabled on the Ethernet interface, if congestion occurs on a device, the device
sends a message to request the peer device to stop sending packets, which
prevents packet loss.

Prerequisites

The Ethernet interface has been configured to work in auto-negotiation mode

using the negotiation auto command.

Precautions

● Electrical interfaces support this configuration.

● Received flow control auto-negotiation can be implemented only if flow
control auto-negotiation is enabled on the interface of the peer device.
● Flow control, received flow control, flow control auto-negotiation, and
received flow control auto-negotiation can be configured on Ethernet
interfaces, but cannot be configured together. For example, if received flow
control auto-negotiation has been enabled on an Ethernet interface using the
flow-control receive command, you need to run the undo flow-control
receive command to disable received flow control and then run the flow-
control negotiation receive command. Otherwise, the flow-control
negotiation receive command fails to be executed.
● XGE optical interfaces support this command after GE copper modules are
installed on them.
● GE optical interfaces support this command after GE optical or GE copper
modules are installed on them.
● This command can be used on an 25GE optical interface that has a GE copper
module installed. Before installing a GE copper module on a 25GE optical
interface, you need to run the port mode ge command to configure the
interface to work at the rate of 1 Gbit/s.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1603

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

NOTE

For the S2720-52TP-EI and S5720-52P-LI-AC, if received flow control auto-negotiation is

configured on the interfaces 0 to 23 that work as inbound interfaces and flow control auto-
negotiation is configured on the interfaces 24 to 47 that work as outbound interfaces,
received flow control auto-negotiation and flow control auto-negotiation do not take
effect.
For the S2730S-S, S5735-L-I, S5735-L1,S300, S5735-L, S5735S-L, S5735S-L1, S5735S-L-M,
S5735-S, S500, S5735-S-I, and S5735S-S, the multicast functions (both Layer 2 and Layer 3
multicast functions) conflict with the flow control function.

Example
# Enable received flow control auto-negotiation on GE0/0/1.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] negotiation auto
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] flow-control negotiation receive

4.2.37 flow-control receive

Function
The flow-control receive command enables received flow control on an Ethernet
interface.
The undo flow-control receive command disables received flow control on an
Ethernet interface.
By default, received flow control is disabled on an Ethernet interface.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1604

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

NOTE

The following interfaces do not support this command:

● S5732-H24UM2CC (part number: 02353HUC/02353HUC-003/02353HUC-004/02353SJY/
02353SJY-001/02353SJY-004/02353SJY-010/02353SJY-011/02353SJY-014/02353SJY-015/0
2353SJY-016/02353SJY-019/02353SJY-002/02353SJY-003/02353SJY-012/02353SJY-013/02
353SJY-017/02353SJY-018), S5732-H48UM2CC (part number: 02353HUB/
02353HUB-002/02353HUB-003/02353SJT/
02353SJT-001/02353SJT-003/02353SJT-004/02353SJT-010/02353SJT-011/02353SJT-013/0
2353SJT-014/02353SJT-015/02353SJT-016/02353SJT-018/02353SJT-002), and S5732-
H48XUM2CC
● 25G, 40G, and 100G interfaces of the device.
● Four SFP28 Ethernet optical interfaces (25GE by default) and two QSFP28 Ethernet
optical interfaces (40GE by default) have been configured using the set device
port-config-mode enable command.
● 8*10GE ports and 2*25GE ports when the S7X08000 card is installed.
● 8*25GE ports when the S7Y08000 card is installed.
● GE interfaces of the S5735S-H24S4XC-A
● GE interfaces of the S5736-S24S4XC and S5736-S48S4XC
● When the RTU license is not loaded on the S6730-H24X4Y4C, the first eight XGE
interfaces numbered 0/0/1 to 0/0/8 do not support flow control. In V200R021C00 and
later versions, the RTU license can be loaded. After the license is loaded, the interface
rate is increased from 10 Gbit/s to 25 Gbit/s, and the first eight 25GE interfaces
numbered 0/1/1 to 0/1/8 do not support flow control.
● First eight 25GE interfaces of the S6730-H28Y4C
● XGE interfaces that have copper modules installed on the S6735-S

Format
flow-control receive
undo flow-control receive

Parameters
None

Views
Ethernet interface view, GE interface view, XGE interface view, MultiGE interface
view, 25GE interface view, 40GE interface view, 100GE interface view, port group
view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
Flow control prevents packet loss caused by network congestion. On a
unidirectional communication network, after received flow control is enabled on
the Ethernet interface at the transmit side using the flow-control receive

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1605

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

command and flow control is enabled on the Ethernet interface at the receive side
using the flow-control command, if congestion occurs on the device at the
receive side, the device sends a message to the device at the transmit side to
notify it to stop sending packets. After receiving the message, the device at the
transmit side temporarily stops sending packets to the device at the receive side
regardless of the interface working rate, preventing congestion. In this case, the
device at the transmit side can receive pause frames, but cannot send pause
frames; the device at the receive side can receive and send pause frames.
Precautions
● Flow control can be implemented only after flow control is enabled on the
peer device.
● Flow control, received flow control, flow control auto-negotiation, and
received flow control auto-negotiation can be configured on Ethernet
interfaces, but cannot be configured together.
● When an interface works in half-duplex mode, received flow control does not
take effect.
● In a scenario where Layer 3 services are deployed, enabling received flow
control may affect the IP traffic forwarding on the interface. As a result, the
interface becomes unavailable. You can run the undo flow-control receive
command in the interface view to disable received flow control to recover the
interface.
● For the S2730S-S, S5735-L1, S5735-L-I, S300, S5735-L, S5735S-L, S5735S-L1,
S5735S-L-M, S5735-S, S500, S5735-S-I, and S5735S-S, the multicast functions
(both Layer 2 and Layer 3 multicast functions) conflict with the flow control
function.

Example
# Enable received flow control on GE0/0/1.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] flow-control receive

4.2.38 group-member
Function
The group-member command adds specified Ethernet interfaces to a permanent
port group.
The undo group-member command deletes specified Ethernet interfaces from a
permanent port group.
By default, no Ethernet interface is added to a permanent port group.

Format
group-member { interface-type interface-number1 [ to interface-type interface-
number2 ] } &<1-10>
undo group-member { interface-type interface-number1 [ to interface-type
interface-number2 ] } &<1-10>

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1606

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

undo group-member all-unavailable-interface

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

interface-type Adds an Ethernet interface to a interface-

interface-number1 to permanent port group. number2 must
interface-type be greater than
interface-number2 to indicates an interface range. All interface-
interfaces numbered between number1.
interface-number1 and interface-
number2 are added to the temporary
port group.

all-unavailable- Delete all unavailable interfaces from -

interface this port-group.

Views
Permanent port group view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
If you need to perform the same operations on multiple Ethernet interfaces,
configuring each interface one by one easily causes incorrect configurations and is
labor-intensive.
The port group function easily solves the problem. You can add all the Ethernet
interfaces to the same port group. After you run a configuration command once in
the port group view, the configuration takes effect on all the Ethernet interfaces in
the port group, reducing the configuration workload.
Prerequisite
Prior to running this command, run the port-group command in the system view
to create a permanent interface group.
Configuration Impact
If the group-member command is run more than once, all configurations take
effect.
Precautions
● Both physical and logical interfaces can be added to a permanent port group.
● This command has the same function as the port-group group-member
command that is used in the system view. You can also run the port-group

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1607

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

group-member command to add interfaces to a temporary port group to

configure the interfaces in batches.
● When you specify the keyword to in the group-member command:
– The interfaces specified before and after the keyword to must have the
same attribute. For example, both of them are main interfaces or sub-
interfaces. If they are sub-interfaces, they must belong to the same main
interface.
– If to is not used, these limitations do not apply.
– Only the S5731-H, S5731-S, S5731S-H, S5731S-S, S5732-H, S6735-S,
S6720-EI, S6720S-EI, S6730-H, S6730S-H, S6730-S, and S6730S-S support
sub-interfaces.

Example
# Add GE0/0/1 and GE0/0/2 to port group portgroup1.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] port-group portgroup1
[HUAWEI-port-group-portgroup1] group-member gigabitethernet 0/0/1 to gigabitethernet 0/0/2

4.2.39 interface (Ethernet interface)

Function
The interface command displays the specified interface view or sub-interface
view.
The undo interface command deletes a sub-interface.

Format
interface { ethernet | gigabitethernet | multige | xgigabitethernet | 25ge |
40ge | 100ge } interface-number[.subinterface-number ] [ mode l2 ]
undo interface { ethernet | gigabitethernet | multige | xgigabitethernet | 25ge
| 40ge | 100ge } interface-number[.subinterface-number ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

ethernet Displays the view of an -

FE interface.

gigabitethernet Displays the view of a GE -

interface.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1608

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Parameter Description Value

multige Displays the view of a -

MultiGE interface.
NOTE
Only the S5720-28X-PWH-
LI-AC, S5720-28X-PWH-LI-
ACF, S5732-H24UM2CC,
S5732-H48UM2CC, S5732-
H48XUM2CC, and S5736-
S24UM4XC support
MultiGE interfaces.

xgigabitethernet Displays the view of an -

XGE interface.

25ge Displays the view of a -

25GE interface.

40ge Displays the view of a -

40GE interface.

100ge Displays the view of a -

100GE interface.

interface-number Specifies the number of The value depends on

an interface. the interface type and
slot ID.

subinterface-number Specifies the number of a The value is an integer

sub-interface. that ranges from 1 to
4096.

mode l2 Configures a sub- -

interface to work in
Layer 2 mode for the
VXLAN service.
NOTE
Only the S5731-H, S5731-S,
S5731S-H, S5731S-S,
S5732-H, S6735-S, S6720-
EI, S6720S-EI, S6730-H,
S6730S-H, S6730-S, and
S6730S-S support this
parameter.

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1609

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Usage Guidelines
After entering the specified Ethernet interface view, you can set attributes for the
Ethernet interface.

NOTE

● Only the S5731-H, S5731-S, S5731S-H, S5731S-S, S5732-H, S6735-S, S6720-EI, S6720S-
EI, S6730-H, S6730S-H, S6730-S, and S6730S-S support Ethernet sub-interfaces.
● Only hybrid and trunk interfaces on the preceding switches support Layer 2 Ethernet
sub-interface configuration.
● After you run the undo portswitch command to switch Layer 2 interfaces on the
preceding series of switches into Layer 3 interfaces, you can configure Layer 3 Ethernet
sub-interfaces on the interfaces.
● After an interface is added to an Eth-Trunk, sub-interfaces cannot be configured on the
interface.
● VLAN termination sub-interfaces cannot be created on a VCMP client.

Example
# Enter the view of GE0/0/1.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1]

4.2.40 interface range

Function
The interface range command creates a temporary interface group and adds
specified interfaces to this temporary interface group. Commands configured for a
temporary interface group then automatically run on all member interfaces.
By default, no temporary interface group is created.

Format
interface range { interface-type interface-number1 [ to interface-type interface-
number2 ] } &<1-10>

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1610

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
interface-type Specifies Ethernet interfaces to The value of interface-
interface-number1 be added to a temporary port number2 must be larger
[ to interface-type group. than the value of
interface- interface-number1.
number2 ] to indicates an interface range.
All interfaces numbered A maximum of 48
between interface-number1 temporary port groups
and interface-number2 are can be created on a
added to the temporary port device.
group.

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

If you need to perform the same operations on multiple Ethernet interfaces,

configuring each interface one by one easily causes incorrect configurations and is
labor-intensive.

The port group function easily solves the problem. You can add all the Ethernet
interfaces to the same port group. After you run a configuration command once in
the port group view, the configuration takes effect on all the Ethernet interfaces in
the port group, reducing the configuration workload.

Configuration Impact

If the interface range command is run more than once, all configurations take
effect.

Precautions

● The interface range and port-group group-member commands have the

same functions. Therefore, use either of the commands for configuration.
After exiting from the temporary port group view, the system deletes the
temporary port group.
● The interface range command is equivalent to the group-member command
executed in the permanent port group view. Multiple interfaces can be added
to a permanent port group in batches using the group-member command.
● When you specify the keyword to in the interface range command:
– The interfaces specified by interface-number1 and interface-number2
must reside on the same member switch. To add contiguous interfaces on

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1611

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

different member switches to the same port group, run this command
several times or use the keyword to several times.
– The interfaces specified by interface-number1 and interface-number2
must be of the same type, for example, both of the interfaces are GE
interfaces.
– The interfaces specified before and after the keyword to must have the
same attribute. For example, both of them are main interfaces or sub-
interfaces. If they are sub-interfaces, they must belong to the same main
interface.
– If to is not specified, the preceding limitations do not apply.
– Only the S5731-H, S5731-S, S5731S-H, S5731S-S, S5732-H, S6735-S,
S6720-EI, S6720S-EI, S6730-H, S6730S-H, S6730-S, and S6730S-S support
sub-interfaces.

Example
# Add GE0/0/1, 0/0/2, and 0/0/3 to a temporary port group.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface range gigabitethernet 0/0/1 to gigabitethernet 0/0/3
[HUAWEI-port-group]

4.2.41 jumboframe enable

Function
The jumboframe enable command sets the maximum frame length allowed by
an interface.
The undo jumboframe enable command restores the default maximum frame
length allowed by an interface.
By default, the maximum frame length allowed by the S500, S5735-S, S5735S-S,
S5735-S-I, S1730S-H, S2730S-S, S5735-L-I, S5735-L1,S300, S5735-L, S5735S-L,
S5735S-L1, or S5735S-L-M is 10240 bytes, and the maximum frame length
allowed by other switches is 9216 bytes.

NOTE

The following switch models do not support this command:

S200, S1730S-S, S1730S-S1, S500, S5735-S, S5735S-S, S5735-S-I, S1730S-H, S2730S-S,

S5735-L-I, S5735-L1,S300, S5735-L, S5735S-L, S5735S-L1, S5735-L-I, and S5735S-L-M

Format
jumboframe enable [ value ]
undo jumboframe enable

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1612

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

value Specifies the The value is an integer, in bytes.

maximum frame
length allowed ● On the S1720GW, S1720GW-E, S1720GWR,
by an Ethernet S1720GWR-E, S1720GF, S1720GFR-P,
interface. S2720-EI, S5720I-SI, S5720-LI, S5720S-LI,
S5735S-H, S5736-S the value is an integer
that ranges from 1536 to 10240, in bytes.
● On the S5732-H24S6Q, S5732-H48S6Q, ,
S6720-EI, S6720S-EI, S6730-H, S6730S-H,
S6730-S, and S6730S-S, the value is an
integer that ranges from 1536 to 12288, in
bytes.
● On the S5732-H24UM2CC, S5732-
H48UM2CC, S5732-H48XUM2CC, S5731-H,
S5731S-H, S5731-S, and S5731S-S, the
value is an integer that ranges from 1536
to 9600, in bytes.
● On the S6735-S, the value is an integer
that ranges from 1536 to 9216, in bytes.
NOTE
On the S1720GW, S1720GW-E, S1720GWR,
S1720GWR-E, S1720GF, S1720GFR-P, S2720-EI,
S5720I-SI, S5720-LI, S5720S-LI, S5735S-H, S5736-S,
value cannot be set to an odd number.
For GE electrical interfaces on the S5735S-H and
S5736-S, value can only be set to 10232.
If value is set to an odd number in a version earlier
than V200R008, the value of value increases by one
automatically after the system software is
upgraded to V200R008 or later versions. For
example, value is set to 8879 in V200R007. After
the system software is upgraded to V200R008, the
value of value is 8880.

Views
Ethernet interface view, GE interface view, XGE interface view, 25GE interface
view, 40GE interface view, 100GE interface view, port group view, Eth-Trunk
interface view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
When transmitting a large amount of data (such as files and videos), an Ethernet
interface may receive jumbo frames. If the jumbo frame length exceeds the

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1613

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

default data frame length that can be processed, the device directly discards the
jumbo frames. You can set the jumbo frame length allowed on an interface.
After you configure the device to allow jumbo frames, packet forwarding becomes
more flexible. If multiple common Ethernet frames are used to transmit a data
packet, many redundant contents such as interframe gaps (IFGs) and preambles
are also transmitted. If jumbo frames are used to transmit the data packet, fewer
frames, as well as fewer IFGs and preambles, are transmitted, improving
bandwidth efficiency.
Precautions
If you run the jumboframe enable command multiple times in the same interface
view to set the maximum frame length allowed by the interface, only the latest
configuration takes effect.
If you run the jumboframe enable command on an interface without specifying
the value parameter, the interface allows the default jumbo frame length. By
default, the jumbo frame length allowed by Ethernet interfaces of other models is
9216 bytes.
If the length of an outgoing packet exceeds the maximum frame length allowed
on an interface, the interface can directly forward the packet.
If the maximum frame length allowed by interfaces is configured in batches
through the port group function, the maximum frame length range displayed
when the jumboframe enable ? command is executed in the port group view is
1536-12288. The actual maximum frame length allowed by the interfaces is
defined in Parameters. Configure the maximum frame length as required.

Example
# Set the maximum frame length allowed by GE0/0/1 to 5000 bytes.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] jumboframe enable 5000

4.2.42 log-threshold input-rate output-rate

Function
The log-threshold input-rate output-rate command sets the inbound and
outbound bandwidth usage thresholds for generating a log.
The undo log-threshold input-rate output-rate command restores the default
inbound and outbound bandwidth usage thresholds for generating a log.
The default inbound and outbound bandwidth usage thresholds for generating a
log is 80.

Format
log-threshold { input-rate | output-rate } bandwidth-in-use [ resume-rate
resume-threshold ]
undo log-threshold { input-rate | output-rate }

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1614

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

input-rate Specifies the inbound -

bandwidth.

output-rate Specifies the outbound -

bandwidth.

bandwidth-in-use Specifies the bandwidth The value is an integer that

usage threshold for ranges from 1 to 100.
generating a log.

resume-rate Specifies the bandwidth The value is an integer that

resume-threshold usage threshold for ranges from 1 to the value of
clearing a log. bandwidth-in-use. The default
value is the value of
bandwidth-in-use.

Views
Ethernet interface view, GE interface view, XGE interface view, 25GE interface
view, 40GE interface view, 100GE interface view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Monitoring bandwidth usage helps you know current load on a device. If the
bandwidth usage exceeds a threshold, bandwidth resources are insufficient and
the device capacity needs to be expanded. For example, if the bandwidth usage
exceeds 95%, an alarm is generated, indicating that bandwidth resources are
almost exhausted. As a result, some services may be interrupted before device
capacity expansion.

You can configure two thresholds: low threshold (log threshold) and high
threshold (alarm threshold). The system generates a log when the bandwidth
usage exceeds the low threshold and generates an alarm when the bandwidth
usage exceeds the high threshold. This configuration ensures that you can expand
the device capacity in advance to avoid service interruptions caused by bandwidth
exhaustion.

NOTE

Outbound bandwidth usage threshold = (Outbound interface rate/Outbound physical interface

bandwidth) x 100
Inbound bandwidth usage threshold = (Inbound interface rate/Inbound physical interface
bandwidth) x 100

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1615

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

The trap-threshold command is used to set the bandwidth usage threshold for
generating a trap.
The log-threshold input-rate output-rate command with the following
parameters provides various functions:
● log-threshold input-rate bandwidth-in-use resume-rate resume-threshold:
sets the inbound bandwidth usage threshold for generating a log to provide
the following functions:
– If inbound bandwidth usage value exceeds the value of bandwidth-in-use,
an IFNET_BWRATE_IN_RISING log is generated, indicating that inbound
bandwidth usage exceeds the configured threshold.
– If inbound bandwidth usage value is lower than the value of resume-
threshold, an IFNET_BWRATE_IN_RESUME log is generated, indicating
that inbound bandwidth usage is lower than the configured threshold.
● log-threshold output-rate bandwidth-in-use resume-rate resume-threshold:
sets the outbound bandwidth usage threshold for generating a log to provide
the following functions:
– If outbound bandwidth usage value exceeds the value of bandwidth-in-
use, an IFNET_BWRATE_OUT_RISING log is generated, prompting for a
bandwidth increase request.
– If outbound bandwidth usage falls below the threshold specified by
resume-threshold, an IFNET_BWRATE_OUT_RESUME log is generated,
indicating that bandwidth usage has been restored.
If the offset between the value of bandwidth-in-use and the value of resume-
threshold is too small, log information may be frequently displayed.
The log threshold must be lower than the trap threshold, providing efficient
protection for services. For example, when the inbound bandwidth usage reaches
80%, a log is generated. If the inbound bandwidth usage continues to increase
and reaches 95%, a trap is generated. This ensures that a log is generated for
inbound bandwidth usage of 80%, and a trap is generated for inbound bandwidth
usage of 95%. Either the log or the trap prompts for a bandwidth increase,
preventing service interruption.

Example
# Configure GE0/0/1 to generate a log when the outbound interface rate exceeds
80% of the bandwidth.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] log-threshold output-rate 80

# Configure GE0/0/1 to generate a log when the outbound interface rate exceeds
80% of the bandwidth and to clear a log when the outbound interface rate is
lower than 60% of the bandwidth.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] log-threshold output-rate 80 resume-rate 60

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1616

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

4.2.43 log-threshold input-discard output-discard (interface

view)
Function
The log-threshold input-discard command sets the threshold for packet loss
caused by congestion and interval for collecting statistics on discarded packets in
the inbound direction of an interface.
The log-threshold output-discard command sets the threshold for packet loss
caused by congestion and interval for collecting statistics on discarded packets in
the outbound direction of an interface.
The undo log-threshold input-discard command restores the default settings.
The undo log-threshold output-discard command restores the default settings.
By default, the threshold for packet loss caused by congestion in the inbound or
outbound direction of an interface is 300, and the interval for collecting statistics
on discarded packets in the inbound or outbound direction of an interface is 300s.

Format
log-threshold { input-discard | output-discard } [ threshold-value interval
interval-value ]
undo log-threshold { input-discard | output-discard }

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

input-discard Records logs about packet loss -

caused by congestion in the
inbound direction of an interface.

output-discard Records logs about packet loss -

caused by congestion in the
outbound direction of an
interface.

threshold-value Specifies the packet loss threshold The value is an integer in

for triggering a log. the range from 100 to
4294967295.

interval interval- Specifies the interval for collecting The value is an integer in
value statistics on discarded packets due the range from 60 to
to congestion. 86400, in seconds.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1617

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Views
Ethernet interface view, GE interface view, XGE interface view, 25GE interface view,
40GE interface view, 100GE interface view, port group view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

Network congestion during service transmission may cause packet loss. If a lot of
packets are discarded, services are affected. To better monitor the number of
discarded packets, you can run the log-threshold output-discard or log-
threshold input-discard command to set the threshold for packet loss caused by
congestion and interval for collecting statistics on discarded packets in the
inbound or outbound direction of an interface. The device generates a log when
the number of discarded incoming and outgoing packets on the interface in a
specified period exceeds the threshold. Logs help you know the congestion on the
interface. You can determine whether to increase the bandwidth or cancel the
bandwidth limit on the interface based on the logs. In this way, the congestion
problem can be solved.

Precautions

● If the number of discarded incoming and outgoing packets falls below the
threshold in a specified period, the device generates a log indicating that the
number of discarded packets falls below the threshold.
● If the number of discarded packets exceeds the threshold in an interval for
collecting statistics on discarded packets, the device immediately generates a
log indicating that the number of discarded packets exceeds the threshold,
and enters the next statistics interval. In the next statistics interval, the
number of discarded packets on an interface is calculated using the following
formula:
Number of discarded packets = Current number of discarded packets -
Number of discarded packets in the beginning of the statistics interval
● If the number of discarded packets exceeds the threshold in several
consecutive statistics intervals, the device only generates a log in the first
statistics interval, indicating that the number of discarded packets exceeds the
threshold. If the number of discarded packets falls below the threshold, the
device generates a log indicating that the number of discarded packets falls
below the threshold. If the number of discarded packets on an interface
exceeds the threshold again, the device will generate a log indicating that the
number of discarded packets exceeds the threshold.
● If the user log function is disabled in the system view, the user log function no
longer takes effect in the interface view. To record user logs, run the log-
threshold { input-discard | output-discard }* command in the system view to
enable the log function first.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1618

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Example
# Set the threshold for packet loss caused by congestion to 100 and interval for
collecting statistics on discarded packets to 60 seconds in the inbound direction of
GE0/0/1.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] log-threshold input-discard 100 interval 60

4.2.44 log-threshold
Function
The log-threshold command enables the log function for packet loss caused by
congestion on all interfaces of a device.
The undo log-threshold command disables the log function for packet loss
caused by congestion on all interfaces of a device.
By default, the log function is enabled for packet loss caused by congestion on all
interfaces of a device.

Format
log-threshold { input-discard | output-discard }*

undo log-threshold { input-discard | output-discard }*

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

input-discard Records logs about packet loss caused by congestion in -

the inbound direction of an interface.

output-discard Records logs about packet loss caused by congestion in -

the outbound direction of an interface.

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
Enable or disable the log function for packet loss caused by congestion on all
interfaces of a device in the system view.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1619

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Example
# Enable the log function for inbound packet loss cased by congestion on a device.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] log-threshold input-discard

4.2.45 loopback
Function
The loopback command enables loopback detection on an interface.
The undo loopback command disables loopback detection on an interface.
By default, loopback detection is not configured.

Format
loopback internal
undo loopback

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

internal Configures internal -

loopback detection on a
specified interface.

Views
Ethernet interface view, GE interface view, XGE interface view, 25GE interface
view, 40GE interface view, 100GE interface view, port group view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
When testing some special functions, for example, locating an Ethernet fault, you
need to enable loopback detection on Ethernet interfaces to check whether the
interfaces are working properly. After loopback detection is enabled on an
Ethernet interface, the interface is in Up state if it works properly, and is in Down
state if it fails.
Follow-up Procedure
Run the display interface command to check whether the current status of the
interface configured with internal loopback is Up. If the current status of the

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1620

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

interface is Up, the internal forwarding function works well; otherwise, a fault
occurs during internal forwarding.
After loopback detection is enabled on an interface, the Speed field in the display
this interface command output indicates the configured interface rate or the rate
of the installed optical module, copper module, or network cable, and the
Bandwidth field in the display interface ethernet brief command output
indicates the actual interface rate. Installing and then removing the optical or
copper module or restarting the device may affect the actual interface rate.
Precautions
● Loopback detection interrupts the operation of Ethernet interfaces and links.
After loopback detection is performed, run the undo loopback command to
disable loopback detection immediately.
● You cannot run the loopback command to perform loopback detection on a
fabric port.
● The loopback command and the single-fiber enable command cannot be
configured on the same interface.

Example
# Configure loopback detection on GE0/0/1.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] loopback internal
Warning: The configuration may cause loops.

4.2.46 loopbacktest
Function
The loopbacktest command configures internal loopback detection on an
interface.
By default, internal loopback detection is not configured.

Format
loopbacktest internal

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1621

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

internal Configures internal -

loopback detection.
Internal loopback
detection is used to
check whether the
internal forwarding chip
controls forwarding on
the interface correctly.
● If the test packet is
received, the internal
forwarding chip
functions properly.
● If the test packet is
not received, the
internal forwarding
chip is faulty.

Views
Ethernet interface view, GE interface view, XGE interface view, MultiGE interface
view, 25GE interface view, 40GE interface view, 100GE interface view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
You can run the loopbacktest command to check whether the internal forwarding
chip functions properly.

NOTE

Loopback detection is not required when an interface is shut down.

Loopback detection is not supported on a service stack interface.
The internal loopback detection result can be used only when no service is configured on
the switch.
You cannot run the loopbacktest command to perform loopback detection on a fabric port.
After the energy-saving mode is set to basic or deep, loopback detection is disabled on an
interface. Therefore, before performing loopback detection, set the energy-saving mode to
standard.

Example
# Configure internal loopback detection on GE0/0/1.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1622

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] loopbacktest internal

Warning: This command may conflict with other service configurations. It can only be used on a device with
no configuration. Continu
e?[Y/N]:y
Info: This operation may take a few seconds. Please wait for a moment....................
Info: Loopback packet test succeeded.

4.2.47 mdi
Function
The mdi command configures the medium dependent interface (MDI) mode of an
Ethernet electrical interface.
The undo mdi command restores the default MDI mode of an Ethernet electrical
interface.
By default, an Ethernet electrical interface automatically identifies the network
cable type.

Format
mdi { across | auto | normal }
undo mdi

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

across Sets the MDI mode of an -

Ethernet electrical
interface to across.

auto Sets the MDI mode of an -

Ethernet electrical
interface to auto. An
Ethernet electrical
interface automatically
identifies the network
cable type.

normal Sets the MDI mode of an -

Ethernet electrical
interface to normal.

Views
Ethernet interface view, GE interface view, XGE interface view, MultiGE interface
view, 25GE interface view, port group view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1623

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
Twisted pairs used to connect Ethernet devices include:
● Straight-through cable: connects devices of different types, such as a switch
and a PC or a switch and a router.
● Crossover cable: connects devices of the same type, such as two switches, two
routers, or two PCs.
Generally, if two interfaces are connected with a twisted-pair cable, the receive pin
on the local end must be connected to the transmit pin on the remote end and
the transmit pin on the local end must be connected to the receive pin on the
remote end so that a link can be Up. According to pin assignment, twisted-pair
cables are classified into straight-through and crossover cables. The device must
support negotiation and crossover of receive and transmit pins so that Ethernet
electrical interfaces can support the two types of twisted-pair cables. The device
supports the following medium dependent interface (MDI) modes: auto, normal,
and across.
Generally, when interfaces at both ends work in auto mode, devices can
communicate regardless of whether the straight-through or crossover cable is
used. Set the MDI mode to normal or across only when the device cannot identify
the network cable type. When configuring an MDI mode on an interface, pay
attention to the following points:
● When a straight-through cable is used, the local and remote interfaces must
use different MDI modes, for example, across mode on one end and normal
mode on the other end.
● When a crossover cable is used, the local and remote interfaces must use the
same MDI mode. For example, both ends must use the across or normal
mode, or at least one end uses the auto mode

NOTE

Electrical interfaces support the MDI type configuration.

The XGE electrical interfaces on the ES5D21X08T00 card of the S5731-H, and S5731S-H can
only use the auto MDI type.
The MDI type can be configured on an optical interface that has a GE copper module
installed. Before installing a GE copper module on a 25GE optical interface, you need to run
the port mode ge command to configure the interface to work at the rate of 1 Gbit/s.

Example
# Set the MDI mode of GE0/0/1 to across.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] mdi across

4.2.48 negotiation active

Function
The negotiation active command configures an interface to work in slave mode.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1624

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

The undo negotiation active command cancels the slave mode configuration on
an interface.

By default, an interface does not work in slave mode.

Format
negotiation active

undo negotiation active

Parameters
None

Views
MultiGE interface view, port group view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

When a MultiGE interface on a Huawei switch is connected to an interface on a

Cisco AP, the two interfaces may both support 2.5 Gbit/s or higher rates, but
cannot negotiate to work in the highest rate. You can configure the MultiGE
interface on the Huawei switch to work in slave mode (the interface on the Cisco
AP works in master mode). The two interfaces then can negotiate to work in the
highest rate supported by both of them to improve the data transmission
capability.

Precautions
● It is recommended that you run this command on an interface working in
auto-negotiation mode.
● When MultiGE interfaces of two switches are connected, you cannot configure
the negotiation active command on the MultiGE interfaces simultaneously;
otherwise, the MultiGE interfaces cannot go Up.

Example
# Configure MultiGE 0/0/1 to work in slave mode.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface MultiGE 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-MultiGE0/0/1] negotiation active

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1625

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

4.2.49 negotiation auto

Function
The negotiation auto command configures an Ethernet interface to work in auto-
negotiation mode.
The undo negotiation auto command configures an Ethernet interface to work in
non-auto negotiation mode.
By default, an Ethernet interface works in auto-negotiation mode.

Format
negotiation auto
undo negotiation auto

Parameters
None

Views
Ethernet interface view, GE interface view, XGE interface view, MultiGE interface
view, 25GE interface view, port group view, Meth interface view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
Earlier Ethernet worked in 10M half-duplex mode and required mechanisms such
as Carrier Sense Multiple Access (CSMA)/Collision Detection (CD) to ensure
system stability. As Ethernet technology develops, full-duplex Ethernet and 100
Mbit/s Ethernet emerge. This greatly improves Ethernet performance. Auto-
negotiation technology allows new Ethernet to be compatible with earlier
Ethernet. In auto-negotiation mode, interfaces on both ends of a link negotiate
their operating parameters, including the duplex mode and rate. If the negotiation
succeeds, the two interfaces work at the same operating parameters.
Precautions
● For details about Ethernet interfaces supporting the auto-negotiation
function, see Licensing Requirements and Limitations for Ethernet Interfaces.
● By default, auto-negotiation is enabled on GE optical interfaces and rate
auto-negotiation is disabled. You can run the speed auto-negotiation
command to enable rate auto-negotiation.
● When a GE optical module is installed on an XGE optical interface, the
interface works in auto-negotiation mode by default. To configure the
interface to work in non-auto-negotiation mode, run the undo negotiation

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1626

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

auto command. If you replace the GE optical module with an XGE optical
module, the interface does not support the auto-negotiation mode and works
in non-auto-negotiation mode by default. If you replace the XGE optical
module with a GE optical module, the undo negotiation auto command
configuration becomes ineffective. If you need the interface to still work in
non-auto-negotiation mode, reconfigure this command.
● After configuring the auto-negotiation function on an interface, if you remove
and install a single optical fiber on the interface, the interface may be Up and
the remote interface may be Down. You can run the shutdown and undo
shutdown commands on the remote interface to make the remote interface
go Up.

Example
# Configure GE0/0/1 to work in non-auto negotiation mode.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] undo negotiation auto

4.2.50 negotiation priority

Function
The negotiation priority command configures the protocol that a MultiGE
interface in auto-negotiation mode preferentially uses.
The undo negotiation priority command restores the default protocol that a
MultiGE interface in auto-negotiation mode preferentially uses.
By default, a MultiGE interface in auto-negotiation mode preferentially uses IEEE
802.3bz.

NOTE

Only multi-GE interfaces on the S5720-28X-PWH-LI-AC, S5720-28X-PWH-LI-ACF, S5732-

H48XUM2CC, S5736-S24UM4XC, S5732-H24UM2CC (part number: 02353HUC/
02353HUC-003/02353HUC-004/02353SJY/
02353SJY-001/02353SJY-004/02353SJY-010/02353SJY-011/02353SJY-014/02353SJY-015/02353SJY
-016/02353SJY-019/02353SJY-002/02353SJY-003/02353SJY-012/02353SJY-013/02353SJY-017/023
53SJY-018), S5732-H48UM2CC (part number: 02353HUB/
02353HUB-002/02353HUB-003/02353SJT/
02353SJT-001/02353SJT-003/02353SJT-004/02353SJT-010/02353SJT-011/02353SJT-013/02353SJT
-014/02353SJT-015/02353SJT-016/02353SJT-018/02353SJT-002) support this command.

Format
negotiation priority { 802.3bz | mgbase-t }
undo negotiation priority

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1627

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

802.3bz Configures IEEE 802.3bz as the protocol that a MultiGE -

interface in auto-negotiation mode preferentially uses.

mgbase-t Configures Mgbase-t as the protocol that a MultiGE interface -

in auto-negotiation mode preferentially uses.
NOTE
Only the S5732-H24UM2CC, S5732-H48XUM2CC, and S5732-
H48UM2CC do not support this parameter.

Views
MultiGE interface view, port group view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
If the peer device supports 2.5 Gbit/s or 5 Gbit/s rate when the peer device
connects to the MultiGE interface of Huawei switch and the peer device uses the
proprietary protocol Mgbase-t of the Broadcom company, the MultiGE interface of
the interconnected Huawei switch may fail to be enabled. You can configure
Mgbase-t as the protocol that the MultiGE interface on the Huawei switch
preferentially uses, so that the MultiGE interface can be properly enabled.

Example
# Configure Mgbase-t as the protocol that a MultiGE interface in auto-negotiation
mode preferentially uses.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface MultiGE 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-MultiGE0/0/1] negotiation priority mgbase-t

4.2.51 port clock-mode slave

Function
The port clock-mode slave command sets the clock negotiation mode of an XGE
electrical interface to the slave mode.
The undo port clock-mode slave command restores the clock negotiation mode
of an XGE electrical interface to the auto-negotiation mode.
By default, the clock negotiation mode of an XGE electrical interface is the auto-
negotiation mode.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1628

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

NOTE

Only the XGE electrical interfaces of the ES5D21X08T00 cards support this command.

Format
port clock-mode slave

undo port clock-mode slave

Parameters
None

Views
XGE interface view, port group view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

On a modern communications network, most telecommunications services require

that the frequency offset or time difference between devices be in an acceptable
range. When an XGE electrical interface on an ES5D21X08T00 card of a Huawei
device connects to a non-Huawei device, the clock negotiation mode of the XGE
electrical interface on the local device is auto-negotiation by default. The two
devices determine the master/slave relationship based on the negotiation result
and perform network clock synchronization. When the local device negotiates to
become the master device, the interfaces on both ends may fail to go Up or their
rate may decrease due to the impact of the non-Huawei device. In this case, run
the port clock-mode slave command to set the clock negotiation mode of the
XGE electrical interface of the local device to the slave mode. This configuration
ensures clock synchronization between the two devices.

Precautions

If the interfaces on both ends are configured to work in slave mode, clock
negotiation will fail and the interfaces cannot go Up.

Example
# Set the clock negotiation mode of an XGE electrical interface to slave.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface XGigabitEthernet 0/1/1
[HUAWEI-XGigabitEthernet0/1/1] port clock-mode slave

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1629

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

4.2.52 port link-flap interval

Function
The port link-flap interval command sets the link flapping detection interval.
The undo port link-flap interval command restores the default link flapping
detection interval.
By default, the link flapping detection interval is 10s.

Format
port link-flap interval interval-value
undo port link-flap interval

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

interval interval-value Specifies the link The value is an integer

flapping detection that ranges from 5 to
interval. 600, in seconds. The
default value is 10s.

Views
Ethernet interface view, GE interface view, XGE interface view, MultiGE interface
view, 25GE interface view, 40GE interface view, 100GE interface view, port group
view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
Link flapping occurs when the physical status of an interface frequently alternates
between Up and Down due to network flapping or network cable faults. Link
flapping causes frequent network topology changes and affects user
communication. For example, two links work in primary/backup mode. If the
interface of the primary link experiences frequent Up/Down transitions, flows are
switched between the primary and backup links. Frequent service switchovers
increase load of the device and may result in service data loss.
Link flapping protection can solve the problem. You can configure this function to
disable an interface that frequently alternates between Up and Down. When the
interface is Down, the network topology will not change frequently. In the
preceding example, you can configure link flapping protection on the interface of
the primary link to prevent frequent topology changes. When the system detects

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1630

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

frequent physical status changes on the interface of the primary link, the system
directly disables the interface to trigger a primary/backup link switchover. The
backup link then steadily transmits services. The link flapping protection function
involves the following parameters:
● Number of link flappings: One link flapping refers to one interface Up/Down
transition.
● Link flapping period: It is a period during which the system counts the
number of link flappings.
If the number of link flappings on an interface reaches the threshold within a link
flapping period, the system disables the interface and records its status as ERROR
DOWN(link-flap), indicating that the interface is Down because of link flappings.
By default, after link flapping protection is enabled, an interface goes Down if its
status changes five times within 10 seconds.

Prerequisites

The configured interval takes effect only after link flapping protection is enabled
using the port link-flap protection enable command on the interface.

Precautions

If you run the port link-flap interval command multiple times in the same
interface view, only the latest configuration takes effect.

Example
# Set the link flapping detection interval to 50s on GE0/0/1.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] port link-flap interval 50

4.2.53 port link-flap protection enable

Function
The port link-flap protection enable command enables link flapping protection
on an interface.

The undo port link-flap protection enable command disables link flapping
protection on an interface.

By default, link flapping protection is disabled on an interface.

Format
port link-flap protection enable

undo port link-flap protection enable

Parameters
None

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1631

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Views
Ethernet interface view, GE interface view, XGE interface view, MultiGE interface
view, 25GE interface view, 40GE interface view, 100GE interface view, port group
view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
Link flapping occurs when the physical status of an interface frequently alternates
between Up and Down due to network flapping or network cable faults. Link
flapping causes frequent network topology changes and affects user
communication. For example, two links work in primary/backup mode. If the
interface of the primary link experiences frequent Up/Down transitions, flows are
switched between the primary and backup links. Frequent service switchovers
increase load of the device and may result in service data loss.
Link flapping protection can solve the problem. You can configure this function to
disable an interface that frequently alternates between Up and Down. When the
interface is Down, the network topology will not change frequently. In the
preceding example, you can configure link flapping protection on the interface of
the primary link to prevent frequent topology changes. When the system detects
frequent physical status changes on the interface of the primary link, the system
directly disables the interface to trigger a primary/backup link switchover. The
backup link then steadily transmits services. The link flapping protection function
involves the following parameters:
● Number of link flappings: One link flapping refers to one interface Up/Down
transition.
● Link flapping period: It is a period during which the system counts the
number of link flappings.
If the number of link flappings on an interface reaches the threshold within a link
flapping period, the system disables the interface and records its status as ERROR
DOWN(link-flap), indicating that the interface is Down because of link flappings.
By default, after link flapping protection is enabled, an interface goes Down if its
status changes five times within 10 seconds.
Follow-up Procedure
● Run the port link-flap interval interval-value command to set the link
flapping interval for the interface.
● Run the port link-flap threshold threshold-value command to set the
number of link flappings for the interface.
● An interface in Error-down state can be recovered using either of the
following methods:
– Manual recovery: If a few interfaces need to be recovered forcibly, run the
shutdown and undo shutdown commands in the interface view.
Alternatively, run the restart command in the interface view to restart
the interfaces.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1632

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

– Automatic recovery: If a large number of interfaces need to be recovered,

manual recovery is time consuming and some interfaces may be omitted.
You can run the error-down auto-recovery cause link-flap interval
interval-value command in the system view to enable automatic interface
recovery and set the recovery delay time. An interface in Error-down state
automatically recovers when the specified delay time expires.

Example
# Enable link flapping protection on GE0/0/1.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] port link-flap protection enable

4.2.54 port link-flap threshold

Function
The port link-flap threshold command sets the maximum number of link
flapping events on an interface.

The undo port link-flap threshold command restores the default maximum
number of link flapping events on an interface.

By default, the maximum number of link flapping events is 5.

Format
port link-flap threshold threshold-value

undo port link-flap threshold

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

threshold threshold- Specifies the maximum The value is an integer

value number of link flapping that ranges from 1 to 10.
events on an interface. The default value is 5.

Views
Ethernet interface view, GE interface view, XGE interface view, MultiGE interface
view, 25GE interface view, 40GE interface view, 100GE interface view, port group
view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1633

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
Link flapping occurs when the physical status of an interface frequently alternates
between Up and Down due to network flapping or network cable faults. Link
flapping causes frequent network topology changes and affects user
communication. For example, two links work in primary/backup mode. If the
interface of the primary link experiences frequent Up/Down transitions, flows are
switched between the primary and backup links. Frequent service switchovers
increase load of the device and may result in service data loss.
Link flapping protection can solve the problem. You can configure this function to
disable an interface that frequently alternates between Up and Down. When the
interface is Down, the network topology will not change frequently. In the
preceding example, you can configure link flapping protection on the interface of
the primary link to prevent frequent topology changes. When the system detects
frequent physical status changes on the interface of the primary link, the system
directly disables the interface to trigger a primary/backup link switchover. The
backup link then steadily transmits services. The link flapping protection function
involves the following parameters:
● Number of link flappings: One link flapping refers to one interface Up/Down
transition.
● Link flapping period: It is a period during which the system counts the
number of link flappings.
If the number of link flappings on an interface reaches the threshold within a link
flapping period, the system disables the interface and records its status as ERROR
DOWN(link-flap), indicating that the interface is Down because of link flappings.
By default, after link flapping protection is enabled, an interface goes Down if its
status changes five times within 10 seconds.
Prerequisites
The port link-flap threshold command configuration takes effect only after link
flapping protection is enabled using the port link-flap protection enable
command on the interface.
Precautions
If you run the port link-flap threshold command multiple times in the same
interface view, only the latest configuration takes effect.

Example
# Set the maximum number of link flapping events on GE0/0/1 to 10.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] port link-flap threshold 10

4.2.55 port-group
Function
The port-group command creates a permanent port group and displays the
permanent port group view.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1634

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

The undo port-group command deletes permanent port groups.

By default, no permanent port group is configured.

Format
port-group port-group-name
undo port-group { all | port-group-name }

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

port-group- Specifies the name of a The value is a string of 1 to 32

name permanent interface case-insensitive characters
group. The value cannot without spaces. When double
conflict with the group- quotation marks are used
member keyword. For around the string, spaces are
example, the name allowed in the string.
cannot be g, gr, or group- NOTE
m. A permanent port group cannot be
named all. Meanwhile, to avoid a
usage conflict between the port-
group group-member command
and port-group-name, do not
specify g, group-member, or first
letters of group-member as the
name of a permanent interface
group.

all Deletes all port groups. -

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
If you need to perform the same operations on multiple Ethernet interfaces,
configuring each interface one by one easily causes incorrect configurations and is
labor-intensive.
The port group function easily solves the problem. You can add all the Ethernet
interfaces to the same port group. After you run a configuration command once in
the port group view, the configuration takes effect on all the Ethernet interfaces in
the port group, reducing the configuration workload.
Two types of port groups are available:

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1635

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

● Temporary port group: To temporarily deliver a configuration to multiple

interfaces, you can create a temporary port group. After you deliver the
configuration and exit from the port group view, the system automatically
deletes the temporary port group.
● Permanent port group: To deliver configurations to interfaces multiple times,
you can create a permanent port group. After you exit from the port group
view, the port group and member interfaces in the group still exist, facilitating
subsequent batch configuration for the member interfaces. To delete a
permanent port group, run the undo port-group { all | port-group-name }
command.
Follow-up Procedure
Run the group-member command to add Ethernet interfaces to the created
permanent port group.
Precautions
● The system supports a maximum of 32 permanent port groups and each port
group supports a maximum of 48 member interfaces.
● Deleting a permanent port group will not clear the configurations of an
interface in the port group.

Example
# Create port group portgroup1 and enter the port group view.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] port-group portgroup1
[HUAWEI-port-group-portgroup1]

4.2.56 port-group group-member

Function
The port-group group-member command creates a temporary port group and
adds specified Ethernet interfaces to the temporary port group. Commands
configured for a temporary port group will be automatically run on all member
interfaces.
By default, no temporary port group is created.

Format
port-group group-member { interface-type interface-number1 [ to interface-type
interface-number2 ] } &<1-10>

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1636

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
interface-type Specifies Ethernet interfaces to be The value of
interface-number1 added to a temporary port group. interface-number2
[ to interface-type must be larger than
interface-number2 ] to indicates an interface range. All the value of
interfaces numbered between interface-number1.
interface-number1 and interface-
number2 are added to the
temporary port group.

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
If you need to perform the same operations on multiple Ethernet interfaces,
configuring each interface one by one easily causes incorrect configurations and is
labor-intensive.
The port group function easily solves the problem. You can add all the Ethernet
interfaces to the same port group. After you run a configuration command once in
the port group view, the configuration takes effect on all the Ethernet interfaces in
the port group, reducing the configuration workload.
Two types of port groups are available:
● Temporary port group: To temporarily deliver a configuration to multiple
interfaces, you can create a temporary port group. After you deliver the
configuration and exit from the port group view, the system automatically
deletes the temporary port group.
● Permanent port group: To deliver configurations to interfaces multiple times,
you can create a permanent port group. After you exit from the port group
view, the port group and member interfaces in the group still exist, facilitating
subsequent batch configuration for the member interfaces. To delete a
permanent port group, run the undo port-group { all | port-group-name }
command.
Configuration Impact
If the port-group group-member command is run more than once, all
configurations take effect.
Precautions
● The port-group group-member command is equivalent to the group-
member command executed in the permanent port group view. Multiple

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1637

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

interfaces can be added to a permanent port group in batches using the

group-member command.
● When you specify the keyword to in the port-group group-member
command:
– The interfaces specified by interface-number1 and interface-number2
must reside on the same member switch. To add contiguous interfaces on
different member switches to the same port group, run this command
several times or use the keyword to several times.
– The interfaces specified by interface-number1 and interface-number2
must be of the same type, for example, both of the interfaces are GE
interfaces.
– The interfaces specified before and after the keyword to must have the
same attribute. For example, both of them are main interfaces or sub-
interfaces. If they are sub-interfaces, they must belong to the same main
interface.
– If to is not specified, the preceding limitations do not apply.
– Only the S5731-H, S5731-S, S5731S-H, S5731S-S, S5732-H, S6735-S,
S6720-EI, S6720S-EI, S6730-H, S6730S-H, S6730-S, and S6730S-S support
sub-interfaces.

Example
# Add GE0/0/1, GE0/0/2, and GE0/0/3 to a temporary port group.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] port-group group-member gigabitethernet 0/0/1 to gigabitethernet 0/0/3
[HUAWEI-port-group]

4.2.57 port-isolate enable

Function
The port-isolate enable command enables port isolation.

The undo port-isolate enable command disables port isolation.

By default, port isolation is disabled.

Format
port-isolate enable [ group group-id ]

undo port-isolate enable [ group group-id ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

group group-id Specifies the ID of a port The value is an integer

isolation group. that ranges from 1 to 64.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1638

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Views
Ethernet interface view, GE interface view, XGE interface view, MultiGE interface
view, 40GE interface view, 100GE interface view, 25GE interface view, , port group
view, Eth-Trunk interface view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
To implement Layer 2 isolation between interfaces, add different interfaces to
different VLANs. This, however, wastes VLAN resources. To save VLAN resources,
enable port isolation to isolate interfaces in a VLAN. That is, you can add
interfaces to a port isolation group to implement Layer 2 isolation between these
interfaces. Port isolation provides secure and flexible networking schemes for
customers.
Precautions
● After port isolation is configured, ports are isolated at Layer 2 but can
communicate at Layer 3 by default. To configure both Layer 2 isolation and
Layer 3 isolation, run the port-isolate mode all command.
● Interfaces in a port isolation group are isolated from each other, but
interfaces in different port isolation groups can communicate. If group-id is
not specified, interfaces are added to port isolation group 1 by default.
● There is no limit on the number of members in a port isolation group on the
S200, S1730S-S, and S1730S-S1. The maximum number of members in a port
isolation group on other switch models is 512.
● In the same VLAN, if the mac-address learning disable command is run to
disable MAC address learning and traffic is forwarded in broadcast mode, the
device first copies the traffic received on the inbound interface before
checking whether port isolation is configured, though port isolation has been
configured. When the copied traffic exceeds the chip performance, the device
discards the traffic, resulting in packet loss in forwarding.

Example
# Enable port isolation on GE0/0/1.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] port-isolate enable group 1

4.2.58 port-isolate exclude vlan

Function
The port-isolate exclude vlan command excludes a VLAN where port isolation
needs to be disabled.
The undo port-isolate exclude vlan command cancels the configuration.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1639

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

By default, no VLAN is excluded when port isolation is configured.

Format
port-isolate exclude vlan { vlan-id1 [ to vlan-id2 ] } &<1-10>
undo port-isolate exclude vlan { vlan-id1 [ to vlan-id2 ] } &<1-10>

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

vlan-id1 Specifies the ID of a The value is an integer

VLAN. that ranges from 1 to
4094.

vlan-id2 Specifies the ID of a The value is an integer

VLAN. that ranges from 1 to
4094.

vlan-id1 to vlan-id2 Specifies VLAN IDs in a The values of vlan-id1

batch. and vlan-id2 are integers
● vlan-id1 specifies the that range from 1 to
first VLAN ID. 4094.
● vlan-id2 specifies the
last VLAN ID.
vlan-id2 must be
greater than vlan-id1.
vlan-id1 and vlan-id2
determine a VLAN
range.
● If you do not specify
to vlan-id2, only one
VLAN is specified.

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
To enable communication between users in a VLAN where port isolation needs to
be disabled, run the port-isolate exclude vlan command to exclude the VLAN.
Only S1720GW, S1720GW-E, S1720GWR, S1720GWR-E, S1720GF, S1720GFR-P,
S2720-EI, S5720I-SI, S5720-LI, S5720S-LI, S5735S-H, S5736-S, S5731-H, S5731-S,
S5731S-H, S5731S-S, S5732-H, S6730-H, S6730S-H, S6730-S, and S6730S-S
support this command.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1640

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Example
# Exclude VLAN 10 where port isolation needs to be disabled.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] port-isolate exclude vlan 10

4.2.59 protect-group member

Function
The protect-group member command adds the specified Ethernet interface to an
interface protection group.
The undo protect-group member command deletes an Ethernet interface from
an interface protection group.
By default, no Ethernet interface is added to an interface protection group.

Format
protect-group member interface-type interface-number { master | standby }
undo protect-group member interface-type interface-number

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

interface-type interface- Specifies the type and -

number number of the interface
to be added to an
interface protection
group.

master Indicates the working -

interface.

standby Indicates the protected -

interface.

Views
Interface protection group view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
Hosts are usually connected to an external network through a default gateway. If
the outbound interface of the default gateway fails, the hosts cannot

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1641

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

communicate with the external network, interrupting normal service transmission

and degrading device reliability. The port protection function solves this problem.
Without changing the networking, you can add two interfaces on the device to a
port protection group to implement interface backup in active/standby mode.
When the active interface fails, services are immediately switched to the standby
interface, ensuring non-stop service transmission.

Prerequisites

An interface protection group has been created using the port protect-group
command.

Precautions

An interface protection group contains only a working interface and a protected

interface.

Example
# Add GigabitEthernet0/0/1 to an interface protection group.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] port protect-group 1
[HUAWEI-protect-group1] protect-group member gigabitethernet 0/0/1 master

4.2.60 port mode ge (25GE interface)

Function
The port mode ge command configures a 25GE interface to work at the rate of 1
Gbit/s.

The undo port mode command restores the rate of a 25GE interface to 25 Gbit/s.

By default, when a 25GE medium is installed on a 25GE interface, the interface

works at the rate of 25 Gbit/s; when an XGE medium is installed on a 25GE
interface, the interface works at the rate of 10 Gbit/s; when a GE medium is
installed on a 25GE interface, the interface cannot go Up.

NOTE

The S5732-H24UM2CC (part number: 02353HUC/02353HUC-003/02353HUC-004/02353SJY/

02353SJY-001/02353SJY-004/02353SJY-010/02353SJY-011/02353SJY-014/02353SJY-015/0235
3SJY-016/02353SJY-019/02353SJY-002/02353SJY-003/02353SJY-012/02353SJY-013/02353SJY
-017/02353SJY-018), S5732-H48UM2CC (part number: 02353HUB/
02353HUB-002/02353HUB-003/02353SJT/
02353SJT-001/02353SJT-003/02353SJT-004/02353SJT-010/02353SJT-011/02353SJT-013/0235
3SJT-014/02353SJT-015/02353SJT-016/02353SJT-018/02353SJT-002) S5732-H48XUM2CC,
S6730-H28Y4C, S6730-H24X4Y4C, and S7Y08000 cards support this command.
This command is supported when the interface working mode of the S7X08000 card is set
to 25GE using the set card port-config-mode 25g-port enable command.

Format
port mode ge

undo port mode

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1642

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Parameters
None

Views
25GE interface view, port group view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
A 25GE interface can work at the rate of 1 Gbit/s. You can configure the rate as
required and replace the transmission medium.
On the S6730-H28Y4C, each group of interfaces numbered 1 to 4, 5 to 8, 9 to 16,
17 to 20, 21 to 24, and 25 to 28 belong to an interface group. On the S7X08000
and S7X0800K0 cards, every four of interfaces numbered 1 to 4, 5 to 8, 9 to 12,
and so on belong to an interface group, all interfaces in the same interface group
will be configured to work at the same rate.
Precautions
● Configure the remote interface to work at the same rate as that of the local
interface.
● Ensure that all interfaces in the interface group in which the interface rate is
to be changed are in Down status before running this command. If the status
of an interface is Up, run the shutdown command on the interface and then
change the interface rate.
● For the S5732-H24UM2CC, S5732-H48UM2CC, S5732-H48XUM2CC, S6730-
H28Y4C, S6730-H24X4Y4C, and S7Y08000 cards, after the port mode ge
command is run on an interface, if any of the four 25GE interfaces in an
interface group is Up, the command configuration will not be cleared after
the clear configuration this or clear configuration interface command is
run. If all the four 25GE ports in an interface group are Down, the command
configuration will be cleared after the clear configuration this or clear
configuration interface command is run.
● For the S7X08000 card, after the port mode ge command is run on an
interface, if one of two 25GE interfaces is Up, the command configuration will
not be cleared after the clear configuration this or clear configuration
interface command is run. If both 25GE interfaces are Down, the command
configuration will be cleared after the clear configuration this or clear
configuration interface command is run.
● After the port mode ge command is run on a specific interface, running the
clear configuration this or clear configuration interface command will not
clear the port mode ge command configuration if some other interfaces in
the interface group where the specific interface belongs are Up. When all the
interfaces in the interface group are Down, running the clear configuration
this or clear configuration interface command will clear the port mode ge
command configuration.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1643

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

● 25GE interfaces split from other interfaces cannot work at the rate of 1 Gbit/s.

Example
# Configure a 25GE interface to work at the rate of 1 Gbit/s.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface 25ge 0/1/1
[HUAWEI-25GE0/1/1] port mode ge
Warning:The interface(s)(25GE0/1/1,25GE0/1/2) will be converted to GE mode.[Y/N]:y
Info: This operation may take a few seconds. Please wait for a moment....done.

4.2.61 port-isolate mode

Function
The port-isolate mode command sets the port isolation mode.
The undo port-isolate mode command restores the default port isolation mode.
By default, ports are isolated at Layer 2 but can communicate at Layer 3.

Format
port-isolate mode { l2 | all }
undo port-isolate mode

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

l2 Indicates that ports are -

isolated at Layer 2 but
can communicate at
Layer 3.

all Indicates that ports are -

isolated at both Layer 2
and Layer 3.

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
To implement Layer 2 isolation between interfaces, you can add different
interfaces to different VLANs. This wastes VLAN resources. Port isolation can

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1644

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

isolate interfaces in the same VLAN. That is, you only need to add interfaces to a
port isolation group to implement Layer 2 isolation between these interfaces. Port
isolation provides secure and flexible networking schemes.
You can configure the interface isolation mode to all to implement Layer 2 and
Layer 3 isolation between interfaces in a port isolation group.

NOTE

The S2720-EI, S5720-LI, S1730S-H, S2730S-S, S5735-L-I, S5735-L1,S300, S500, S5735-L,

S5735S-L, S5735S-L1, S5735S-L-M, and S5720S-LI support isolation at Layer 2 and
interworking at Layer 3, and do not support this command.

Example
# Configure Layer 2 isolation and Layer 3 communication.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] port-isolate mode l2

4.2.62 port media type (GE interface view)

Function
The port media type command determines whether an interface configuration
item belongs to an optical or electrical interface.
The undo port media type command restores the default settings.

Format
port media type { copper | fiber }
undo port media type { copper | fiber }

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

copper Determines that the -

interface configuration
item belongs to a combo
interface or GE interface
that is equipped with a
copper module and
works as an electrical
interface.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1645

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Parameter Description Value

fiber Determines that the -

interface configuration
item belongs to a combo
interface or GE interface
that is equipped with a
copper module and
works as an optical
interface.

Views
GE interface view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
This command only distinguishes optical interface configuration and electrical
interface configuration, and is not configurable.

If you have specified the interface attributes (such as auto-negotiation, speed, and
full-duplex mode) on a combo interface, the system automatically generates this
command to determine whether an interface configuration item belongs to the
optical interface or electrical interface. After this command is generated, the
configuration for the other interface type (such as optical interface) will not be
lost if the combo interface works as an electrical interface.

For example, after you run the display this command on a combo interface, the
interface configuration is as follows:
#
interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1
port media type copper
undo negotiation auto
speed 100
port media type fiber
undo negotiation auto
#

The command output shows that there are two configuration items undo
negotiation auto and speed 100 when the combo interface works as an electrical
interface and one configuration item undo negotiation auto when the combo
interface works as an optical interface.

Example
None

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1646

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

4.2.63 port media type (XGE interface view)

Function
The port media type command determines whether an interface configuration
item belongs to the optical or electrical interface.
The undo port media type command restores the default settings.

Format
port media type { copper | fiber }
undo port media type { copper | fiber }

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

copper Determines the interface -

configuration item
belongs to an XGE
interface that is
equipped with a copper
module and works as an
electrical interface.

fiber Determines the interface -

configuration item
belongs to an XGE
interface that is
equipped with a copper
module and works as an
optical interface.

Views
XGE interface view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
This command cannot be manually configured and belongs to internal
implementation commands. This command only distinguishes optical interface
configuration and electrical interface configuration, and is not configurable.
If you have installed a copper module on an XGE interface and specified the
interface attributes (such as auto-negotiation, speed, and full-duplex mode), the
system automatically generates this command to determine whether an interface
configuration item belongs to the optical or electrical interface.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1647

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

For example, after you run the display this command on an XGE interface, the
interface configuration is as follows:
#
interface XGigabitEthernet0/0/1
port media type copper
mdi across
port media type fiber
als enable
#

The command output indicates that there is one configuration item mdi across
when the XGE interface works as an electrical interface and one configuration
item als enable when the XGE interface works as an optical interface.

Example
None

4.2.64 port media type (25GE interface view)

Function
The port media type command determines whether an interface configuration
item belongs to an optical or electrical interface.
The undo port media type command restores the default settings.

Format
port media type { copper | fiber }
undo port media type { copper | fiber }

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

copper Determines the interface -

configuration item
belongs to a 25GE
interface that is
equipped with a GE
copper module and
works as an electrical
interface.

fiber Determines the interface -

configuration item
belongs to a 25GE
interface that is
equipped with a GE
copper module and
works as an optical
interface.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1648

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Views
25GE interface view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
This command only distinguishes optical interface configuration and electrical
interface configuration, and is not configurable.
If you have run the port mode ge command to configure a 25GE interface to
work at the rate of 1 Gbit/s, installed a GE copper module on the 25GE interface,
and specified the interface attributes (such as auto-negotiation and MDI type) for
the 25GE interface, the system automatically generates this command to
determine whether an interface configuration item belongs to the optical or
electrical interface.
For example, after you run the display this command on a 25GE interface, the
interface configuration is as follows:
#
interface 25GigabitEthernet0/0/1
port media type copper
mdi across
port media type fiber
als enable
#

The command output indicates that there is one configuration item mdi across
when the 25GE interface works as an electrical interface and one configuration
item als enable when the 25GE interface works as an optical interface.

Example
None

4.2.65 port protect-group

Function
The port protect-group command creates an interface protection group and
enters the interface protection group view.
The undo port protect-group command deletes the created interface protection
group.
By default, no interface protection group is created.

Format
port protect-group protect-group-index
undo port protect-group protect-group-index

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1649

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

protect-group-index Specifies the ID of an The value is an integer

interface protection that ranges from 0 to 63.
group.

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

Hosts are usually connected to an external network through a default gateway. If

the outbound interface of the default gateway fails, the hosts cannot
communicate with the external network, interrupting normal service transmission
and degrading device reliability. The port protection function solves this problem.
Without changing the networking, you can add two interfaces on the device to a
port protection group to implement interface backup in active/standby mode.
When the active interface fails, services are immediately switched to the standby
interface, ensuring non-stop service transmission.

Follow-up Procedure

Run the protect-group member command to add the specified Ethernet interface
to an interface protection group.

Example
# Create an interface protection group.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] port protect-group 1

4.2.66 port split

Function
The port split command splits a specified interface.

The undo port split command cancels the split configuration on an interface.

By default, an interface is not split.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1650

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

NOTE

Only the S5735S-H, S5736-S, S5731-H24T4XC, S5731-H24P4XC, S5731-H48T4XC, S5731-

H48P4XC, S5731-H24HB4XZ, S5731-H48HB4XZ, S5731S-H, S6720S-EI, and S6720-EI support
interface split and merge.

Format
port split split-type 40GE:4*XGE

undo port split

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

40GE:4*XGE Splits a specified 40GE interface into four 10GE interfaces. -

Views
XGE interface view, 40GE interface view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

To split an interface, run the port split split-type command in the view of the
interface. To merge converted interfaces into the original interface, run the undo
port split command in the view of only one of the converted interfaces.

Precautions

● After configuring interface split using the port split split-type command,
restart the interface card to make the configuration take effect.
● If interface split or merge is configured on an interface, the original
configuration on the interface is lost. Therefore, exercise caution when
deciding to perform the interface split or merge operation.
● 10GE interfaces converted from a 40GE interface are numbered based on the
number of the last 10GE interface on the switch. For interfaces on the switch
panel, if the last 10GE interface is numbered XGE 0/y/m and a 40GE interface
to be split is numbered 40GE 0/y/n, the four 10GE interfaces converted from
the 40GE interface are numbered XGE 0/y/(m + 4 * (n - 1) + z + 1). For
example, if the last 10GE interface on a switch is numbered XGE 0/0/48, the
four 10GE interfaces converted from 40GE 0/0/3 are numbered XGE 0/0/57,
XGE 0/0/58, XGE 0/0/59, and XGE 0/0/60. For interfaces on a card, m has a
fixed value of 0. For example, the four 10GE interfaces converted from 40GE
1/1/1 on a card are numbered XGE 1/1/1, XGE 1/1/2, XGE 1/1/3, and XGE
1/1/4.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1651

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

– y: indicates the subcard number.

– m: indicates the sequence number of the last 10GE interface on the
switch.
– n: indicates the sequence number of the 40GE interface.
– z: indicates the interface location. The value ranges from 0 to 3.
NOTE

Split interfaces are numbered in the same sequence as the wires of a cable are numbered.
For example, in a 1-to-4 cable, the wire numbered 1 corresponds to the interface with the
lowest interface number, and the wire numbered 4 corresponds to the interface with the
highest interface number.
● After interface split is configured, the interface and converted interfaces
cannot be added to a stack interface, regardless of whether the configuration
takes effect. If an interface has been added to a stack interface, the interface
cannot be split.
● After configuring interface split using the port split split-type 40GE:4*XGE
command, or using the undo port split command, restart the device to make
the configuration take effect. You can run the display port split command in
any view to check the status of a split interface.

Example
# Split a 40GE interface into four 10GE interfaces and restart the device to make
the configuration take effect.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface 40GE 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-40GE0/0/1] port split split-type 40GE:4*XGE
Warning: This command will take effect only after resetting the board. 40GE0/0/1 will be split up into XGE,
and the port configuration will be lost when the port type is changed. Continue? [Y/N]:y
Info: Succeeded in setting the configuration.
[HUAWEI-40GE0/0/1] return
<HUAWEI> reboot
Info: The system is now comparing the configuration, please wait.
Warning: The configuration has been modified, and it will be saved to the next startup saved-configuration
file flash:/device.cfg. Continue? [Y/N]:y
Now saving the current configuration to the slot 0.
Save the configuration successfully.
Info: If want to reboot with saving diagnostic information, input 'N' and then execute 'reboot save
diagnostic-information'.
System will reboot! Continue?[Y/N]:y

4.2.67 port serdes-mode

Function
The port serdes-mode command configures the Serdes mode of a MultiGE
interface.

The undo port serdes-mode command restores the default Serdes mode of a
MultiGE interface.

By default, a MultiGE interface can work in 1G or 10G Serdes mode.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1652

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

NOTE

This command is supported only on the following switch models:

S5732-H48XUM2CC (excluding MultiGE interfaces numbered 9 to 12), S5732-H24UM2CC
(part number: 02353HUC/02353HUC-003/02353HUC-004/02353SJY/
02353SJY-001/02353SJY-004/02353SJY-010/02353SJY-011/02353SJY-014/02353SJY-015/0235
3SJY-016/02353SJY-019/02353SJY-002/02353SJY-003/02353SJY-012/02353SJY-013/02353SJY
-017/02353SJY-018), S5732-H48UM2CC (part number: 02353HUB/
02353HUB-002/02353HUB-003/02353SJT/
02353SJT-001/02353SJT-003/02353SJT-004/02353SJT-010/02353SJT-011/02353SJT-013/0235
3SJT-014/02353SJT-015/02353SJT-016/02353SJT-018/02353SJT-002)

Format
port serdes-mode { 2500-base-x | 5000-base-x } { sgmii | xfi }
port serdes-mode sgmii xfi
undo port serdes-mode

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

2500-base-x Configures an interface to -

work in 2.5G Serdes mode.

5000-base-x Configures an interface to -

work in 5G Serdes mode.

sgmii Configures an interface to -

work in 1G Serdes mode.

xfi Configures an interface to -

work in 10G Serdes mode.

Views
MultiGE interface view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
By default, when a MultiGE interface on the S5732-H24UM2CC (part number:
02353HUC/02353HUC-003/02353HUC-004/02353SJY/
02353SJY-001/02353SJY-004/02353SJY-010/02353SJY-011/02353SJY-014/02353SJY-
015/02353SJY-016/02353SJY-019/02353SJY-002/02353SJY-003/02353SJY-012/0235
3SJY-013/02353SJY-017/02353SJY-018), S5732-H48UM2CC (part number:
02353HUB/02353HUB-002/02353HUB-003/02353SJT/

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1653

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

02353SJT-001/02353SJT-003/02353SJT-004/02353SJT-010/02353SJT-011/02353SJT-
013/02353SJT-014/02353SJT-015/02353SJT-016/02353SJT-018/02353SJT-002)
works at the rate of 2.5 Gbit/s or 5 Gbit/s, the Serdes mode of the MultiGE
interface is 10G. When a Huawei device is connected to a non-Huawei device, if
the preamble of packets sent from the non-Huawei device is not fixed, the
MultiGE interface connecting the Huawei device to the non-Huawei device
discards the packets. To prevent this problem, when a Huawei device connects to a
non-Huawei device and receives the ENTITYTRAP_1.3.6.1.4.1.2011.5.25.219.2.2.3
hwBoardFail alarm with EntityTrapFaultID being 132282, run the port serdes-
mode command to change the Serdes mode of the MultiGE interface to 2.5G or
5G based on the alarm information.

When a Huawei device connects to a non-Huawei device, the MultiGE interface

connecting the Huawei device to the non-Huawei device cannot go Up if its
Serdes mode is different from that on the non-Huawei device. To prevent this
problem, when a Huawei device connects to a non-Huawei device and receives the
ENTITYTRAP_1.3.6.1.4.1.2011.5.25.219.2.2.3 hwBoardFail alarm with
EntityTrapFaultID being 132283, run the port serdes-mode command to change
the Serdes mode of the MultiGE interface to be the same as that on the non-
Huawei device based on the alarm information.

Precautions

MultiGE interfaces of different devices can be split into separate interface groups
based on rules. MultiGE interfaces in each interface group support only two Serdes
modes.

● On the S5732-H24UM2CC (part number: 02353HUC) MultiGE interfaces 1 to

8, 9 to 16, and 17 to 24 comprise the different groups.
● On the S5732-H48UM2CC (part number: 02353HUB) MultiGE interfaces 1 to
8, 9 to 16, 17 to 24, 25 to 32, 33 to 36, 37 to 40, 41 to 44, and 45 to 58
comprise the different groups.
● On the S5732-H48XUM2CC, MultiGE interfaces 1 to 8, 13 to 20, and 21 to 24
comprise the different groups.

Example
# Configure a MultiGE interface to work in 2.5G or 10G Serdes mode.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface MultiGE 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-MultiGE0/0/1] port serdes-mode 2500-base-x xfi

4.2.68 portswitch

Function
The portswitch command changes the working mode of Ethernet interfaces from
Layer 3 mode to Layer 2 mode.

The undo portswitch command changes the working mode of Ethernet interfaces
from Layer 2 mode to Layer 3 mode.

By default, an Ethernet interface works in Layer 2 mode.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1654

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Format
portswitch

undo portswitch

Parameters
None

Views
GE interface view, XGE interface view, 25GE interface view, 40GE interface view,
100GE interface view, Eth-Trunk interface view, port group view, MultiGE interface
view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

By default, an Ethernet interface on the device works in Layer 2 mode. To enable

Layer 3 functions on the interface, run the undo portswitch command on the
interface.

Precautions

● If an interface has the non-attribute configuration, this command cannot be

executed. Before running this command, delete the non-attribute
configuration on the interface.
● The minimum interval between running the portswitch and undo portswitch
commands must be 30s.
NOTE

Only interfaces on the S5731-H, S5731-S, S5731S-H, S5731S-S, S5732-H, S6735-S, S6720-EI,
S6720S-EI, S6730-H, S6730S-H, S6730-S, and S6730S-S support switching between Layer 2
and Layer 3 modes.
Ethernet interfaces working at Layer 3 support IP address configuration.
By default, Ethernet interfaces on the device work at Layer 2 mode and have been added to
VLAN 1. You can run the undo portswitch command to change the working mode to Layer
3 mode. The Ethernet interfaces are removed from VLAN 1 only after Layer 3 protocols
become Up.

Example
# Change the working mode of GE0/0/1 from Layer 2 mode to Layer 3 mode.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] undo portswitch
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] ip address 10.10.10.10 255.255.255.0

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1655

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

4.2.69 portswitch batch

Function
The portswitch batch command changes the working mode of Ethernet
interfaces from Layer 3 mode to Layer 2 mode in batches.

The undo portswitch batch command changes the working mode of Ethernet
interfaces from Layer 2 mode to Layer 3 mode in batches.

By default, the working mode of the interface is Layer 2 mode.

Format
portswitch batch interface-type { interface-number1 [ to interface-number2 ] }
&<1-10>

undo portswitch batch interface-type { interface-number1 [ to interface-

number2 ] } &<1-10>

Parameters

Parameter Description Value

interface-type Specifies interfaces of which the working mode needs -
interface- to be changed.
number1 [ to
interface- ● interface-number1 specifies the number of the first
number2 ] interface.
● interface-number2 specifies the number of the last
interface.
The value of interface-number2 must be larger than
the value of interface-number1. interface-number1
and interface-number2 specify the range of
interfaces.
● If to interface-number2 is not specified, only the
working mode of the interface specified by
interface-number1 is changed.
NOTE
You can specify a maximum of 10 interface number ranges at
a time. The entered ranges cannot overlap.

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1656

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
You can run the portswitch batch or undo portswitch batch command to
change the working mode of interfaces in batches.
Precautions
● The mode switching function takes effect when the interface only has
attribute configurations (for example, shutdown and description
configurations). If the service configuration (for example, port link-type
access configuration) exists on the interface, you must clear the service
configuration before running this command.
● The minimum interval between running the portswitch batch and undo
portswitch batch commands must be 30s.
NOTE

Only interfaces on the S5731-H, S5731-S, S5731S-H, S5731S-S, S5732-H, S6735-S, S6720-EI,
S6720S-EI, S6730-H, S6730S-H, S6730-S, and S6730S-S support switching between Layer 2
and Layer 3 modes.
Ethernet interfaces working at Layer 3 support IP address configuration.

Example
# Change the working mode of GE0/0/1, 0/0/2, and 0/0/3 to Layer 2 mode.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] portswitch batch gigabitethernet 0/0/1 0/0/2 0/0/3

4.2.70 reset statistics-peak

Function
The reset statistics-peak command clears Peak Information Rate (PIR) statistics
on an interface.

Format
reset statistics-peak interface interface-type interface-number

NOTE

PIR statistics on the management interface cannot be cleared.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1657

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

interface interface-type Clears PIR statistics on a -

interface-number specified interface.
● interface-type
specifies the interface
type.
● interface-number
specifies the interface
number.

Views
All views

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

Generally, the PIR of an interface indicates the maximum rate of the interface in a
long time. To check the recent peak rate of an interface, run the reset statistics-
peak command to clear the previous peak rate record and obtain the new peak
rate. To view the peak rate of an interface, run the display interface command.
The following information is displayed:
Input peak rate 244425848 bits/sec,Record time: 2008-01-01 00:16:37
Output peak rate 753496 bits/sec,Record time: 2008-01-15 19:25:12

Precautions

PIR statistics on a specified interface cannot be restored after they are cleared.
Exercise caution before clearing the statistics.

Example
# Clear PIR statistics on GE0/0/1.
<HUAWEI> reset statistics-peak interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1

4.2.71 reset statistics-peak interface

Function
The reset statistics-peak interface command clears peak information rate (PIR)
statistics on all the interfaces in one click.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1658

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Format
reset statistics-peak interface

NOTE

PIR statistics on management interfaces cannot be cleared.

Parameters
None

Views
User view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
Generally, the PIR of an interface indicates the maximum rate of the interface in a
long time. To check the recent PIR of a specified interface, run the reset statistics-
peak command to clear the previous PIR statistics and obtain the new PIR. To
check recent PIR statistics on multiple or all interfaces, you may need to spend a
long time in clearing the PIR statistics, increasing the workload. To reduce the
workload, you can run this command in the user view to clear PIR statistics on all
the interfaces.
Precautions
PIR statistics on an interface cannot be restored after they are cleared. Exercise
caution before clearing the statistics.

Example
# Clear PIR statistics on all the interfaces.
<HUAWEI> reset statistics-peak interface

4.2.72 reset virtual-cable-test

Function
The reset virtual-cable-test command deletes cable test results on an interface.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1659

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

NOTE

The service interfaces do not support this command on the following devices:
● MultiGE interface on the S5720-28X-PWH-LI-AC, S5732-H24UM2CC (part number:
02353HUC/02353HUC-003/02353HUC-004/02353SJY/
02353SJY-001/02353SJY-004/02353SJY-010/02353SJY-011/02353SJY-014/02353SJY-015
/
02353SJY-016/02353SJY-019/02353SJY-002/02353SJY-003/02353SJY-012/02353SJY-013
/02353SJY-017/02353SJY-018), S5732-H48UM2CC (part number: 02353HUB/
02353HUB-002/02353HUB-003/02353SJT/
02353SJT-001/02353SJT-003/02353SJT-004/02353SJT-010/02353SJT-011/02353SJT-013/
02353SJT-014/02353SJT-015/02353SJT-016/02353SJT-018/02353SJT-002), S5732-
H48XUM2CC, S5736-S24UM4XC
● XGE electrical interfaces on the ES5D21X08T00 card

Format
reset virtual-cable-test { interface-type interface-number | all }

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

interface-type interface- Deletes cable test results -

number on a specified interface.
● interface-type
specifies an interface
type.
● interface-number
specifies an interface
number.

all Deletes cable test results -

on all interfaces.

Views
All views

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
Before conducting a cable test on an electrical interface, you can use this
command to delete the previous test results.
Precautions
The cable test results cannot be restored after being cleared. Exercise caution
before clearing the statistics.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1660

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Example
# Delete cable test results on GE0/0/1.
<HUAWEI> reset virtual-cable-test gigabitethernet 0/0/1

4.2.73 set card port-config-mode 25g-port enable

Function
The set card port-config-mode 25g-port enable command sets the card
interface working mode to 25GE.
The undo set card port-config-mode 25g-port enable command restores the
default card interface working mode.
By default, the card interface working mode is 10GE.

NOTE

The following switch models support this command and the command takes effect only on
the S7X08000 card:
● S5731-H24T4XC, S5731-H24P4XC, S5731-H48T4XC, S5731-H48P4XC, S5731-H24HB4XZ,
S5731-H48HB4XZ
● S5731S-H24T4XC-A, S5731S-H48T4XC-A, S5731S-H24HB4XZ-A, S5731S-H48HB4XZ-A
● S5736-S
● S5732-H24UM2CC, S5732-H48UM2CC, S5732-H48XUM2CC

Format
set card port-config-mode 25g-port enable slot slot-id
undo set card port-config-mode 25g-port enable slot slot-id

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

slot slot-id Configures the interface The value must be set

working mode for the according to the device
card in a specified slot. configuration.

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1661

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

By default, the card interface working mode is 10GE, and the number of interfaces
is 8*10GE. To use 25GE interfaces, run the set card port-config-mode 25g-port
enable command. In this case, the number of interfaces on the card is 2*25GE,
and the last six interfaces are unavailable.
Precautions
● After running this command, you need to confirm the automatic reset of
cards as prompted to make the configuration take effect.
● After the interface working mode is changed, replace the connection medium.
● When the interface working mode of a card is being changed, the card cannot
be removed and then reinstalled.
● After you run the reset factory-configuration command to restore factory
settings and restart the device, the card interface working mode is restored to
10GE.
● If there are stack ports on a card, changing the card interface working mode
may cause a stack split after the card is reset.

Example
# Configure the card interface working mode to 25GE.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] set card port-config-mode 25g-port enable slot 1
Warning: Only the first two ports will be available after the subcard is automatically initialized. Continue?
[Y/N]:y
Warning: The subcard needs to be reset for the new port mode to take effect. Ensure that subcard is
properly installed during re-ini
tialization. Otherwise, port mode switching fails. Continue? [Y/
N]:y
Info: The system is executing the command. Please wait.....................................
Info: The port mode is changed successfully.

4.2.74 set device port-config-mode enable

Function
The set device port-config-mode enable command changes the working mode
of SFP28 Ethernet optical ports on the device panel and changes the working
mode of QSFP28 Ethernet optical ports or splits QSFP28 Ethernet optical ports.
The undo set device port-config-mode enable command restores the default
configuration.
By default, four SFP28 Ethernet optical ports on the panel of the work at the rate
of 25 Gbit/s, and two QSFP28 Ethernet optical ports work at the rate of 40 Gbit/s.

NOTE

This command is supported only on the S5732-H24UM2CC (part number: 02353HUC/

02353HUC-003/02353HUC-004/02353SJY/
02353SJY-001/02353SJY-004/02353SJY-010/02353SJY-011/02353SJY-014/02353SJY-015/0235
3SJY-016/02353SJY-019/02353SJY-002/02353SJY-003/02353SJY-012/02353SJY-013/02353SJY
-017/02353SJY-018), S5732-H48UM2CC (part number: 02353HUB/
02353HUB-002/02353HUB-003/02353SJT/
02353SJT-001/02353SJT-003/02353SJT-004/02353SJT-010/02353SJT-011/02353SJT-013/0235
3SJT-014/02353SJT-015/02353SJT-016/02353SJT-018/02353SJT-002) and S5732-
H48XUM2CC.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1662

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Format
set device port-config-mode port-config-mode enable { all | slot slot-id }

undo set device port-config-mode enable { all | slot slot-id }

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

port-config-mode Specifies the working The value is a character string:

mode of ports on the
device panel. ● 4*25GE+2*40GE
● 4*25GE+4*10GE+40GE
● 4*25GE+40GE+4*10GE
● 4*25GE+8*10GE
● 2*100GE
● 4*25GE+100GE
● 100GE+4*25GE
● 8*25GE

all Indicates all slots. -

slot slot-id Specifies a slot ID. The value must be set according to
the device configuration.

Views
System view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

There are four SFP28 Ethernet optical ports and two QSFP28 Ethernet optical
ports on the panel of S5732-H24UM2CC (part number: 02353HUC/
02353HUC-003/02353HUC-004/02353SJY/
02353SJY-001/02353SJY-004/02353SJY-010/02353SJY-011/02353SJY-014/02353SJY-
015/02353SJY-016/02353SJY-019/02353SJY-002/02353SJY-003/02353SJY-012/0235
3SJY-013/02353SJY-017/02353SJY-018), S5732-H48UM2CC (part number:
02353HUB/02353HUB-002/02353HUB-003/02353SJT/
02353SJT-001/02353SJT-003/02353SJT-004/02353SJT-010/02353SJT-011/02353SJT-
013/02353SJT-014/02353SJT-015/02353SJT-016/02353SJT-018/02353SJT-002) and
S5732-H48XUM2CC. You can run the set device port-config-mode enable
command to change the working mode of SFP28 Ethernet optical ports on the
device panel and change the working mode of QSFP28 Ethernet optical ports or

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1663

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

split QSFP28 Ethernet optical ports. The device supports eight types of working
mode switching modes or interface split modes:
● 4*25GE+2*40GE: Four SFP28 Ethernet optical ports work at the rate of 25
Gbit/s, and two QSFP28 Ethernet optical ports work at the rate of 40 Gbit/s.
● 4*25GE+4*10GE+40GE: Four SFP28 Ethernet optical ports work at the rate of
25 Gbit/s, QSFP28 Ethernet optical port 1 is split into four 10GE ports, and
QSFP28 Ethernet optical port 2 works at the rate of 40 Gbit/s.
● 4*25GE+40GE+4*10GE: Four SFP28 Ethernet optical ports work at the rate of
25 Gbit/s, QSFP28 Ethernet optical port 1 works at the rate of 40 Gbit/s, and
QSFP28 Ethernet optical port 2 is split into four 10GE ports.
● 4*25GE+8*10GE: Four SFP28 Ethernet optical ports work at the rate of 25
Gbit/s, and each of two QSFP28 Ethernet optical ports is split into four 10GE
ports.
● 2*100GE: Four SFP28 Ethernet optical ports are unavailable, and two QSFP28
Ethernet optical ports work at the rate of 100 Gbit/s.
● 4*25GE+100GE: Four SFP28 Ethernet optical ports are unavailable, QSFP28
Ethernet optical port 1 is split into four 25GE ports, and QSFP28 Ethernet
optical port 2 works at the rate of 100 Gbit/s.
● 100GE+4*25GE: Four SFP28 Ethernet optical ports are unavailable, QSFP28
Ethernet optical port 1 works at the rate of 100 Gbit/s, and QSFP28 Ethernet
optical port 2 is split into four 25GE ports.
● 8*25GE: Four SFP28 Ethernet optical ports are unavailable, and each of two
QSFP28 Ethernet optical ports is split into four 25GE ports.
Precautions
● After the working mode of an interface is changed or an interface is split, the
configuration on the original interface is lost. Therefore, exercise caution
when performing this operation.
● After running this command, you need to confirm the automatic restart of the
device as prompted to make the configuration take effect. To prevent
configuration loss, save the configuration in advance.
● After interface split is configured, the interface and converted interfaces
cannot be added to a stack interface, regardless of whether the configuration
takes effect. If an interface has been added to a stack interface, the interface
cannot be split.

Example
# Configure the two QSFP28 Ethernet optical ports on the device panel to work at
the rate of 100 Gbit/s.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] set device port-config-mode 2*100GE enable all
Warning: After the command is run, some ports may become unavailable or their configurations may be
lost, and the device automatically restarts. Continue? [Y/N]:y
Warning: Save the configuration before restart. Otherwise, configuration will be lost and the device will
restart. Continue? [Y/N]:y

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1664

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

4.2.75 set ethernet speed down-grade

Function
The set ethernet speed down-grade command enables the rate decrease auto-
negotiation function on an interface.

The undo set ethernet speed down-grade command disables the rate decrease
auto-negotiation function on an interface.

By default, rate decrease auto-negotiation is disabled on an interface.

NOTE

The rate decrease auto-negotiation function applies only to MultiGE interfaces, GE electrical
interfaces, GE optical interfaces that have GE copper modules installed, and the last four
10GE electrical interfaces on the ES5D21X08T00 card of the S5731-H and S5731S-H.

Format
set ethernet speed down-grade

undo set ethernet speed down-grade

Parameters
None

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

Two devices are connected through two GE electrical interfaces using a network
cable. The two GE interfaces are configured to work in rate auto-negotiation
mode. The network cable can only work at the rate of 100 Mbit/s or 10 Mbit/s
because it deteriorates, but the maximum rate supported by the two GE interfaces
is 1000 Mbit/s. The interfaces negotiate the working rate to 1000 Mbit/s, but
cannot go Up because the network cable does not support the rate of 1000
Mbit/s.

You can use the rate decrease auto-negotiation function to solve this problem.
After rate decrease auto-negotiation is enabled using this command, the two GE
interfaces can decrease the negotiated rate to 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s, and then
can go Up.

Prerequisites

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1665

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

The two connected interfaces work in auto-negotiation mode. If an interface

works in non-auto-negotiation mode, run the negotiation auto command in the
interface view to configure it to work in auto-negotiation mode.

Precautions

If rate decrease auto-negotiation is configured on the local interface, but not on

the remote interface, the local interface can still decrease the negotiated rate to
100 Mbit/s. If the rate decrease auto-negotiation function is configured on an
interface of the S5720-28X-PWH-LI-AC or S5720-28X-PWH-LI-ACF, you must also
configure this function on the remote interface; otherwise, the local and remote
interfaces may not go Up.

If the network cable quality is low, a MultiGE interface takes longer time to go Up
after the rate decrease auto-negotiation function is configured. For example, if the
rate is decreased from 10 Gbit/s to 100 Mbit/s, the MultiGE interface takes about
40 seconds to go Up. If the rate is decreased from 2.5 Gbit/s to 100 Mbit/s, the
MultiGE interface takes about 20 seconds to go Up. It is recommended that you
replace the network cable.

After the rate decrease auto-negotiation function is configured on a MultiGE

interface, the interface rate may automatically decrease to 1000 Mbit/s, if a
network cable is removed and reinstalled on the interface in Down state
continuously or if the shutdown and undo shutdown commands are frequently
run on the interface. To restore the interface rate to 2500 Mbit/s, remove and
reinstall the network cable again after the interface goes Up or run the shutdown
and undo shutdown commands on the remote interface.

After the rate decrease auto-negotiation function is configured on a GE interface,

the interface rate may automatically decrease to 100 Mbit/s, if a network cable is
removed and reinstalled on the interface in Down state continuously or if the
shutdown and undo shutdown commands are frequently run on the interface. To
restore the interface rate to 1000 Mbit/s, remove and reinstall the network cable
again after the interface goes Up or run the shutdown and undo shutdown
commands on the remote interface.

Example
# Configure the rate decrease auto-negotiation function on a GE interface.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] set ethernet speed down-grade

4.2.76 set flow-statistics include-interframe

Function
The set flow-statistics include-interframe command configures traffic statistics
on an interface to contain the inter-frame gap and preamble.

The undo set flow-statistics include-interframe command configures traffic

statistics on an interface not to contain the inter-frame gap and preamble.

By default, traffic statistics on an interface contain the inter-frame gap and

preamble.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1666

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Format
set flow-statistics include-interframe

undo set flow-statistics include-interframe

Parameters
None

Views
Ethernet interface view, GE interface view, XGE interface view, MultiGE interface
view, 25GE interface view, 40GE interface view, 100GE interface view, port group
view, Eth-Trunk interface view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
You can run the display interface command to view the running status and traffic
statistics on an interface. The Last 300 seconds input rate or Last 300 seconds
output rate field in the command output indicates the inbound or outbound
traffic rate on the interface in the last 300 seconds.

● If you want to obtain the total number of bytes passing through an interface
in a period, configure the device to count the bytes in the interframe gap
(IFG) and preamble when collecting traffic statistics on the interface. The
interface traffic rate is as follows:
Interface traffic rate = (Original packet length + IFG + Preamble) x Number of
packets passing through the interface every second
● If you want to obtain only the number of packet bytes passing through an
interface in a period, configure the device not to count the bytes in the IFG
and preamble when collecting traffic statistics on the interface. The interface
traffic rate is as follows:
Interface traffic rate = Original packet length x Number of packets passing
through the interface every second
By default, the IFG has a fixed value of 12 bytes and the preamble has a fixed
value of 8 bytes.

Example
# Configure traffic statistics on GE0/0/1 to contain the inter-frame gap and
preamble.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] set flow-statistics include-interframe

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1667

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

4.2.77 set flow-change-ratio

Function
The set flow-change-ratio { input-threshold | output-threshold } upper-limit
command sets the trap threshold for a sudden traffic volume change on
interfaces.

The undo set flow-change-ratio { input-threshold | output-threshold } upper-

limit command restores the default trap threshold for a sudden traffic volume
change on interfaces.

By default, the trap threshold for a sudden traffic volume change on interfaces is
50%.

The set flow-change-ratio start-check bandwidth-usage command sets the

lower threshold of the initial bandwidth usage percentage for triggering a trap.

The undo set flow-change-ratio start-check bandwidth-usage command

restores the default lower threshold of the initial bandwidth usage percentage for
triggering a trap.

By default, the lower threshold of the initial bandwidth usage percentage for
triggering a trap is 20%.

Format
set flow-change-ratio { input-threshold | output-threshold } upper-limit
threshold

set flow-change-ratio start-check bandwidth-usage bandwidth-usage-threshold

undo set flow-change-ratio { input-threshold | output-threshold } upper-limit

undo set flow-change-ratio start-check bandwidth-usage

Parameters

Parameter Description Value

input-threshold Specifies the trap threshold for a -

sudden traffic volume change in the
inbound direction of interfaces.

output-threshold Specifies the trap threshold for a -

sudden traffic volume change in the
outbound direction of interfaces.

upper-limit Specifies the threshold for the traffic The value is an

threshold volume change percentage on integer that ranges
interfaces. from 0 to 100. The
default value is 50.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1668

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Parameter Description Value

start-check Indicates that the switch checks the -

initial bandwidth usage when a trap
is triggered.

bandwidth-usage Specifies the lower threshold of the The value is an

bandwidth-usage- initial bandwidth usage percentage integer that ranges
threshold for triggering a trap. from 0 to 100. The
default value is 20.

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

To allow the switch to detect real-time traffic volume changes on interfaces, you
can run this command to set the trap threshold for a sudden traffic volume
change on interfaces and the lower threshold of the initial bandwidth usage
percentage for triggering a trap.

Traffic volume change percentage on interfaces = |Interface rate in the current

traffic statistics collection interval - Interface rate in the previous traffic statistics
collection interval| / Interface rate in the previous traffic statistics collection
interval

Configuration Impact

If the trap function for a sudden traffic volume change is enabled (using the
snmp-agent trap enable feature-name ifpdt trap-name
hwInputRateChangeOverThresholdNotice or snmp-agent trap enable feature-
name ifpdt trap-name hwOutputRateChangeOverThresholdNotice command)
after the set flow-change-ratio command is enabled, a trap will be generated
when the traffic volume change percentage on interfaces exceeds the specified
threshold (value of threshold) and the bandwidth usage percentage is not lower
than the lower threshold (value of bandwidth-usage-threshold).

Precautions

You can run the set flow-stat interval command to configure the traffic statistics
collection interval on interfaces. The default interval is 300 seconds.

Example
# Set the trap threshold for a sudden traffic volume change in the inbound
direction of interfaces to 70%.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1669

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] set flow-change-ratio input-threshold upper-limit 70

4.2.78 set flow-change-ratio input-broadcast-detect disable

Function
The set flow-change-ratio input-broadcast-detect disable command disables
detection of a sudden broadcast traffic volume change in the inbound direction of
interfaces.

The undo set flow-change-ratio input-broadcast-detect disable command

enables detection of a sudden broadcast traffic volume change in the inbound
direction of interfaces.

By default, detection of a sudden broadcast traffic volume change in the inbound

direction of interfaces is enabled.

Format
set flow-change-ratio input-broadcast-detect disable

undo set flow-change-ratio input-broadcast-detect disable

Parameters
None

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

By default, the switch checks whether the volume of broadcast traffic in the
inbound direction of interfaces changes suddenly, and generates a trap after
detecting a sudden change, facilitating network maintenance.

If the switch has many interfaces, detection of a sudden broadcast traffic volume
change in the inbound direction of interfaces consumes some CPU and memory
resources. You can run the set flow-change-ratio input-broadcast-detect
disable command to disable the function.

Precautions

If the system software is upgraded from V200R009C00 or an earlier version to

V200R010C00 or a later version, detection of a sudden broadcast traffic volume
change in the inbound direction of interfaces is disabled by default.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1670

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Example
# Disable detection of a sudden broadcast traffic volume change in the inbound
direction of interfaces.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] set flow-change-ratio input-broadcast-detect disable

4.2.79 set if-mib sample-interval

Function
The set if-mib sample-interval command configures the interval of collecting
traffic statistics on an interface.
The undo set if-mib sample-interval command restores the default interval.
The default interval is 60 seconds.

Format
set if-mib sample-interval interval-value
undo set if-mib sample-interval [ interval-value ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
interval-value Specifies the interval The value can be 0 or an integer multiple
of collecting traffic of 10 in the range from 10 to 300, in
statistics on an seconds. The value 0 indicates that the
interface. function of periodically collecting traffic
statistics on an interface is disabled.

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
When the NMS obtains interface traffic statistics through the MIB tables iftable
and ifxtable, the time for querying interface traffic statistics in real time is long.
When the device has a large number of interfaces, the query efficiency of the NMS
is low. To resolve this issue, switches can be configured to periodically collect
traffic statistics on interfaces. In this case, the NMS can directly obtain traffic
statistics collected on interfaces, improving the query efficiency.
Precautions

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1671

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

● If the command has been run for multiple times, only the latest configuration
takes effect.
● When the undo set if-mib sample-interval [ interval-value ] command is
run, if the interval is specified, the value must be consistent with the current
configuration.
● A short interval will cause a high CPU usage.

Example
# Set the interval of collecting traffic statistics on an interface to 100 seconds.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] set if-mib sample-interval 100

4.2.80 set port-enable delay

Function
The set port-enable delay command sets the delay after which an interface goes
Up after a device restart.

The undo set port-enable delay command deletes the delay after which an
interface goes Up after a device restart.

By default, an interface goes Up immediately after a device restart.

Format
set port-enable delay delay-timer

undo set port-enable delay

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

delay-timer Specifies the delay after The value is an integer

which an interface goes ranging from 0 to 1800,
Up after a device restart. in seconds. The
increment value is 10
seconds.

Views
Ethernet interface view, GE interface view, XGE interface view, MultiGE interface
view, 25GE interface view, 40GE interface view, 100GE interface view, port group
view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1672

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
On an unstable network, devices may fail to obtain IP addresses from the
expected DHCP server. If devices obtain IP addresses from another DHCP server,
the devices cannot obtain IP addresses on the expected network segment for a
long time even after the network is recovered. To prevent this problem, you can
set the delay after which interfaces go Up after a device restart.
Precautions
● If you run the shutdown and undo shutdown commands or run the restart
command on the interface during the delay, the delay does not take effect.
● The configuration takes effect only after the device is restarted.

Example
# Set the delay after which GE0/0/1 goes Up after a device restart to 20 seconds.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] set port-enable delay 20
Warning: The configuration takes effect only after the card or subcard is restarted.

4.2.81 single-fiber enable

Function
The single-fiber enable command enables the single-fiber communication
function on an optical interface.
The undo single-fiber enable command disables the single-fiber communication
function on an optical interface.
By default, the single-fiber communication function is disabled on an optical
interface.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1673

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

NOTE

The first four GE optical ports on the S5731-S48S4X, S5731-S48S4X-A, S5731S-S48S4X-A,

and S5731S-S48S4X-A1 do not support this configuration.
The S5731-H24HB4XZ, S5731-H48HB4XZ, S5731S-H24HB4XZ-A, and S5731S-H48HB4XZ-A
support GE, XGE, 25GE, and 40GE interfaces. Other S5731-H models support only XGE,
25GE, and 40GE interfaces.
S5732-H, S6730-H, and S6730S-H support only 25GE, 40GE, and 100GE interfaces.
S6730-S and S6730S-S supports only 40GE interface.
The single-fiber enable command and Configuring Internal Loopback Detection and
MAC SWAP loopback test cannot be configured on the same interface.
A GE optical interface supports the single-fiber enable command only when it works at a
rate of 1000 Mbit/s. Particularly, GE optical interfaces on the S5720-52X-LI-24S-AC1,
S5720-52X-LI-48S-AC1, S5720-52X-LI-48S-DC1, S5736-S24S4XC, or S5736-S48S4XC don't
support the single-fiber enable command.
An XGE optical interface supports the single-fiber enable command only when it has no
optical module installed or has an XGE optical module installed, and no license is required.
Particularly, XGE optical interfaces on the S6735-S, S6720-EI and S6720S-EI also support the
single-fiber enable command after GE optical modules are installed, and no license is
required.
A 25GE optical interface supports the single-fiber enable command only when it has no
optical module installed or has a GE/XGE/25GE optical module installed.
A 40GE optical interface supports the single-fiber enable command only when it has no
optical module installed or has a 40GE optical module installed.
A 100GE optical interface supports the single-fiber enable command only when it has no
optical module installed or has a 40GE/100GE optical module installed.
The QSFP-40G-SR-BD, QSFP-40G-SDLC-PAM, and QSFP-40G-eSDLC-PAM optical module
does not support the single-fiber function configuration.

Format
single-fiber enable
undo single-fiber enable

Parameters
None

Views
GE interface view, XGE interface view, 25GE interface view, 40GE interface view,
100GE interface view, port group view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
During network management and maintenance, the administrator may need to
send traffic from users to a specified server for analysis and processing. If a server

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1674

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

can receive and send packets, there is a possibility that the server forwards user
traffic to other devices, causing a security risk. The unidirectional single-fiber
communication function can address this issue. A single fiber means that two
optical modules are connected by only one fiber, and unidirectional
communication means that packets can be sent in only one direction. With this
function, a switch can only send but cannot receive packets, and an analysis server
can only receive but cannot send packets. Data security on the analysis server is
ensured.

Precautions

The remote interface also works in non-auto negotiation mode and the rate of the
peer interface is the same as the rate of the local interface.

On an interface with the single-fiber enable command configured, the command

is deleted by the system in the following situations:
● The GE optical interface has an FE optical module installed.
● The GE optical interface does not work at a rate of 1000 Mbit/s.
● The XGE interface is connected to a cable or has a GE optical module
installed.
● The 25GE interface is connected to a cable.
● The 40GE interface is connected to a cable.
● The 100GE interface is connected to a cable.

Example
# Enable XGigabitEthernet0/0/1 to send packets through a single fiber.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface XGigabitEthernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-XGigabitEthernet0/0/1] single-fiber enable

4.2.82 speed

Function
The speed command sets the rate for an Ethernet interface in non-auto
negotiation mode.

The undo speed command restores the default rate of an Ethernet interface in
non-auto negotiation mode.

By default, an Ethernet interface works at its highest rate when it works in non-
auto negotiation mode.

Format
speed { 10 | 100 | 1000 | 2500 | 5000 | 10000 }

undo speed

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1675

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

10 Indicates that the -

interface works at 10
Mbit/s.

100 Indicates that the -

interface works at 100
Mbit/s.

1000 Indicates that the -

interface works at 1000
Mbit/s.
NOTE
FE interfaces do not
support this parameter.

2500 Sets the auto- -

negotiation rate of an
Ethernet electrical
interface to 2500 Mbit/s.
NOTE
Only MultiGE interfaces
support this parameter.

5000 Sets the auto- -

negotiation rate of an
Ethernet electrical
interface to 5000 Mbit/s.
NOTE
Only MultiGE interfaces
support this parameter.

10000 Sets the auto- -

negotiation rate of an
Ethernet electrical
interface to 10000
Mbit/s.
NOTE
Only MultiGE interfaces
and 25GE interfaces with
XGE/25GE dual-rate optical
modules installed support
this parameter.

Views
Ethernet interface view, GE interface view, MultiGE interface view, 25GE interface
view, port group view

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1676

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
In non-auto negotiation mode, if interfaces on two connected devices work at
different rates, use the speed command to change the rates of the interfaces to
be the same so that the two devices can communicate.
Precautions
● If the remote interface does not support the auto negotiation mode, run the
undo negotiation auto command on the local interface to configure the
interface to work in non-auto negotiation mode. You can then change the
rate of the local interface to be the same as the rate of the remote interface
to ensure proper communication.
● For details about the rates supported by Ethernet interfaces, see Licensing
Requirements and Limitations for Ethernet Interfaces.
● For 25GE interfaces, the speed 10000 command is mutually exclusive with the
following commands:
– port mode ge (25GE interface)
– fec mode rs
– fec mode base-r
● The rate of MultiGE interfaces on the S5732-H24UM2CC, S5732-H48UM2CC,
and S5736-S24UM4XC can be increased using the RTU license. After the
license is activated, you can run the assign group-speed command and
restart the device to make the configured maximum rate supported by the
interfaces in the MultiGE interface group take effect.
To check the default rate of MultiGE interfaces, run the display device group-
speed configuration command. The BaseSpeed field indicates the default
rate.

Example
# Configure GE0/0/1 to work at 100 Mbit/s in non-auto negotiation mode.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] undo negotiation auto
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] speed 100

4.2.83 speed auto-negotiation

Function
The speed auto-negotiation command enables auto-negotiation on a GE optical
interface.
The undo speed auto-negotiation command disables auto-negotiation on a GE
optical interface.
By default, auto-negotiation is disabled on a GE optical interface.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1677

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

NOTE

Only the following models do not support this command:

● S200 series
● S300 series
● S500-8T4S, S500-8P4S, S500-24T4S, S500-16T4S, S500-24P4S, S500-16P4S, and
S500-48T4S
● S1730S-S8T4S-A1, S1730S-S8P4S-A1, S1730S-S24T4S-A1, S1730S-S24P4S-A1, S1730S-
S48T4S-A1, and S1730S-S48P4S-A1
● S2720-EI series
● S2730S-S8FT4S-A, S2730S-S8FP4S-A, S2730S-S16FT4S-A, S2730S-S24FT4S-A, S2730S-
S24FP4S-A, and S2730S-S48FT4S-A
● S5720-12TP-LI-AC, S5720-12TP-PWR-LI-AC, S5720-28TP-LI-AC, S5720-28TP-PWR-LI-AC,
S5720-28TP-PWR-LI-ACL, S5720-28P-LI-AC, S5720-28P-PWR-LI-AC, S5720-52P-LI-AC,
and S5720-52P-PWR-LI-AC
● S5720S-12TP-LI-AC, S5720S-12TP-PWR-LI-AC, S5720S-28TP-PWR-LI-ACL, S5720S-28P-
LI-AC, S5720SV2-28P-LI-AC, S5720S-28P-PWR-LI-AC, S5720S-52P-LI-AC, S5720SV2-52P-
LI-AC, and S5720S-52P-PWR-LI-AC
● S5731S-H24T4S-A and S5731S-H48T4S-A
● S5732-H24S6Q and S5732-H48S6Q

Format
speed auto-negotiation
undo speed auto-negotiation

Parameters
None

Views
GE interface view, port group view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
If an optical interface is configured to work in auto-negotiation mode using the
negotiation auto command, the interface cannot negotiate the rate with another
interface. You can run the speed auto-negotiation command to configure the
auto-negotiation function on the interface.
Prerequisites
Run the negotiation auto command to enable auto-negotiation before using the
speed auto-negotiation command on the interface.
Precautions

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1678

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

● The speed auto-negotiation command will make flow control auto-

negotiation and internal loopback ineffective.
● After configuring the auto-negotiation function on an interface, if you remove
and install a single optical fiber on the interface, the interface may be Up and
the remote interface may be down. You can run the shutdown and undo
shutdown commands on the remote interface to make the remote interface
go Up.
● After auto-negotiation is configured on an interface, if this interface becomes
Up and the remote interface becomes Down after the negotiation, run the
shutdown and undo shutdown commands on the remote interface or run
the undo speed auto-negotiation and speed auto-negotiation commands
on this interface to enable the two ends to negotiate their rate again.

Example
# Enable auto-negotiation on GE0/0/1.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] negotiation auto
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] speed auto-negotiation

4.2.84 statistic enable (interface view)

Function
The statistic enable command enables IPv4 or IPv6 packet statistics collection on
an interface.

The undo statistic enable command disables IPv4 or IPv6 packet statistics
collection on an interface.

By default, IPv4 or IPv6 packet statistics collection is disabled on an interface.

NOTE

Only the S5731-H, S5731-S, S5731S-H, S5731S-S, S5732-H, S6735-S, S6720-EI, S6720S-EI,
S6730-H, S6730S-H, S6730-S, and S6730S-S support this command.

Format
{ ipv4 | ipv6 } * statistic enable { both | inbound | outbound }

undo { ipv4 | ipv6 } * statistic enable { both | inbound | outbound }

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

ipv4 Indicates IPv4 packet -

statistics collection.

ipv6 Indicates IPv6 packet -

statistics collection.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1679

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Parameter Description Value

both Indicates statistics -

collection for incoming
and outgoing packets.

inbound Indicates statistics -

collection for incoming
packets.

outbound Indicates statistics -

collection for outgoing
packets.

Views
VLANIF interface view, Eth-Trunk interface view, GE interface view, XGE interface
view, 25GE interface view, MultiGE interface view, 40GE interface view, 100GE
interface view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

To check the network status or locate network faults, you can enable IPv4 or IPv6
packet statistics collection on an interface to collect IPv4 or IPv6 packet statistics
on the interface.

Precautions

● This command and the statistic enable { both | inbound | outbound }

command used in the VLANIF interface view are mutually exclusive.
● If this command and the traffic-policy (interface view) command are
configured together on the S5731-H, S5731-S, S5731S-H, S5731S-S, S5732-H,
S6730-H, S6730S-H, S6730-S, and S6730S-S, traffic policy will fail to be
applied.
● After the IPv4 or IPv6 packet statistics collection function is enabled on an
interface, you can run the display counters command to check traffic statistics
on the interface.

Example
# Enable IPv4 packet statistics collection in the inbound direction of
GigabitEthernet0/0/1.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface GigabitEthernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] ipv4 statistic enable inbound

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1680

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

4.2.85 traffic-pppoe
Function
The traffic-pppoe command configures an interface to allow only PPPoE packets
to pass through.
The undo traffic-pppoe command cancels the configuration.
By default, an interface allows all types of packets to pass through.

NOTE

S5731-H, S5731-S, S5731S-H, S5731S-S, S5732-H, S6730-H, S6730S-H, S6730-S, and

S6730S-S do not support the configuration.

Format
traffic-pppoe { any | source-address } { any | destination-address }
undo traffic-pppoe { any | source-address } { any | destination-address }

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

{ any | source-address } Indicates that an The value of source-

interface allows PPPoE address is in the format
packets with a specified H-H-H. An H contains 1
source MAC address to to 4 hexadecimal digits.
pass through.
● any indicates that
PPPoE packets with
any source MAC
address can pass
through the interface.
● source-address
indicates that PPPoE
packets with a
specified source MAC
address can pass
through the interface.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1681

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Parameter Description Value

{ any | destination- Indicates that an The value of destination-

address } interface allows PPPoE address is in the format
packets with a specified H-H-H. An H contains 1
destination MAC address to 4 hexadecimal digits.
to pass through.
● any indicates that
PPPoE packets with
any destination MAC
address can pass
through the interface.
● destination-address
indicates that PPPoE
packets with a
specified destination
MAC address can pass
through the interface.

Views
Ethernet interface view, GE interface view, XGE interface view, MultiGE interface
view, 40GE interface view, port group view, Eth-Trunk interface view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
If you run the traffic-pppoe any any command on an interface, the interface
allows only PPPoE packets to pass through and discards other packets.

Example
# Configure GE0/0/1 to allow only PPPoE packets to pass through.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] traffic-pppoe any any

# Configure GE0/0/1 to allow only PPPoE packets with source MAC address 1-1-1
to pass through.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] traffic-pppoe 1-1-1 any

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1682

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

4.2.86 training (40GE interface view)

Function
The training disable and undo training enable commands disable the training
function on a 40GE interface.
The training enable and undo training disable commands enable the training
function on a 40GE interface.
By default, the training function is enabled on a 40GE interface.

NOTE

● The training function can be configured on the 40GE interfaces of the S6720-EI and
S6720S-EI.
● The training function can be configured on the 40GE interfaces of the S5735S-H, S5731-
H, S5731S-H24T4XC-A, S5731S-H48T4XC-A or S5736-S that has the ES5D21Q02Q00 or
ES5D21Q04Q01 card installed.

Format
training { enable | disable }
undo training { enable | disable }

Parameters
None

Views
40GE interface view, port group view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
With the increase of transmission rate or frequency, attenuation of signal's high-
frequency components becomes increasingly severe. To guarantee transmission
performance of signals, it is necessary to compensate for signals, and commonly
used compensation technologies are pre-emphasis and balancing. The pre-
emphasis technology increases high-frequency components of signals at the
transmit end of transmission lines to compensate attenuation during the
transmission. However, the pre-emphasis technology increases crosstalk while
amplifying high-frequency components. To solve this problem, the balancing
technology is developed. The balancing technology is used at the receive end of
transmission lines to function like a filter for filtering high-frequency crosstalk.
After the training function is enabled on a 40GE interface, the transmit end
exchanges frames with the receive end to automatically set the pre-emphasis and

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1683

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

balancing parameters, improving processing efficiency of the two technologies.

Note that the negotiated parameters for the training function are obtained based
on the site environment. If the site environment changes, for example, from high-
temperature environment to low-temperature environment, the parameters may
be inaccurate. Therefore, bit errors may occur when the training function is
enabled. The training function is optional in IEEE802.3 standards, and its
implementation on different types of products from various vendors may differ.
When connecting two devices, enable or disable the training function on both
ends simultaneously. By default, the training function is enabled on a 40GE
interface. If the training function is disabled on the remote device or the remote
device does not support the function, run the training disable or undo training
enable command to disable the function.
Precautions
● The training disable and undo training enable commands can be configured
on a 40GE interface only when the interface connects to a high-speed cable
and is not a physical member interface in a stack.
● After a cable is installed on a 40GE interface without the training disable
configuration, the training enable configuration is automatically generated
on the interface.
● If no cable is installed on an interface, only the training enable and undo
training disable commands can be configured on the interface.
● If the display this include-default command is run on an interface to view
the training configuration after a cable is installed on the interface, the
default training enable configuration is always displayed in the command
output and does not change with the training configuration change.
● The training configuration on an interface takes effect only after a cable is
installed on the interface. If the cable is replaced with an optical module, the
training disable and training enable configurations will be automatically
deleted from the interface.
● If a 40GE interface is configured as a physical member interface in a stack
system, the training disable and training enable configurations will be
automatically deleted from the interface.
● If a 40GE interface has been configured as a physical member interface in a
stack system, the training function is disabled on the interface by default and
cannot be enabled.
● If the training disable or undo training enable command is configured on a
40GE interface of the S6720S-26Q-EI-24S-AC or S6720S-26Q-EI-24S-DC after
a cable is installed on the interface, and the interface is connected to a
remote interface on which the training function is disabled or a remote
interface that does not support the training function, the two interfaces may
not go Up or go Up after a delay. Therefore, configure the training disable or
undo training enable command only when the training function is disabled
on the remote interface or the remote interface does not support the training
function. In other scenarios, it is recommended that you do not disable the
training function.
● If the training configuration does not exist on an interface of a switch running
V200R008C00 or an earlier version, the training disable configuration is
automatically generated on the interface after the system software is
upgraded to a version later than V200R009C00. If the training configuration

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1684

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

exists on the interface, the configuration remains unchanged after the system
software is upgraded to a version later than V200R009C00.

Example
# Disable the training function on 40GE0/0/1.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface 40ge 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-40GE0/0/1] training disable
Warning: The configuration will cause an abnormality in port running. Continue? [Y/N]:y

4.2.87 training (100GE interface view)

Function
The training disable and undo training enable commands disable the training
function on a 100GE interface.
The training enable and undo training disable commands enable the training
function on a 100GE interface.
By default, the training function is enabled on a 100GE interface.

NOTE

Only the S6735-S supports this command.

The training disable and undo training enable commands can be configured on a 100GE
interface only when the interface connects to a 40GE or 100GE cable.

Format
training { enable | disable }
undo training { enable | disable }

Parameters
None

Views
100GE interface view, port group view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
With the increase of transmission rate or frequency, attenuation of signal's high-
frequency components becomes increasingly severe. To guarantee transmission
performance of signals, it is necessary to compensate for signals, and commonly
used compensation technologies are pre-emphasis and balancing. The pre-

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1685

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

emphasis technology increases high-frequency components of signals at the

transmit end of transmission lines to compensate attenuation during the
transmission. However, the pre-emphasis technology increases crosstalk while
amplifying high-frequency components. To solve this problem, the balancing
technology is developed. The balancing technology is used at the receive end of
transmission lines to function like a filter for filtering high-frequency crosstalk.
After the training function is enabled on a 100GE interface, the transmit end
exchanges frames with the receive end to automatically set the pre-emphasis and
balancing parameters, improving processing efficiency of the two technologies.
Note that the negotiated parameters for the training function are obtained based
on the site environment. If the site environment changes, for example, from high-
temperature environment to low-temperature environment, the parameters may
be inaccurate. Therefore, bit errors may occur when the training function is
enabled. The training function is optional in IEEE802.3 standards, and its
implementation on different types of products from various vendors may differ.
When connecting two devices, enable or disable the training function on both
ends simultaneously. By default, the training function is enabled on a 100GE
interface. If the training function is disabled on the remote device or the remote
device does not support the function, run the training disable or undo training
enable command to disable the function.
Precautions
● After a 40GE or 100GE cable is installed on a 100GE interface without the
training disable configuration, the training enable configuration is
automatically generated on the interface.
● If no cable is installed on an interface, only the training enable and undo
training disable commands can be configured on the interface.
● If the display this include-default command is run on an interface to view
the training configuration after a cable is installed on the interface, the
default training enable configuration is always displayed in the command
output and does not change with the training configuration change.
● The training configuration on an interface takes effect only after a cable is
installed on the interface. If the cable is replaced with an optical module, the
training disable and training enable configurations will be automatically
deleted from the interface.

Example
# Disable the training function on 100GE0/0/1.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface 100ge 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-100GE0/0/1] training disable
Warning: The configuration will cause an abnormality in port running. Continue? [Y/N]:y
Info: This operation may take a few seconds. Please wait for a moment.......

4.2.88 transceiver power low trigger error-down

Function
The transceiver power low trigger error-down command enables an Ethernet
optical interface to enter the error-down state when the optical power is low.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1686

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

The undo transceiver power low trigger error-down command disabled an

Ethernet optical interface from entering the error-down state when the optical
power is low.

By default, an Ethernet optical interface does not enter the error-down state when
the optical power is low.

Format
transceiver power low trigger error-down

undo transceiver power low trigger error-down

Parameters
None

Views
Ethernet interface view, GE interface view, XGE interface view, 25GE interface view,
40GE interface view, 100GE interface view, port group view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

Low optical power of the device may cause intermittent service interruption. To
ensure that services are running properly, enable an interface to enter the error-
down state when the optical power is low so that services can be switched in a
timely manner.

Follow-up Procedure

An interface in Error-down state can be recovered using either of the following

methods:
● Manual recovery: If a few interfaces need to be recovered forcibly, run the
shutdown and undo shutdown commands in the interface view.
Alternatively, run the restart command in the interface view to restart the
interfaces.
● Automatic recovery: If a large number of interfaces need to be recovered,
manual recovery is time consuming and some interfaces may be omitted. You
can run the error-down auto-recovery cause transceiver-power-low
interval interval-value command in the system view to enable automatic
interface recovery and set the recovery delay time. An interface in Error-down
state automatically recovers when the specified delay time expires.

Example
# Enable GE0/0/1 to enter the error-down state when the optical power is low.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1687

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] transceiver power low trigger error-down

4.2.89 trap-threshold

Function
The trap-threshold command sets the inbound and outbound bandwidth usage
thresholds for generating a trap.

The undo trap-threshold command restores the default inbound and outbound
bandwidth usage thresholds for generating a trap.

The default inbound or outbound bandwidth usage threshold for generating a trap
is 80.

Format
trap-threshold { input-rate | output-rate } bandwidth-in-use [ resume-rate
resume-threshold ]
undo trap-threshold { input-rate | output-rate }

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

input-rate Indicates inbound -

bandwidth.

output-rate Indicates outbound -

bandwidth.

bandwidth-in-use Specifies the bandwidth The value is an integer that

usage threshold for ranges from 1 to 100.
generating a trap.

resume-rate Specifies the bandwidth The value is an integer that

resume-threshold usage threshold for ranges from 1 to bandwidth-
clearing a trap. in-use. The default value is
bandwidth-in-use.

Views
Ethernet interface view, GE interface view, XGE interface view, 25GE interface
view, MultiGE interface view, 40GE interface view, 100GE interface view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1688

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

Monitoring bandwidth usage helps you know current load on a device. If the
bandwidth usage exceeds a threshold, bandwidth resources are insufficient and
the device capacity needs to be expanded. For example, if the bandwidth usage
exceeds 95%, an alarm is generated, indicating that bandwidth resources are
almost exhausted. As a result, some services may be interrupted before device
capacity expansion.

You can configure two thresholds: low threshold (log threshold) and high
threshold (alarm threshold). The system generates a log when the bandwidth
usage exceeds the low threshold and generates an alarm when the bandwidth
usage exceeds the high threshold. This configuration ensures that you can expand
the device capacity in advance to avoid service interruptions caused by bandwidth
exhaustion.

NOTE

Outbound bandwidth usage = (Outbound interface rate/Outbound physical interface

bandwidth) x 100
Inbound bandwidth usage = (Inbound interface rate/Inbound physical interface bandwidth) x
100
The interface rate and bandwidth are expressed in bits per second.

To set a lower threshold, run the log-threshold command.

The trap-threshold command sets the bandwidth usage threshold for generating
a trap. The trap-threshold with the following parameters provides various
functions:
● trap-threshold input-rate bandwidth-in-use resume-rate resume-threshold:
sets the inbound bandwidth usage threshold for generating a trap.
– If inbound bandwidth usage exceeds the threshold specified in
bandwidth-in-use, an hwIfMonitorInputRateRising trap is generated,
indicating that inbound bandwidth usage exceeds the configured
threshold.
– If inbound bandwidth usage falls below the threshold specified in
resume-threshold, an hwIfMonitorInputRateResume trap is generated,
indicating that inbound bandwidth usage falls between the configured
threshold for clearing a trap.
● trap-threshold output-rate bandwidth-in-use resume-rate resume-
threshold: sets the outbound bandwidth usage threshold for generating a
trap.
– If outbound bandwidth usage exceeds the threshold specified in
bandwidth-in-use, an hwIfMonitorOutputRateRising trap is generated,
indicating that outbound bandwidth usage exceeds the configured
threshold.
– If outbound bandwidth usage falls below the threshold specified in
resume-threshold, an hwIfMonitorOutputRateResume trap is generated,
indicating that outbound bandwidth usage falls between the configured
threshold for clearing a trap.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1689

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

If the offset between the value of bandwidth-in-use and the value of resume-
threshold is too small, trap information may be frequently displayed.

The log threshold must be lower than the trap threshold, providing efficient
protection for services. For example, when the inbound bandwidth usage reaches
80%, a log is generated. If the inbound bandwidth usage continues to increase
and reaches 95%, a trap is generated. This ensures that a log is generated for
inbound bandwidth usage of 80%, and a trap is generated for inbound bandwidth
usage of 95%. Either the log or the trap prompts for a bandwidth increase,
preventing service interruption.

Example
# Configure GE0/0/1 to generate a trap when the outbound bandwidth usage
exceeds 60%.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] trap-threshold output-rate 60

# Configure GE0/0/1 to generate a trap when the outbound bandwidth usage

exceeds 80% and clear the trap when the outbound bandwidth usage falls below
60%.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] trap-threshold output-rate 80 resume-rate 60

4.2.90 trap-threshold enable

Function
The trap-threshold enable command enables the function of reporting an alarm
if packets are discarded on an interface due to a congestion.

The undo trap-threshold enable command disables the function of reporting an

alarm if packets are discarded on an interface due to a congestion.

By default, this function is disabled.

Format
trap-threshold { input-discard | output-discard } enable

undo trap-threshold { input-discard | output-discard } enable

Parameters

Parameter Description Value

input-discard Enables the function of reporting an alarm if incoming -

packets are discarded on an interface due to a
congestion.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1690

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Parameter Description Value

output-discard Enables the function of reporting an alarm if outgoing -

packets are discarded on an interface due to a
congestion.

Views
GE interface view, MultiGE interface view, XGE interface view, 25GE interface view,
40GE interface view, 100GE interface view, port group view

NOTE

Only the S5736-S equipped with the S7Q02001, ES5D21Q02Q00 or ES5D21Q04Q01 card
supports this command in the 40GE interface view.

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
If a congestion occurs on a network that is running, packets may be discarded
when service flows are transmitted on the network. If a lot of packets are
discarded, services are affected. To improve transmission quality of service flows,
you can run the trap-threshold enable command to enable the function of
reporting an alarm if packets are discarded on an interface due to a congestion.
The device then reports an alarm if the number of discarded incoming and
outgoing packets on the interface in a specified period exceeds the threshold. Such
alarms help you know the congestion on the interface. You can determine
whether to increase the bandwidth or cancel the bandwidth limit on the interface
based on the logs. In this way, the congestion problem can be rectified.

Example
# Enable the function of reporting an alarm if incoming packets are discarded on
XGE0/0/1 due to a congestion.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface XGigabitEthernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-XGigabitEthernet0/0/1] trap-threshold input-discard enable

4.2.91 trap-threshold error-percentage

Function
The trap-threshold error-percentage command configures the alarm threshold
for the percentage of CRC packets against all the received packets on an interface
and alarm interval.
The undo trap-threshold error-percentage command deletes the configured
alarm threshold and interval.
By default, the alarm threshold and interval are not configured.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1691

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Format
trap-threshold error-percentage threshold-value interval interval-value

undo trap-threshold error-percentage [ threshold-value interval interval-value ]

Parameters

Parameter Description Value

threshold- Specifies the alarm threshold The value is an integer that

value for the percentage of CRC ranges from 1 to 50.
packets against all the
NOTE
received packets on the
interface. You are advised to set the threshold
to be smaller than the alarm
threshold configured in the error-
down-threshold error-percentage
command.

interval Specifies the interval for The value is an integer that

interval-value calculating the percentage of ranges from 10 to 65535, in
CRC packets against all the seconds.
received packets on the
interface.

Views
Ethernet interface view, GE interface view, XGE interface view, MultiGE interface
view, 25GE interface view, 40GE interface view, 100GE interface view, port group
view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

When an interface receives too many CRC packets, packet forwarding is affected.
To enable the device to report the corresponding alarm if the percentage of
received CRC packets against all the received packets within the specified period
exceeds the alarm threshold, run this command.

Precautions

This command is mutually exclusive to the trap-threshold error-statistics

command. After this command is configured, the trap-threshold error-statistics
command configuration does not take effect.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1692

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Example
# Set the alarm threshold for the percentage of CRC packets against all the
received packets to 10% and the interval for calculating the percentage of CRC
packets against all the received packets to 20 seconds on GE0/0/1.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface GigabitEthernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] trap-threshold error-percentage 10 interval 20

4.2.92 trap-threshold error-statistics

Function
The trap-threshold error-statistics command sets the alarm threshold for error
packets and alarm interval.
The undo trap-threshold error-statistics command restores the default alarm
threshold for error packets and default alarm interval.
By default, the alarm threshold for error packets is 3 and the alarm interval is 10
seconds.

Format
trap-threshold error-statistics threshold-value interval interval-value
undo trap-threshold error-statistics

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

threshold-value Sets the alarm threshold The value is an integer

for error packets. that ranges from 1 to
65535.
NOTE
The value should not be
greater than the alarm
threshold for error packets
that cause the interface
status to change to Error-
Down configured by the
error-down-threshold
error-statistics command.

interval interval-value Sets the interval for The value is an integer

reporting alarms for that ranges from 10 to
error packets. 65535, in seconds.

Views
Ethernet interface view, GE interface view, XGE interface view, MultiGE interface
view, 25GE interface view, 40GE interface view, 100GE interface view, port group
view

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1693

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
The system generates an alarm when the number of error packets received by an
interface within an alarm interval exceeds the alarm threshold. If the number of
received error packets is 0 in the next alarm interval, the system displays an alarm
clearance message.

Example
# Set the alarm threshold for error packets on GE0/0/1 to 10 and the alarm
interval to 30 seconds.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] trap-threshold error-statistics 10 interval 30

4.2.93 trap-threshold interval

Function
The trap-threshold interval command sets the interval for reporting an alarm if
packets are discarded on an interface due to a congestion.

The undo trap-threshold interval command restores the default interval for
reporting an alarm if packets are discarded on an interface due to a congestion.

By default, the interval for reporting an alarm if packets are discarded on an

interface due to a congestion is 300 seconds.

Format
trap-threshold { input-discard | output-discard } interval interval-value

undo trap-threshold { input-discard | output-discard } interval

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

input-discard Enables the function of reporting an -

alarm if incoming packets are
discarded on an interface due to a
congestion.

output-discard Enables the function of reporting an -

alarm if outgoing packets are
discarded on an interface due to a
congestion.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1694

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Parameter Description Value

interval interval- Specifies the interval for reporting an The value is an

value alarm. integer ranging from
60 to 86400, in
seconds. It must be an
integer multiple of 10.

Views
GE interface view, MultiGE interface view, XGE interface view, 25GE interface view,
100GE interface view, port group view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

Network congestion during service transmission may cause packet loss. If a lot of
packets are discarded, services are affected. To improve transmission quality of
service flows, you need to enable the device to report alarms to notify users of the
current network status if the number of packets discarded due to a congestion in
a period of time reaches the specified limit. In this case, you can run the trap-
threshold interval command to flexibly adjust the interval for reporting an alarm
if packets are discarded due to a congestion based on actual service situations.
Such alarms help you know the congestion on the interface. You can determine
whether to increase the bandwidth or cancel the bandwidth limit on the interface
based on the logs. In this way, the congestion problem can be solved.

Precautions

After this command is run, only the interval for reporting an alarm if packets are
discarded on an interface due to a congestion is set. The corresponding alarm is
triggered only after the function of reporting an alarm if packets are discarded on
an interface due to a congestion is enabled using the trap-threshold enable
command and the number of discarded packets on the interface within a specified
period of time reaches the alarm threshold.

If this command is executed multiple times, only the latest configuration takes
effect.

Example
# Set the interval for reporting an alarm if incoming packets are discarded on
XGE0/0/1 due to a congestion to 80 seconds.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface XGigabitEthernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-XGigabitEthernet0/0/1] trap-threshold input-discard interval 80

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1695

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

4.2.94 trap-threshold threshold

Function
The trap-threshold threshold command sets the alarm threshold for the number
of discarded packets on an interface due to a congestion.
The undo trap-threshold threshold command restores the default alarm
threshold for the number of discarded on an interface due to a congestion.
By default, the alarm threshold for the number of discarded packets on an
interface due to a congestion is 3000.

Format
trap-threshold { input-discard | output-discard } threshold threshold-value
undo trap-threshold { input-discard | output-discard } threshold

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

input-discard Enables the function of reporting an -

alarm if incoming packets are discarded
on an interface due to a congestion.

output-discard Enables the function of reporting an -

alarm if outgoing packets are discarded
on an interface due to a congestion.

threshold-value Specifies the alarm threshold for the The value is an

number of discarded packets on an integer that ranges
interface due to a congestion. from 100 to
4294967295.

Views
Ethernet interface view, GE interface view, XGE interface view, MultiGE interface
view, 25GE interface view, port group view

NOTE

Only the S5736-S equipped with the S7Q02001, ES5D21Q02Q00 or ES5D21Q04Q01 card
supports this command in the 40GE interface view.

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1696

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Network congestion during service transmission may cause packet loss. If a lot of
packets are discarded, services are affected. To improve transmission quality of
service flows, you need to enable the device to report alarms to notify users of the
current network status if the number of packets discarded due to a congestion in
a period of time reaches the specified limit. In this case, you can run the trap-
threshold threshold command to flexibly adjust the alarm threshold for the
number of discarded packets on an interface due to a congestion based on actual
service situations. Such alarms help you know the congestion on the interface. You
can determine whether to increase the bandwidth or cancel the bandwidth limit
on the interface based on the logs. In this way, the congestion problem can be
solved.

Precautions

After this command is run, only the interval for reporting an alarm if packets are
discarded on an interface due to a congestion is set. The corresponding alarm is
triggered only after the function of reporting an alarm if packets are discarded on
an interface due to a congestion is enabled using the trap-threshold enable
command and the number of discarded packets on the interface within a specified
period of time reaches the alarm threshold.

If this command is executed multiple times, only the latest configuration takes
effect.

Example
# Set the alarm threshold for the number of discarded incoming packets on
XGE0/0/1 due to a congestion to 200.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface XGigabitEthernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-XGigabitEthernet0/0/1] trap-threshold input-discard threshold 200

4.2.95 virtual-cable-test
Function
The virtual-cable-test command tests the cable connected to an Ethernet
electrical interface and displays the test result.

NOTE

The MEth management interface supports this command on the following devices: S5731-S,
S5731S-S, S5731-H, S5731S-H, S5732-H, S6730-S, S6730S-S, S6730-H, S6730S-H, S6735-S.
The service interfaces do not support this command on the following devices:
● MultiGE interface on the S5720-28X-PWH-LI-AC, S5732-H24UM2CC (part number:
02353HUC/02353HUC-003/02353HUC-004/02353SJY/
02353SJY-001/02353SJY-004/02353SJY-010/02353SJY-011/02353SJY-014/02353SJY-015
/
02353SJY-016/02353SJY-019/02353SJY-002/02353SJY-003/02353SJY-012/02353SJY-013
/02353SJY-017/02353SJY-018), S5732-H48UM2CC (part number: 02353HUB/
02353HUB-002/02353HUB-003/02353SJT/
02353SJT-001/02353SJT-003/02353SJT-004/02353SJT-010/02353SJT-011/02353SJT-013/
02353SJT-014/02353SJT-015/02353SJT-016/02353SJT-018/02353SJT-002), S5732-
H48XUM2CC, S5736-S24UM4XC
● XGE electrical interfaces on the ES5D21X08T00 card

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1697

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Format
virtual-cable-test

Parameters
None

Views
MEth interface view, Ethernet interface view, GE interface view, XGE interface view,
25GE interface view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
If the cable is faulty, the interface is in Down state or the interface rate is
abnormal even if it is in Up state. You can run the virtual-cable-test command to
check whether the cable works properly. According to the command output, you
can locate and rectify cable faults.
● If the cable works properly, the total length of the cable is displayed.
● If the cable cannot work properly, the distance between the interface and the
failure point is displayed.
VCT can be performed in either of the following modes:
● Common mode: The test speed is fast (about 2.5s), but the test precision is
low.
● Enhanced mode: The test precision is high, but the test duration is longer
(about 8s).
NOTE

For the S5736-S24T4XC, S5736-S48T4XC, S5736-S24U4XC, and S5736-S48U4XC, when ports

are Up, VCT check operates in common mode; when ports are Down, VCT check operates in
enhanced mode. Other devices support only VCT check in enhanced mode.

Precautions
● The test result is only for reference and may be inaccurate for cables of some
vendors.
● If the detection result is Unknown, you are advised to use the cable analyzer
to perform the test.
● The test result is related to the cable signal attenuation. When the cable
length is shorter than 3 m, the cable signal attenuation mostly results from
the connector, not the cable. The test result is therefore invalid.
● Running the virtual-cable-test command may affect services on the interface
in a short period of time, and the interface in Up state may alternate between
Up and Down.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1698

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

● Combo electrical interfaces support cable tests, but cable tests are not
recommended on combo electrical interfaces because services will be
interrupted.
● This command can be used on an XGE optical interface or GE optical interface
when the interface has a GE copper module installed.
● After a 25GE optical interface is configured to work at the rate of 1 Gbit/s
using the port mode ge command and has a GE copper module installed, the
virtual-cable-test command can be configured on the interface.
● When GE electrical interfaces on the S1720GW-E, S1720GWR-E, S1720GF,
S1720GFR-P, S2720-EI, S5720-LI, S1730S-H, S2730S-S, S5735-L-I, S5735-
L1,S300, S5735-L, S5735S-L1, S5735S-L, S5735S-L-M, S5720S-LI, S5735S-H,
S5736-S, S500, S5735-S, S5735S-S, S5735-S-I and S5720I-SI work at a rate of
1000 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s and the interface is up, the detection result is
unavailable.
● On the S6720S-EI, S5732-H, S6730-H, S6730S-H, S6730-S, S6730S-S, S6735-S,
and S6720-EI, when a GE electrical interface works at a rate of 100 Mbit/s,
the detection result is unavailable.
● On the S5731-H, S5731S-H, S5731-S, and S5731S-S, when a GE electrical
interface works at a rate of 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, or 1000 Mbit/s, the
detection result is unavailable.
● The detection result is unavailable when the interface is in the Up state or the
remote interface is shut down.
● The FE electrical port uses only two pairs of wire pairs. The two pairs of wire
sequences used for VCT detection are unavailable.
● When the GE electrical port works at the rate of 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s, only
two pairs of cables are used to detect the VCT status. The other two pairs of
cables do not detect and return the default result.
● The virtual cable test (VCT) cannot be performed on multiple interfaces of the
device at the same time.

Example
# Test the cable connected to GE0/0/1.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] virtual-cable-test
Warning: The command will stop service for a while. Continue? [Y/N]y
Info: This operation may take a few seconds. Please wait for a moment..........done.
Pair A length: 189meter(s)
Pair B length: 189meter(s)
Pair C length: 189meter(s)
Pair D length: 189meter(s)
Pair A state: Ok
Pair B state: Ok
Pair C state: Ok
Pair D state: Ok
Info: The test result is only for reference.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1699

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Table 4-29 Description of the virtual-cable-test command output

Item Description

Pair A/B/C/D Four pairs of circuits in a network cable.

A: orange/white and orange
B: green/withe and green
C: blue/white and blue
D: brown/white and brown

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1700

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Item Description

Pair A length Length of a network cable:

● The length is the distance between
the interface and the faulty point if a
fault occurs.
● The length is the actual length of the
cable when the cable works properly.
● The length is the default length 0 m
if the interface is not connected to
any network cable. The test result of
different chips may vary, and the
displayed result is for reference only.
NOTE
If the cable length is displayed as Unknown,
the cable status is OK, but the cable length
test result cannot be used.
If the cable status is Open (indicating open
circuit), the cable length in the VCT result
can be used.
If the remote interface is shut down, the
cable length in the VCT result can be used for
combo electrical interfaces on the following
switches:
● S1720-28GWR-PWR-4TP-E
● S2720-EI
● S5720I-SI
● S5720-12TP-LI-AC, S5720-12TP-PWR-LI-
AC, S5720-28TP-PWR-LI-AC,
S5720S-28TP-PWR-LI-AC, S5720-28TP-
PWR-LI-AC, S5720-28TP-LI-AC,
S5720-52X-LI-48S-AC, S5720-52X-LI-48S-
AC1, S5720-52X-LI-48S-DC1, S5720-52X-
LI-24S-AC1
If the remote interface is shut down, the
cable length in the VCT result can be used for
electrical interfaces on the following
switches:
● S2720-EI
● S5731-H
● S6730-H
● S6730S-H
● S5720-16X-PWH-LI-AC, S5720-28X-PWH-
LI-AC, S5720-28X-PWH-LI-ACF,
S5720-52X-LI-48S-AC, S5720-52X-LI-48S-
AC1, S5720-52X-LI-48S-DC1, S5720-52X-
LI-24S-AC1

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1701

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Item Description

Pair A state Network cable status:

● Ok: indicates that the circuit pair is
terminated normally.
● Open: indicates that the circuit pair is
not terminated.
● Short: indicates that the circuit pair is
short-circuited.
● Crosstalk: indicates that the circuit
pairs interfere with each other.
● Unknown: Other unknown fault
causes are detected or the detection
result is inaccurate.

4.3 Logical Interface Configuration Commands

4.3.1 Command Support

Commands provided in this section and all the parameters in the commands are
supported by all switch models by default, unless otherwise specified. For details,
see specific commands.

4.3.2 display interface loopback

Function
Using the display interface loopback command, you can view the status and
traffic statistics of a loopback interface.

Format
display interface loopback [ loopback-number | main ]

Parameters

Parameter Description Value

loopback- Displays status and traffic statistics about a specified -

number loopback interface.
If loopback-number is not specified, the status and
traffic statistics of all loopback interfaces are displayed.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1702

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Parameter Description Value

main Displays status and traffic statistics about a Loopback -

interface.
A Loopback interface has no sub-interfaces. Status and
traffic statistics about a Loopback interface are
displayed whether you specify the main parameter or
not.

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

In the scenario where you need to monitor the status of an interface or locate an
interface fault, you can use the display interface loopback command to collect
the statistics on the interface including the status. Through the displayed
information, you can collect the traffic statistics and troubleshoot the interface.

Prerequisite

A loopback interface has been created using the interface loopback command.

Example
# Display the status and traffic statistics of a specified loopback interface.
<HUAWEI> display interface loopback 6
LoopBack6 current state : UP
Line protocol current state : UP (spoofing)
Description:
Route Port,The Maximum Transmit Unit is 1500
Internet Address is 10.3.3.3/32
Current system time: 2012-02-25 09:56:04
Last 10 seconds input rate 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec
Last 10 seconds output rate 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec
Realtime 0 seconds input rate 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec
Realtime 0 seconds output rate 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec
Input: 0 packets,0 bytes
0 unicast,0 broadcast,0 multicast
0 errors,0 unknownprotocol
Output:0 packets,0 bytes
0 unicast,0 broadcast,0 multicast
0 errors
Input bandwidth utilization : 0%
Output bandwidth utilization : 0%

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1703

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Table 4-30 Description of the display interface loopback command output

Item Description

LoopBack6 current Physical status of a loopback interface. The physical

state status of a loopback interface is always Up after the
loopback interface is created.

Line protocol current Link layer protocol status of a loopback interface. The
state link layer protocol status of a loopback interface is
always Up after the loopback interface is created.

Description Indicates the description of the interface, which can be

set by using the description command.

Route Port,The Indicates the maximum transmission unit (MTU). The

Maximum Transmit default MTU is 1500 bytes. Packets longer than the
Unit is 1500 MTU are fragmented before being transmitted. If
fragmentation is not allowed, the packet is discarded.

Internet Address is Indicates the IP address of the interface.

Current system time Indicates the current system time.

Input bandwidth Indicates the percentage of the rate for receiving

utilization packets to the total bandwidth.

Output bandwidth Indicates the percentage of the rate for sending packets
utilization to the total bandwidth.

4.3.3 display interface null

Function
Using the display interface null command, you can view the status and traffic
statistics of a null interface.

Format
display interface null [ 0 | main ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

0 Displays status and traffic statistics about a The value can

specified Null interface. be 0 only.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1704

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Parameter Description Value

main Displays status and traffic statistics about a Null -

interface.
A Null interface has no sub-interfaces. Status and
traffic statistics about a Null interface are displayed
whether you specify the main parameter or not.

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

The display interface null command displays the status of a null interface. The
interface status information includes: the physical status, link layer protocol status,
description, MTU, IP address, current system time, last time statistics about the
null interface are cleared, incoming and outgoing packet rates in bit/s and pps,
total numbers of packets and bytes received and sent by the null interface, and
percentages of the rates for receiving and sending packets to the total bandwidth.

Precautions

There is only one null interface, namely, NULL 0.

Example
# Display the status and traffic statistics of Null 0 interface.
<HUAWEI> display interface null 0
NULL0 current state : UP
Line protocol current state : UP (spoofing)
Description:
Route Port,The Maximum Transmit Unit is 1500
Internet protocol processing : disabled
Physical is NULL DEV
Current system time: 2012-02-25 10:25:59
Last 300 seconds input rate 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec
Last 300 seconds output rate 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec
Realtime 0 seconds input rate 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec
Realtime 0 seconds output rate 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec
Input: 0 packets,0 bytes
0 unicast,0 broadcast,0 multicast
0 errors,0 unknownprotocol
Output:0 packets,0 bytes
0 unicast,0 broadcast,0 multicast
0 errors
Input bandwidth utilization : 0%
Output bandwidth utilization : 0%

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1705

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Table 4-31 Description of the display interface null command output

Item Description

NULL0 current state Indicates the physical status of the null interface.
The physical status of the null interface is always Up.

Line protocol current Indicates the link layer protocol status of the
state interface. The protocol status of the null interface is
always Up.

Description Indicates the description of the interface, which can

be set by using the description command.

Route Port A Layer 3 interface.

The Maximum Transmit Indicates the MTU of the interface.

Unit

Internet protocol Indicates that the Internet protocol processing is not

processing : disabled configured.

Physical is NULL DEV Indicates that the interface is null.

Current system time Indicates the current system time.

Last 300 seconds input Indicates the rates for sending and receiving the bytes
rate and the packets by the interface in the last five
Last 300 seconds output minutes.
rate

Realtime 0 seconds Indicates the real-time rates of sending and receiving

input rate the bytes and the packets.
Realtime 0 seconds It refers to the interval between two display
output rate commands that are run on the same interface. The
maximum value is the statistical interval displayed in
the previous piece of information. This entry is
displayed only when information about a logical
interface is viewed.

Input Indicates the total number of packets and the total

number of bytes received by the interface.

Output Indicates the total number of packets and the total

number of bytes sent by the interface.

Input bandwidth Indicates the percentage of the rate for receiving

utilization packets to the total bandwidth.

Output bandwidth Indicates the percentage of the rate for sending

utilization packets to the total bandwidth.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1706

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

4.3.4 display interface virtual-ethernet

Function
The display interface virtual-ethernet command displays status and traffic
statistics about Virtual Ethernet (VE) interfaces.

NOTE

Only the S5731-H, S5731-S, S5731S-H, S5731S-S, S5732-H, S6730-H, S6730S-H, S6730-S, and
S6730S-S support this command.

Format
display interface virtual-ethernet [ ve-number | main ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

ve-number Displays status and traffic statistics about a The sequence

specified VE interface. number ranges
from 0 to 511.
If no interface number is specified, information
about all VE interfaces is displayed.

main Displays status and traffic statistics about a VE -

interface.
If you do not specify the main parameter, status
and traffic statistics about both a VE interface
and VE sub-interfaces are displayed.

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
In the scenario where you need to monitor the status of an interface or locate an
interface fault, you can use the display interface virtual-ethernet command to
collect the statistics on the interface including the status. Through the displayed
information, you can collect the traffic statistics and troubleshoot the interface.

Example
# Display the status and traffic statistics of VE 0/0/1.
<HUAWEI> display interface virtual-ethernet 0/0/1
Virtual-Ethernet0/0/1 current state : UP

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1707

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Line protocol current state : UP

Description:
Route Port,The Maximum Transmit Unit is 1500
Internet protocol processing : disabled
IP Sending Frames' Format is PKTFMT_ETHNT_2, Hardware address is xxxx-xxxx-xxxx
Current system time: 2017-01-02 02:20:03
Last 300 seconds input rate 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec
Last 300 seconds output rate 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec
Input: 0 packets, 0 bytes
Unicast: 0, Multicast: 0
Broadcast: 0
Output: 0 packets, 0 bytes
Unicast: 0, Multicast: 0
Broadcast: 0
Input bandwidth utilization : 0%
Output bandwidth utilization : 0%

Table 4-32 Description of the display interface virtual-Ethernet command

output
Item Description

Virtual-Ethernet0/0/1 Physical status of the VE interface:

current state ● UP: indicates that the interface is Up.
● DOWN: indicates that the interface is Down.
● Administratively DOWN: indicates that the
administrator uses the shutdown command on the
interface.

Line protocol current Indicates the link layer protocol status of the interface:
state ● UP: indicates that the link layer protocol on the
interface is Up.
● DOWN: indicates that the link layer protocol on the
interface is Down or no IP address is assigned to the
interface.

Description Description of an interface. The information allows

users to know about functions of the interface and is
used to identify the current interface.
You can run the description command to configure or
modify the description of an interface.

Route Port Layer 3 interface. If this parameter specifies a Layer 2

interface, the value of this parameter will be displayed
as "Switch Port".
You can run the portswitch command to change the
mode of an interface from Layer 3 to Layer 2.

The Maximum MTU of the interface.

Transmit Unit is

Internet protocol No IP address is configured for the interface. If an IP

processing : disabled address is configured for the interface, the interface's IP
address and subnet mask are displayed.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1708

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Item Description

IP Sending Frames' Format of frames sent by the IP protocol, including

Format is PKTFMT_ETHNT_2, Ethernet_802.3, and Ethernet_SNAP.

Hardware address is MAC address of the interface.

Current system time Current system time.

If the system is configured with a time zone and is in
the summer daylight saving time, the time is displayed
in the format of YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS UTC±HH:MM
DST.

Last 300 seconds Incoming packet rate (bits per second and packets per
input rate second) within the last 300 seconds.

Last 300 seconds Outgoing packet rate (bits per second and packets per
output rate second) within the last 300 seconds.

Input Total number of received packets.

Output Total number of sent packets.

Unicast Number of unicast packets that are received or sent by

the interface.

Broadcast Number of broadcast packets that are received or sent

by the interface.

Input bandwidth Inbound bandwidth usage.

utilization

Output bandwidth Outbound bandwidth usage.

utilization

4.3.5 interface loopback

Function
The interface loopback command creates a loopback interface.
The undo interface loopback command deletes a loopback interface.

Format
interface loopback loopback-number
undo interface loopback loopback-number

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1709

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Parameters

Parameter Description Value

loopback- Specifies the The value is an integer. On the S5735S-H,

number number of a S5736-S, S5735-S, S5735S-S, S5731-H, S5731S-
loopback H, S6730-H, and S6720S-S series switches, the
interface. value ranges from 0 to 1023. On the S1720GW,
S1720GWR, S1720GW-E, S1720GWR-E, S1720GF,
S1720GFR-P,S1730S-H, S2720-EI, S5720-LI,
S2730S-S, S5735-L-I, S5735-L1,S300, S5735-L,
S5735S-L, S5735S-L1, S5735S-L-M, and S5720S-
LI series switches, the value ranges from 0 to 15.

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
A loopback interface is always Up.

The IP address of a loopback interface is usually specified as the source address of

packets.

Example
# Create loopback interface 5.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface loopback 5
[HUAWEI-LoopBack5]

4.3.6 interface null

Function
Using the interface null command, you can enter the null interface view.

Format
interface null 0

Parameters
None

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1710

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

The Null0 interface never forwards or accepts any traffic. All traffic sent to this
interface is directly discarded. Unnecessary traffic can be sent to the Null0
interface to avoid using ACLs.

Precautions

There is only one null interface, named null0. This interface is always Up and
cannot be shut down or deleted.

Example
# Enter the view of the Null0 interface.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface null 0
[HUAWEI-NULL0]

4.3.7 interface virtual-ethernet

Function
The interface virtual-ethernet command displays the view of an existing virtual
Ethernet (VE) interface, or creates a VE interface and displays the VE interface
view.

The undo interface virtual-ethernet command deletes a VE interface.

By default, no VE interface is created.

NOTE

Only the S5731-H, S5731-S, S5731S-H, S5731S-S, S5732-H, S6730-H, S6730S-H, S6730-S, and
S6730S-S support this command.

Format
interface virtual-ethernet ve-number[.subnumber ]

undo interface virtual-ethernet ve-number [.subnumber ]

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1711

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

ve-number Specifies the number of a VE The sequence number is an integer

interface. that ranges from 0 to 511.

subnumber Specifies the number of a VE The value is an integer that ranges

sub-interface. from 1 to 1024.

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
A VE interface is a logical interface with Ethernet features on a switch. VE
interfaces are mainly used in scenarios where Ethernet over GRE is configured or
an L2VPN accesses to an L3VPN. You need to create a VE sub-interface when
configuring an L2VPN to access to an L3VPN.

Example
# Create VE interface 0//0/1.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface virtual-ethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-Virtual-Ethernet0/0/1]

# Create VE sub-interface VE0/0/1.1.

<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface virtual-ethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-Virtual-Ethernet0/0/1] ve-group 1 l3-access
[HUAWEI-Virtual-Ethernet0/0/1] quit
[HUAWEI] interface virtual-ethernet 0/0/1.1
[HUAWEI-Virtual-Ethernet0/0/1.1]

4.3.8 portswitch (VE interface view)

Function
The portswitch command changes the working mode of a virtual Ethernet (VE)
interface from Layer 3 mode to Layer 2 mode.

The undo portswitch command changes the working mode of a VE interface

from Layer 2 mode to Layer 3 mode.

By default, a VE interface works in Layer 3 mode.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1712

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

NOTE

Only the S5731-H, S5731-S, S5731S-H, S5731S-S, S5732-H, S6730-H, S6730S-H, S6730-S, and
S6730S-S support this command.

Format
portswitch
undo portswitch

Parameters
None

Views
VE interface view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
By default, a VE interface on the device works in Layer 3 mode. To enable Layer 2
forwarding on the VE interface, run the portswitch command to change the
working mode to Layer 2 mode.
Precautions
● If an interface has the non-attribute configuration, this command cannot be
executed. Before running this command, delete the non-attribute
configuration on the interface.
● The minimum interval between running the portswitch and undo portswitch
commands must be 30s.

Example
# Change VE0/0/1 to Layer 2 mode.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface virtual-ethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-Virtual-Ethernet0/0/1] portswitch

4.3.9 statistic enable (sub-interface view)

Function
The statistic enable command enables the traffic statistics function on a sub-
interface.
The undo statistic enable command disables the traffic statistics function on a
sub-interface.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1713

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

By default, the traffic statistics function is disabled on a sub-interface.

NOTE

Only the S5731-H, S5731S-H, S5731-S, S5731S-S, S5732-H, S6730-H, S6730S-H, S6730-S, and
S6730S-S support this configuration.

Format
statistic enable { both | inbound | outbound }

undo statistic enable { both | inbound | outbound }

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

both Enables the traffic -

statistics function for
incoming and outgoing
traffic.

inbound Enables the traffic -

statistics function for
incoming traffic.

outbound Enables the traffic -

statistics function for
outgoing traffic.

Views
GE sub-interface view, XGE sub-interface view, MultiGE sub-interface view, 25GE
sub-interface view, 40GE sub-interface view, 100GE sub-interface view, Eth-Trunk
sub-interface view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

To check the network status or locate network faults, you can use the statistic
enable command to enable the traffic statistics function on sub-interfaces. The
switch then collects traffic statistics on the sub-interfaces.

Precautions

● After you run the undo statistic enable command on a sub-interface, the
switch stops collecting traffic statistics on the sub-interface, and the collected
traffic statistics are deleted.

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1714

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

● The switch uses ACL resources when collecting traffic statistics. If the traffic
statistics function is enabled on too many sub-interfaces, other services may
fail to obtain ACL resources.
● Traffic statistics on sub-interfaces is unavailable for error packets.
● The device supports traffic statistics collection on a maximum of 4096 sub-
interfaces.
● VXLAN Layer 2 sub-interfaces do not support traffic statistics collection.

Example
# Enable the traffic statistics function for incoming and outgoing traffic on the
sub-interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1.1.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/1.1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet1/0/1.1] statistic enable both

4.3.10 trigger trap

Function
Using the trigger trap command, you can configure an interface to send traps to
the NMS.

Format
trigger trap { linkup | linkdown }

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
linkup Sends the LinkUp trap to the NMS. -
linkdown Sends the LinkDown trap to the NMS. -

Views
Loopback interface view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
The traps configured by trigger trap are used to check whether the network
between the NMS and device functions properly. If the NMS receives a trap sent
from the interface, the network between the NMS and device functions properly;
otherwise, a fault may occur on the network.
Prerequisites

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1715

S300, S500, S1700, S2700, S5700, and S6700 Series
Ethernet Switches
Command Reference 4 Interface Management Commands

Run the snmp-agent trap enable feature-name command to enable the LinkUp
and LinkDown traps.
Precautions
The trigger trap command is used on loopback interfaces to check the network
between the NMS and device. The interface status does not change according to
the meaning of the trap. For example, if the trigger trap linkdown command is
used, the loopback interface sends a LinkDown trap to the NMS but does not
change its status to Down. If you have used the trigger trap linkdown command,
you must run the trigger trap linkup command to clear the LinkDown trap on
the NMS.

Example
# Configure a loopback interface to send the LinkUp trap to the NMS.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface loopback 1
[HUAWEI-LoopBack1] trigger trap linkup

Issue 02 (2022-08-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1716